ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

                                                                                                                            EBCS
BASIS OF DESIGN AND ACTION ON STRUCTURES  EBCS-1
STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE  EBCS-2
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES  EBCS-3
DESIGN OF COMPOSITE STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES 
EBCS-4
UTILIZATION OF TIMBER  EBCS-5
DESIGN OF MASONARY STRUCTRES 
EBCS-6
FOUNDATIONS  EBCS-7
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE 
EBCS-8
LIMIT STATE DESIGN AIDS FOR REINFORCED 
CONCRETE MEMBERS  ESCP-2
-~
.?~ ~ " "
"
~ ;;i";

-",EBCS-1 I
~ 'if
v
~,
f:
~
~
i
r
;
!
i
,.
\.

;
f
t

"

-";;
~ BASIS Building
.§~~!an OF DESIGN AND
CodeStandard ACTIONS ON

~ STRUCTURES c;~~/
, '

. :
(

; Ministryof Works& UrbanDevelopment

~ Addis Ababa, Ethiopia
1995

-\
1 ,'C"rT
 oJ
, i,

@ Ministry of Works & Urban Development

Addis Ababa,Ethiopia
1995 ~

,i J

I\ I ~

,~
, w

..

~
.
~~
EBCS-1
BASIS OF DESICN AND ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES
.;;

11
'i

f~
1.
~

i,
I.

I¥

,':
Project Council Members Technical Committee Members l
,
!;
Abashawl Woldemariam (Chairman) Bekele Mekonnen (Secretary) !
Almayehu Gizawt Assefa Desta ,
Bekele Meknonnen Negussie Tebedge 1
Negussie Tebedge i
Siefu Birke !
Wouhib Kebede t

.;. t Deceased

Editor
Prof.NegussieTebedge
.
~-
I
.l
~

1"

.
.
~.

FOREWORD

The Proclamationto define the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive
Organsof the Transitional Governmentof Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowersthe Ministry of Works
and Urban Developmentto preparethe Country's Building Code, issue Standardsfor designand
constructionworks, and follow up and supervisethe implementationof same.

In exerciseof thesepowers and in dischargeof its responsibility,the Ministry is issuing a

series of Building Code Standards of generalapplication.

The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the

application of which is deemedto ensurecomplianceof buildings with the minimum requirements
for design, constructionand quality of materials set down by the National Building Code.
~

..
The major benefits to be gained in applying these standardsare the harmonization of
-professional practice and the ensuringof appropriatelevels of safety, healthand economywith due
-consideration of the objective conditions and needsof the country.

As these standardsare technical documentswhich, by their very nature, require periodic

updating, revised editions will be issuedby the Ministry from time to time as appropriate.

The Ministry welcomescommentsand suggestionson all aspectof the Ethiopian Building

Code Standards. All feedbackreceived will be carefully reviewed by professionalexperts in the
field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendmentsin future
editions.

Haile Assegidie
Minister
Ministry of Works and
Urban Development
. 1995

..
-;
..
I
1

~
1

j
4

,I
 o ~ "".-. ..~ i~

.t
'I:

-- .
t

- T ABLE OF CONTENTS
"
CHAPTER 1 -BASIS OF DESIGN 1 -Ii

1.1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1.1 Scope 1
1.1.2 Assumptions 1
1.1.3 Definitions 2
1.1.4 Symbols 6

1.2 REQUIREMENTS 9
1.2.1 FundamentalRequirements 9
1.2.2 Reliability Differentiation 9
1.2.3 Design Situations 10
1.2.4 Design Working Life 11
1.2.5 Durability 11
1.2.6 Quality Assurance 12

1.3 LIMIT STATES 12

1.3.1 General 12
1.3.2 Ultimate Limit States 12
-1.3.3 ServiceabilityLimit States 12
-1.3.4 Limit StateDesign 13

-1.4 ACTIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL INFLUENCES 13

-1.4.2 CharacteristicValues of Actions 14
1.4.3 Other RepresentativeValues of Variable and AccidentalActions 15
1.4.4 EnvironmentalInfluences 16

1.5 MATERIAL PROPERTIES 16

1.6 GEOMETRICAL DATA 17
1.7 MODELLING FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND RESISTANCE 17
1.7.1 General 17
1.7.2 Modelling in the Case of Static Actions 17
1.7.3 Modelling in the Case of Dynamic Actions 18

1.8 DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING 18

1.8.1 General 18
1.8.2 Types of Tests 18
1.8.3 Derivation of DesignValues 19

1.9 VERIFICATION BY THE PARTIAL SAFETY FACTOR METHOD 20

1.9.1 General 20
1.9.2 Limitations and Simplifications 20
-~ 1.9.3 DesignValues 21
1.9.3.1 Design Values ofActions 21
~~ 1.9.3.2" Design Values of the Effects ofActions 21
'~.. 1.9.3.3 Design Valuesof Material Properties 22
1.9.3.4 Design Values of GeometricalData 22
~
i,j VII
..
j ~

\
~
r7:' '! .

.
1.9.3.5 DesignResistance 22 ~

1.9.4 Ultimate Limit States 23

1.9.4.1 Verifications of StaticEquilibrium and Strength 23
1.9.4.2 Combination ofActions 23
1.9.4.3 Partial SafetyFactors 25
, 1.9.4.4 '¥ Factors 27
1.9.4.5 Simplified Verificationfor Building Structures 27
1.9.4.6 PartialSafetyFactorsforMaterials 27
1.9.5 ServiceabilityLimit States 28
1.9.5.1 Verification ofServiceability 28
1.9.5.-3 Partial SafetyFactors 29
1.9.5.4 '¥ Factors 29
1.9.5.5 Simplified Verificationfor Building Structures 29
, c 1.9.5.() Partial Safety Factorsfor Materials 29

CHAPTER 2 -ACTION ON STRUCTURES-DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED

LOADS 31

2.1 GENERAL 31
2.1.1 Scope 31

2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS 31

2.2.1 Self-Weight 31
2.2.2 ImposedLoads 32

2.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS 32

2.3.1 General 32
2.3.2 Self-Weight 32
2.3.3 ImposedLoads 32

2.4 DENSITIES OF BUILDING MATERIALS AND STOREDMATERIALS 32

2.4.1 Definitions 32
2.4.2 Tables 33

2.5 SELF-WEIGHT OF CONSTRUCTIONELEMENTS 41

2.5.1 Representationof Actions 41
2.5.2 Load Arrange~ents 42
2.5.3 Self-Weight-Characteristic Values 42
2.5.3.1 AssessmentofSelf-Weight 42

2.6 IMPOSED LOADS ON BUILDINGS 43

2.6.1 Representationof Actions 43
2.6.2 Load Arrangements 44
2.6.2.1 Horizontal Members 44
2.6.2.2 VerticalMembers 44 ..!-
2.6.3 ImposedLoads-Characteristic Values 44
2.6.3.1 Residential,Social,Commercialand AdministrationArea 44 .,
2.6.3.2 Garageand VehicleTraffic Areas 46 i
-2.6.3.3 Areasfor Storageand Industrial Activities 48 "!
2.6.3.4 Roofs 48

~"
A ,
viii
 ")

--
2.6.4 Horizontal Loads on Partition Walls and Barriers due to Persons 49

CHAPTER 3 -WIND ACTIONS 51

3.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS 51

3.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS' 51
3.4 REPRESENTATION OF ACTIONS 51
3.4.1 Expansionof the Wind Actions and the Responseof the Structures 51
3.4.2 Modelling of Wind Actions 52

3.5 WIND PRESSUREON SURFACES 52

3.5.1 Field of Application 52
3.5.2 External Pressure 53
3.5.3 Internal Pressure 53
3.5.4 Net Pressure 53

3.6 WIND FORCES 53

3.6.1 Wind Forcesfrom Pressures 53
3.6.2 Friction Force 54

3.7 REFERENCE WIND 55

3.7.1 ReferenceWind Pressure 55
3.7.2 ReferenceWind Velocity 55
~ 3.7.3 Annual Probabilitiesof Exceedenceother than 0.02 56
.
3.8 WIND PARAMETER 57
--3.8.1 Mean Wind Velocity 57
3.8.2 RoughnessCoefficient 57
3.8.3 Terrain Categories 57
3.8.4 TopographyCoefficient 58
3.8.5 Exposure Coefficient 60

3.9 CHOICE OF PROCEDURES 61

3.9.1 General 61
3.9.2 Criteria for the Choice 61
3.9.3 Dynamic Coefficient for GustWind Response 61
3.9.4 Vortex Shedding,AeroelasticInstability and Dynamic InterferenceEffects 67
3.9.4.1 General 67
3.9.4.2 Field of Application 67

;I Appendix A -Aerodynamic Coefficients 69

I;
A.1 GENERAL 69

A.2 BUILDINGS 69
~i A.2.1 General 69
\ A.2.2 Vertical Walls of RectangularPlan Buildings 70
A.2.3 Flat roofs 71
J A.2.4 Monopitch Roofs 73
A.2.5 Duopitch Roofs 75
A.2.6 Hipped Roofs 78

ix
 .
A.2.7 MufrispanRoofs 78 .
A.2.8 Vaulted Roofs and Domes 80

A.3 CANOPY ROOFS 84

A.4 FREE-STANDING BOUNDARY WALLS, FENCES AND SIGNBOARDS 88
,A.4.1 Solid BoundaryWalls 88
A.4.2 PressureCoefficientsfor PorousFences 90
A.4.3 Signboards 90

A.5 STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS WITH RECTANGULAR SECTIONS 91

A.6 STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS WITH SHARPEDGED SECTION 91
A.7 STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS WITH REGULAR POLYGONAL SECTION 94
A.8 CIRCULAR CYLINDERS 95
A.8.1 ExternalPressureCoefficients 95
A.8.2 Force Coefficients 97

A.9 SPHERES 98
A.IO LATTICE STRUCTURESAND SCAFFOLDINGS 99
A.II FRICTION COEFFICIENTS CFR 100
A.12 EFFECTIVE SLENDERNESS)' AND SLENDERNESSREDUCTION FACTOR Vt>. 102

,
I: ~
 ". c.. " 'J'

-.CHAPTER 1 ~
-;j "

BASIS OF DESIGN ~
~
.,
"
I; "
,:4
.,i
f'

1.1 INTRODUCTION :~!

1.1.1 Scope l
,!I:
it',
~
';

(1) This Chapter establishesthe principl~s and requirements for safety lli'1dserviceability of structures, :i:"
describes the basis for design and verification ar.d gives guidelin=s for related aspects of structural ~
reliability .f~t~
~~,
(2) This Chapter provides the basis and general principles for the structural design of buildings and 1:.1
civil engineering wor~s including geotecfillical ~spectsand sh~ll b~ ~sed in conjunc.tion w~th the ,ot~er ~~
parts of EBCS 1. This Chapter relates to all CIrcumstancesm "whIcha structure IS requIred to give i'~
adequateperformance, including fir~ and seismic events. ,~

(3) This Chapter may al~o be used as a ?asis for .the design of s(ructures not c.overed in EBCS 2 t.:) f,[
8 and where other matenals or other a:::tl0nsoutsIde the scope of EBCS 1 are mvol'/ed.
I
,~
it'

(4) This Chapter is also applic~ble to stTUctural.desig~for the execu~ionstage and structural design
.-for temporary structures, provided that approprIate adjustments outside the scope of ENV 1991 are 1!~jt
' '"
made.
,I'
-.(5) This Chapter also gives some simplified methods of verification w}-Jchare applicable to buildings '.

and other common construction works.

(6) Design procedures .lnd data relevant to the design of bridges and other construction works which
are not completely covered in this Chapter may be obtained from other Chapters ,)f EBCS 1 ami oth,:;r
relevant Eurocodes.

(7) This Chapter is not directly intended for the structural appraisal of existing construction in
developing the design of repairs and alterations or assessingchanges of use but may be so used where
applicable.

(8) This Chapter does not completely cover the design of special construction works which require
unusual reliability considerations, such as nuclear structures, for which specific design procedures t4
should be used. ., ft,

,
(9). This Chapter does not completely cover the design of structures where deformations modip} direct t:
actions. V
I~
.1.1.2 Assumptions 1.
i;
-The following assumptions apply: i,

~~. (a) The. choice of the ~tructural sysrem and the design of a structure is made by appropriately I
qualIfied and expenenced personnel. .]
-(b) Execution is carried out by personnel having the appropriate skill and experience. t

-EBCS -1 1995 1

. i
t
t
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING
~- CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(c) Adequatesupervisionand quality control is provided during executionof the work, i.e. in
designoffices, factories, plants arid on site. .
(d) The constructionmaterialsandproductsareusedasspecifiedin this Codeor in ENVs EBCS
2 to 8 or in the relevantsupportingmaterialor productspecifications. l
(e) The structurewill be adequatelymaintained. I
(f) The structure will be used in accordancewith the designassumptions. I
(g) Design proceduresare valid only when the requirementsfor the materials, executionand '
, workmanshipgiven in EBCS 2 to 8 are also compliedwith.

1.1.3 Definitions
(1) Unless otherwisestatedin the following, the terminologyused in the InternationalStandardISO
8930:1987is adopted.

Note: Most definitions are reproducedfrom ISO 8930:1987.

(2) The following terms are used in cornmonfor EBCS 1 to 8 with the following meaning:

(a) Construction Works: Everythingthatis constructedor resultsfrom constructionoperations.

This definition accords with ISO 6707: Part 1. The term covers both building and civil
engineeringworks. It refers to the completeconstructionworks comprisingstructural, III
structuraland geotechnicalelements. i
:

(b) Type of building or civil engineeringworks: Type of constructionworks designatingits -

intendedpurpose,e.g dwelling house, retainingwall, industrialbuilding, road bridge. .

(c) Type of construction: Indication of principal structuralmaterial, e.g. reinforcedconcrete

construction, steelconstruction,timber construction,masonryconstruction,compositesteel
and concreteconstruction.
(d) Method of construction: Manner in which the executionwill be carried out, e.g. cast in
place, prefabricated,cantilevered.

(e) Construction material: Material used in constructionwork, e.g. concrete,steel, timber,

masonry.II
(t) Structure: Organizedcombinationof connectedpartsdesignedto provide somemeasu.eof.rigidity.
ISO 6707: Part 1 gives the same definition but adds It or a constructionworks
having such an arrangement".

(g) Form of structure: The arrangementof structuralelements,suchas beam, column, arch,

foundationpiles. Forms of structureare, for example,frames, suspension
bridges.

(h) Structural system: The load-bearingelementsof a building or civil engineeringworks and

the way in which theseelementsfunction together.

(i:) Structural model: The idealizationof the structuralsystemusedfor the purposesof analysis :
and design.
(j) Execution: The activity of creatinga building or civil engineeringworks. The term covers -t
work on site; it may also signify the fabricationof componentsoff site and their subsequent
erectionon site.

2 EBCS -1 1995 ._Cc

 ,"' ,0" i-~
,

--CHAPTER 1.. BASIS OF DESIGN

,
-(3) Special terms relating to design in general are: t

(a) Design criteria: The quantitative formulations ~'hich describe for each limit state the
conditions to be fulfilled.

(b) Design situations: Those sets of physical conditions representing a certain time interval for
which the design will demonstrate that relevant limit states are not exceeded.

(c) Transient ~esign si~ati~n: Design situation which .is relevan~during a ~e:iod much shorter
i ~
J

that the desIgn working lIfe of the structure and WhIChas a hIgh probabIlIty of occurrence. :
It refers to temporary conditions of the structure, of use, or exposure, e.g. during ,~
construction or repair. ~

(d) Persistent design situation: Design situation which is relevant duri?g a period of the same .I
order as the design working life of the structure. Generally it refers to conditions of normal f
use ti
.It
¥
~~
(e) Accidental design situation: Design situation involving exceptional conditions of the ~
structure or its exposure, e.g. fire, explosion, impact or local failure. i
r:"
1-
(I) Design working life: The assumedperiod for which a structure is to be used for its intended t
purpose with anticipated maintenance but without substantial repair being necessary. j:
,,
.-(g) Hazard: Exceptionally unusual and severe event, e.g. an abnormal action or environmental ~
influence, insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation form intended t
..dimensions. ~
f
-F
,
(h) L,oad'arrangement: Identification of the position, magnitude and direction of a free action. f

(i) Load case: Compatible load arrangements, sets of deformations and imperfections I
considered simultaneously with fixed variable actions and permanent actions for a particular ;.
verification.

(j) Limit states: Statesassociatedwith collapse, or with other similar forms of structural failure. t.
They generally correspond to the maximum load-carrying resistance of a structure or .."
structural part. ~

(k) Ultimate limit states: States associated with collapse, or with other similar forms of ~
structural failure. They generally correspond to the maximum load-carr)ing resistance of a i
Ii
structure or structural part. ,

(I) Serviceability limit states: States which correspond to conditions beyond v,.hich specified
service requirements for a structure or structural element are no longer met.

(m) Irreversible serviceability limit states: Limit stateswhich will remain permanently exceeded
~ when the responsible actions are removed.

\ oJ (n) Reversible serviceability limit states: Limit states which will not be exceeded when the
responsible actions are removed.

(0) Resistance: Mechanical property of a component, a cross-section, or a member of a -

~
-EBCS structure, e.g. bending resistance, buckling resistance. .1 1995 3 ,

"
rl'
 ~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .-

(p) Maintenance: The total set of activities perfoqned during the working life of the strucrllre
to preserve its function. .

(q) Strength: Mechanical property of a ffiCl.terial,usually given in units of stress.

(r) Reliability: Reliability covers safety, serviceability and durability of a structure.

(4) 'Terms Telating to actions are

(a) Action:I

(i) Force (load) applied to the structure (direct action)I

(ii) An imposed or constrained deformation or an imposed acceleration caused for example,

~ by temperature changes, moisture variation, uneven settlement or earthquakes (indirect
action).

(b) Action effect: The effect of actions on structural members, e.g.. internal force, moment,
stress, strain.

(c) Pennanent action (G): A.ction which is likely to act throughout a given design situation and
for which the variation in magnitude with time is negligible in relation to the mean value, or
for which the variation is always in the same direction (monotonic) until the action attains a
certain limit value. -
.
(d) Variable action (Q): Action, which is unlikely to act throughout a given design situatior'" -
or for which the variation in magnitude with time is neither negligible in relation to the mean -
value nor monotonic.

(e) Accidental action (A) Action, usually of short duration, which is unlikely to occur with a
significant magnitude over the period of tirrie under consideration during the design working
life. An accidental action can b~ expected in many casesto causesevere consequencesunless
special measures are taken.

(I) Seismic action (AJ: Action which arises due to earthquake ground motions.

(g) Fixed action: Action which may has a fixed distribution over the structure such that the
magnitude and direction of the action are determined unambiguously for the whole structure
if this magnitude and direction are determined at one point on the structure.

(h) Free action: Action which may have any spatial distribution over the structure within given
limits.

(i) Single action: Action that can be assumedto be statistically independent in time and space
of any other action acting on the structure.
(j) Static action: Action which does not cause significant acceleration of the structure or ~

structural members. -f

(k) Dynamic action: Action which causes significant acceleration of the structure or structural
members.

4 EBCS -1 1995

r~L
l
ai,
--CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

(I) Quasi-static action: Dynamic action that can be described by static models in which the
dynamic effects are included.

(m) Representative value of an action: Value used for the verification of a limit state.

(n) Characteristic. value of an action: The principal representative value of an action. In so

far as this characteristic value can be fixed on statistical bases, it is chosen so as to
correspond to a prescribed probability of not being exceeded on the unfavourable side during
a "reference period" taking into account the design working life of the structure and the
duration of the design situation.

(0) Reference period: See (n) above.

(p) Combination values: Values associated with the use .of combinations of actions {see (t)
below to take account of a reduced probability of simultaneous occurrence of the most
unfavourable values of several independent actions.

(q) Frequent value of a variable action: The value determined such that:

(i) the total time, within a chosen period of time, .during which it is exceeded for a
specified part, or
(ii) the frequency with which it is exceeded,

is limited to a giv
;
(r) Quasi-permanent value of a variable action: The value determined such that the total time,
within a chosen period of time, during which it is exceeded is a considerable part of the
chosen period of time.

(s) Design value of an action F d: The value obtained by multiplying the representative value
by the partial safety factor 'YF"

(t) Combination of actions: Set of design values used for the verification of the structural
reliability for a limit state under the simultaneous influence of different actions.

(5) Terms relating to material properties

(a) Characteristic value Xg: The value of a material property having a prescribed probability
of not being attained in a hypothetical unlimited test series. This value generally correspopds
to a specified fractile of the assumed statistical distribution of the particular property of the
material. A nominal value is used as the characteristic value in some circumstances.

(b) Design value of a material property Xd: Value obtained by dividing the characteristic
value by a partial factor 'YMor, in special circumstances, by direct determination.

, .: (6) Terms relating to geometrical data are:

(a) Characteristic value of a geometrical property at: The value usually corresponding to the
; '-" dimensions specified in the design. Where relevant, values of geometrical quantities m~y
.correspond to some prescribed fractile of the statistical distribution.

~ EBCS-.1 1995

- ,
 .-
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(b) Design value of a geometrical property ad: Generally a nominal value. Where relevant, .
I
values of geometrical quantities may correspond to some prescribed fractile of the statistical I
distribution. :
:
1.1.4 Symbols !

,
(1) For the purposes of this Code, the following symbols are used. The notation used is based on I
ISO 3898:1987.

A accidental action
A area ,
A loaded area '

Ad design value of an accidental action

A£d design value of seismic action
AEK characteristic seismic action
Afr area swept by the wind .
AK characteristic value of an accidental action
Art! reference area
.Cd nominal value, or a function of cenain design propenies
of materials
E effect of an action
Ed design value of effects of actions
Ed,dst design effect of destabilizing action
Ed,sib design effect of stabilizing actions .
F action
Fd design value of an action
Ffr resultant fri~tion force
Fk characteristic value of an action
Frtp representative value of an action
Fw resultant wind force
G permanent action
Gd design value of a permanent action C"
Gd,in! lower design value of a permanent action
Gd,sup upper design value of a permanent action
Gind indirect permanent action
Gkj characteristic value of permanent action j
Gk,in/ lower characteristic value of a permanent action
Gk characteristic value of a permanent action
Gk,sup upper characteristic value of a permanent action
H height of a topographic feature
I imponance factor
Iv turbulence intensity
KJ shape parameter
Lt effective length of an upwind slope
Lu actual length of an upwind slope .
P prestressing action A
Pd design value of a prestressing action
Pk characteristic value of a prestressing action
Q variable, action
Qd design value of a variable action
Qind indirect variable action

/.,6 6 EBCS.
1 1995
-~

.,
CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

-Qki characteristic value of the non-dominant variable action i

Qk characteristic value of a single variable action
Qk concentrated load
Qkl characteristic value of the dominant variable action
R resistance
Rd design value of the resistance
Re reynolds number
Rk characteristic resistance
X. material property
Xd design value of a material property
Xk characteristic value of a material property
ad design value of geometrical data
anom nominal value of geometrical data
ak characteristic dimension
b
CALT width offactor
altitude the structure 1
Cd dynamic coefficient 1
CD1R direction factor ,
Ce exposure coefficient t
cf
CJO force
force coefficient
coefficient of structures or structural elements with infinite slenderness ratio 1'

cp pressure coefficient
-cr roughness coefficient
.ct topography coefficient
clEM temporary factor
--d depth of the structure, diameter
e eccentricity of a force or edge distance
g peak factor
gk weight per unit area, or weight per ,unit length
h height of the structure
k equivalent roughness
kT terrain factor
1 length of a horizontal structure
n
p exponent
annual probability of exceedence ;;

qk uniformly distributed load, or line load

qref reference mean velocity pressure
r radius
s factor
t plate thickness
Vm mean wind velocity
vref reference wind velocity
w wind pressure
x horizontal distance of the site from the top of a crest
-". z height above ground
Ze,Z; reference height for local and internal pressure
,- Zo roughness length
~ Zlnin minimum height

'-t EBCS -1 1995 7

i
 r- ";'-:",;c'c

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

...
Indices

e external, exposure
fr friction
i internal, mode number
j current number of incremental area or point of a structure
m mean
ref, reference
z vertical direction

Upper case Greek letters

() torsional angle
<I> upwind slope I
<I>B obstruction factor

Lower case Greek letters Ii

I
I
i
CYan reduction coefficients I
'Y bulk weight desity :
'Y partial safety factor (safety or serviceability)
'YA partial safety factor for accidental actions
'YF partial safety factor for actions, also accounting for model uncertainties and dimensional
variations
'YGA as 'YGbut for accidental design situations
'YG partial safety factor for permanent action
'YGAj as 'YGjbut for accidental design situations .
'YG.in/ partial safety factor for permanent actions in calculating lower design values
'YGj partial safety factor for permanent action j
'YG.sup partial safety factor for permanent actions in calculating upper design values
'YM partial safety factor for a material property, also accounting for model uncertainties and
dimensional variations
'Y", partial safety factor for a material property
),.~'r" .~
"' .' 'Yp partial safety factor for prestressing actions
"(PA as 'Ypbut for accidental design situations
'YQ partial safety factor for variable actions
'YQi partial safety factor for variable action i
'Yrd partial safety factor associated with the uncertainty of the resistance model and the
dimensional variations
'YR partial safety factor for the resistance, including uncertainties in material properties, model
uncertainties and dimensional variations
'YRd partial safety factor associated with the uncertainty of the resistance model
'Ysd partial safety factor associated with the uncertainty of the action and/or action effect mQdel
oa change made to nominal geometrical data for particular design purpose, e.g. assessmentof
effective imperfection
1] conversion factor
A slenderness ratio
v expected frequency, Poisson ratio, kinematic viscosity
~ reduction factor .
", p air density --
,," cf> ~ngle of repose

8 EBCS -1 1995

'"~
-~
 --~'
c';c- ;;:

CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

-- "
'¥:I. reduction factor of force coefficient for structural :"
Jtto coefficient for combination value of a variable action lit
-~2 coefficient for quasi-permanent value of a variable action ~'
V;, reduction factor of force coefficient for square sections with rounded corners, ~
Jttl coefficient for frequent value of a variable action ~
<p solidity ratio I

1.2 REQUIREMENTS ~

1.2.1 F\U1damental Requirements ,

(1) A structure shall be designed and executed in such a way that it will, during its intended life with
appropriate degrees of reliability and in an economic way:
If:

(a) remain fit for the use for which it is required; and ~
(b) sustain all actions and influences likely to occur during execution and use. i
v'

(2) Design according to (1) above implies that due regard is given to structural safety and .I
serviceability, including durability, in both cases. ~
Jj
(3) A structure shall also be designed and executed in such a way that it will not be damaged by ~
events.l~kefire, explosion, impact or consequencesof human errors, to an extent disproportionate to W
the ongmal cause. lli
'f!
i!
I.

--(4) The potential damage shall be avoided or limited by appropriate choice of one or more of the ~
following: i
"\,
-* (a) avoiding, eliminating or reducing the hazards which the structure may sustain; ~
(b) selecting a structural form which has low sensitivity to the hazards considered; r:
(c) selecting a structural form and design that can survive adequately the accidental removal of ~
an individual element or a limited part of the structure, or the occurrence of acceptable ~
I'
localized damage; i
(d) avoiding as far as possible structural systems which may collapse without warning;
(e) tying the structure together.

(5) The above requirements shall be met by the choice of suitable materials, by appropriate design
and detailing, and by specifying control procedures for design, production, execution and use relevant
to the particular project.

1.2.2 Reliability Differentiation

(1) The reliability required for the majority of structures shall be obtained by design and execution
according to EBCS 1 to 8, and appropriate quality assurancemeasures.

(2) A different level of reliability may be generally adopted:

.(a) for structural safety;

-(b) for serviceability;

--" (3) A different level of reliability may depend on:

EBCS -1 1995 9
r

,.,, -
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(a) the cause and mode of failure; -

(b) the possible consequencesof failure in terms or risk to life, injury, potential economic losses
and the level of social inconvenience;
(c) the expense and procedures necessaryto reduce the risk of failure;
(d) different degrees of reliability required at national, regional or local level.

(4) J)ifferentiation of the required levels of reliability in relation to structural safety and serviceability
may be obtained by the classification of whole structures or by the classification of structural
components.

(5) The required

combinations reliability
of the relating
following to structural safety or serviceability may
measures: - be achieved by suitable

(a) Measuresrelating to design:

-Serviceability requirements;
-representative values of actions;
-the choice of partial factors or appropriate quantities in design calculations;
.consideration of durability;
-consideration of the degree of robustness (structural integrity);
-the ~ount and quality of preliminary investigations of soils and possible environmental
influences;
-the accuracy of the mechanical models used; ~
-the stringency of the detailing rules. .

(b) Measures relating to quality assuranceto reduce the risk of hazards in: .

-gross humanerrors;
-design;
-execution.

(6) Within individual reliability levels, the procedures to reduce risks associatedwith various potential
causes of failure may, in certain circumstances, be interchanged to a limited extent. An increase of
effort within one type of measure may be considered to compensate for a reduction of effort within
another type.

1.2.3 Design Situations

(1) The circumstances il'l which the structure may be required to fulfil its function shall be considered
and the relevant design situations selected. The selected design situations shall be sufficiently severe
and so varied as to encompass all conditions which can reasonably be foreseen to occur during the
execution and use of the structure.

(2) Design situations are classified as follows:

(a) persistent situations, wh~ch refer to the conditions of normal use; -

(b) transient situations, which refer to temporary conditions applicable to the structure, e.g.
during execution or repair; ",
(c) accidental situations, which refer to exceptional conditions applicable to the structure or to ~-
its exposure, e.g. to .fire, explosion, impact;
(d) seismic
subjectedsituations,
to seismicwhich
events. refer to exceptional conditions applicable to the structure when .

.1 0 EBCS -1 1995
 '""',

-, CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

-

(3) Information for specific situations for each class is given in other Parts of EBCS 1 to 8,

1.2.4 Design Working Life

(1) The design working life is the assumedperiod for which a structure is to be used for its intended
purpose with anticipated maintenance but without major repair being necessary,

(2) An indication of the required design working life is given in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1 Design Working Life Classification

Class WRequired
k Design
'.
or mg I lie (years) Examples
"

1 1-5 Temporary structure

2 25, Replaceable structural parts, e.g gantry ,

girders, bearings

3 50 Building structures 3.'1dother common struc-

tures
4 100 Monumental building structures, bridges, and "

other civil engineering structures

1.2.5 Durability

-.(1) It is an assumption in design that the durability of a structure or part of it in its environment is
such that it remains fit for use during the design working life given appropriate maintenance.

(2) The structure should be designed in such a way that deterioration should not impair the durability
and performance of the structUre having due regard to the anticipated level of maintenance.

(3) The following interrelated factors shall be considered to ensure an adequately durable structure:

(a) the intended and possible future use of the structure;

(1) the required performance criteria;
(c) the expected environmental influences;
(d) the composition, properties and performance of the materials;
(e) the choice of the structural system;
(f) the shape of members and the structural detailing;
(g) the quality of workmanship, and level of control;
(h) the particular protective measures;
(i) the maintenance during the intended life.

(4) The relevant EBCS 2 to 8 specify the appropriate measures,

.
-(5) The environmental conditions shall be appraised at the design stage to assesstheir significance in
relation to durability and to enable adequateprovisions to be made for protection of the materials and
-.' products.

EBCS -1 1995 11
f
Ij
f
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(6) The degree of deterioration may be -estimated on the basis of calculations, experimental
investigation, experience from earlier constructions, or a combination of these considerations.

1.2.6 Quality Assurance :j

~
(1) It is assumed that appropriate quality assurancemeasuresare taken in order to provide a structure l'
which' corresponds to the requirements and to the assumptionsmade in the design. These ll',easures ~
comprise definition of the reliability requirements, organizational measuresand controls at the stages J
of design, execution, use and maintenance.

1.3 LIMIT STATES ;

1.3.1 General ' ;\

",

(1) Limit states are states beyond which the structure no longer satisfies the design performance

requirements.
(2) In general, a distinction is made between ultimate limit states and serviceability limit states.
Verification of one of the two limit states may be omitted if sufficient irJormation is available to
prove that the requirements of one limit state are met by the other.

(3) Limit states may relate to persistent, transient or accidental desigil situations.
1.3.2 Ultimate Limit States ~

(1) Ultimate limit states are those associated with collapse or with other similar forms of structural .
failure. ~

(2) States prior to structural collapse, which, for simplicity, are considered in place of the collapse
itself are also treated as ultimate limit states.

(3) Ultimate limit states concern:!

(a) the safety of the structure and it contents;

(b) the safety of people.

(4) Ultimate limit states which may require consideration include:

(a) loss of equilibrium of the structure or any part of it, considered as a rigid body;
(b) failure by excessive deformation, transformation of the structure or any part of it into a
mechanism, rupture, loss of stability of the structure or any part of it, including supports and
foundations;
(c) failure caused by fatigue or other time-dependenteffects.

1.3.3 Serviceability Limit States .

(1) Serviceability limit states correspond to conditions beyond which specified service requirements
for a structure or structural element are no longer met. ~- -.-

12 EBCS -1 1995
-.
CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

.(2) The serviceability requirements concern:

(a) the functioning of the construction works or parts of them;

(b) the comfort of people;
(c) the appearance.

(3) A distinction shall be made, if relevant, between reversible and irreversible serviceability limit
states.

(4) Unless specified otherwise, the serviceability requirements should be determined in contracts
and/or in the design.

(5) Serviceability limit states which may require consideration include:

(a) deformations and displacements which affect the appearanceor effective use of the structure
(including the functioning of machines or services) or cause damage to finishes or non-
structural elements;
(b) vibrations which cause discomfort to people, damage to the structure or to the materials it i
supports, or which limit its functional effectiveness;.
(c) damage (including cracking) which is likely to affect appearance, durability or the function
of the structure adversely;
(d) Observable damage caused by fatigue and other time-dependent effects.

~ 1.3.4 Linlit State Design

.(1) Limit state design shall be carried out by:

(a) setting up structural and load models for relevant ultimate and serviceability limit states to
be considered in the various design situations and load cases;
(b) verifying that the limit states are not exceeded when design values for actions, material
properties and geometrical data are used in the models.

(2) Design values are generally obtained by using the characteristic or representative values in
combination with partial and other factors as defined in EBCS 1 to 8.

(3) In exceptional cases, it may be appropriate to determine design values directly. The values should
be chosen cautiously and should correspond to at least the same degree of reliability for the various
limit states as implied in the partial factors in this Code.

1.4 ACTIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL INFLUENCES

1.4.1 Principal Classifications

(1) An action (F) is:

-(a) a direct action, i.e. force (load) applied to the structure; or

(b) an indirect action, i.e. an imposed or constrained deformation or an imposed acceleration
.caused, for example by temperature changes, moisture variation, uneven settlement or
-.earthquakes.

(2) Actions are classified:

EBCS -1 1995 13 i
i.
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(a) by their variation in time:

(i) permanent actions (G), e.g. self-weight of structures, fixed equipment and road
surfacings; :
(ii) variable actions (Q), e.g. imposed loads, wind loads or snow loads;
, (iii) accidental actions (A), e.g. explosions, or impact from vehicles.

(b) by their spatial variation:

(i) fixed actions, e.g. self-weight;

(ii) free actions, e.g. movable imposed loads, wind loads, snow loads.

(c) by their nature and/or the structural response:

(i) static actions, which do not cause significant acceleration of the structure or structural
member;
(ii) dynamic actions, which cause significant acceleration of the structure or structural
member.

(3) In many cases, dynamic effects of actions may be calculated from quasi-static actions by
increasing the magnitude of the static actions or by the introduction of an equivalent static action.

(4) Some actions, for example seismic actions and snow loads, can be considered as either accidental
and/or variable actions, depending on the site location (see other Parts of ENV 1991).

(5) Prestressing (P) is a permanent action. Detailed information is given in EBCS 2,3 and 4.

1 (6) Indirect actions are either permanent Gind,(e.g. settlement of support), or variable Qind,(e.g.
~ temperature effect). and should be treated accordingly.

(7) An action is described by a model, its magnitude being represented in the most common casesby
one scalar which may take on several representative values. For some actions (multi-component
actions) and some verifications (e.g. for static equilibrium) the magnitude is represented by several
values. For fatigue verifications and dynamic analysis a more complex representation of the
magnitudes of some actions may be necessary.

1.4.2 Characteristic Values of Actions

(1) The characteristic value of an action is its main representative value.

(2) Characteristic value of actions F K shall be specified:

(a) in the relevant parts of ENV 1991, as a mean value, an upper or lower value, or a nominal
value (which does not refer to a known statististical distribution);
(b) in the design, provided that the provisions, specified in EBCS 1 are observed.

Note: The provisions may be specified by the relevant competent authority.

(3) The characteristic value of a permanent action shall be determined as follows:

(a) if the variability of G is small, one single value GK may be used;~

14 EBCS-1 1995
 t
-.~r CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN "

.(b) if the variability of G is not small, two values have to be used; an upper value GK,sup
and a
lower value GK.inf'

(4) In most cases the variability of G can be assumed to be small if G does not vary significantly
during the design working life of the structure and its coefficient of variation is not greater than 0.1.
However in such cases when the structure is very sensitive to variations in G (e.g. some types of
prestressed concrete structures), two values have to be used even if the coefficient of variation is
small.

{5) The following may be assumed in most cases:

(a) Gkis the mean value

(b) GkinfSthe 0.5 fractile, and Gksup
is the 0.95 fractile of the statistical; distribution for G which
may be assumed to be Gaussian.

(6) The self-weight of the structure can, in most cases, be represented by a single characteristic value
and be calculated on the .basis of the nominal dimensions and mean unit masses. The values are given
in Chapter 2.

(7) For variable actions the characteristic value (Q~)corresponds to either.

(a) an upper value with an intended probability of not being exceeded or a lower value with an
.intended probability of not falling below, during some reference period;
-(b) a nominal value which may be specified in caseswhere a statistical distribution is not known.

~. Values are given in Chapter 2 a.'1d3

(8) The following may be assumed for the time-varying part for most casesof characteristic values
of variable actions:

(a} the intended probability is 0.98;

(b) the reference period is one year.

However in some casesthe character of the action makes another reference period more appropriate.
In addition, design values for other variables within the action model may have to be chosen, which
may influence the probability of being exceeded for the resulting total action.

(9) Actions caused by water should nonnally be based on water levels and include a geometrical :
parameter to aiiovi for fluctuation of water level. Tides, currents and waves should be taken into
account where relevant.

(10) For accidental actions the representative value is generally a characteristic value Ak corresponding
to a specified value.

,. (11) Values of AEdfor seismic actions are given in EBCS 8.

\ (12) For multi-component actions (see Section 1.4.1 (7) the characteristic action is represented by
r groups of values, to be considered alternatively in design calculations.

I 1.4.3 Other Representative Values of Variable and Accidental Actions

I (1) ill the most common casesthe other representative values of a variable action are:

I EBCS-1 1995 1 5
 .-
ETHIOPIAN
-""_"6~ BUILDING CODE
--~- STANDARD
- FOR LOADING

(a)
(b) the combination
the frequent value
value generally
generally represented
represented as aas a product:
product:'l' 'l' 0 Qk.
I Qk;

(c) the quasi-permanent value generally represented as a product:'l'2 Qk

(2) Combination values are associated with the use of combinations of actions, to take account of a
reduced probability of simultaneous occurrence of the most unfavourable values of several
inde{)endentactions.

(3) The frequent value is determined such that:

(a) the total time, within a chosen period of time, during which it is exceeded for a specified"
part, or
(b) the frequency with which it is exceeded, 1
j
..

is limited to a given value. ,;

j
(4~ !he part of the chosen period of time .or the frequenc~, mentioned in (3) above should be c~osen ,I
wltfi due regard to the type of constructIon works consIdered and the purpose of the calculatIons.
Unless other values are specified the part may be chosen to be 0.05 or the frequency to be 300 per
year for ordinary buildings.

(5) The quasi-permanent value is so determined that the total time, within a chosen period of time,
during which it is exceeded is a considerable part of the chosen period of time. .
(6) The part of the chosen period of time, mentioned in (5) above, may be chosen to be 0.5. The
quasi-permanent value may also be determined as the value averaged over the chosen period of time. .

(7) These representative values and the characteristic value are used to define the design values of the
actions and the combinations of actions as explained in section 9. The combination values are used
for the verification of ultimate limit states and irreversible serviceability limit states. The frequent
values and quasi-permanent values are used for the verification of ultimate limit states involving
accidental actions and for the verification of reversible serviceability iimit states. The quasi-
permanent values are also used for the calculation of long term effects of serviceability limit states.
More detailed rules concerning the use of representative values are given, for example, in EBCS 2
to 8
(8) For some structures or some actions other representative values or other types of description of
actions may be required, e.g. the fatigue load and the number of cycles when fatigue is considered.

1.4.4 Environmental Influences

The environmental influences which may affect the durability of the structure shall be considered in
the choice of structural materials, their specification, the structural concept and detailed design. The
EBCS 2 to 8 specify the relevant measures.
1.5 MATERIALPROPERTIES .
;
(1) Properties of materials (including soil and rock) or products are represented by characteristic ~.
values which correspond to the value of the property having a prescribed probability of not being \.:-
attained in a hypothetical unlimited test series. They generally correspond for a particular property
to a specified fractile 'of the assumed statistical distribution of the property of the material in the
structure. -

16 EBCS -1 1995...
-.
CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

.(2) Unless otherwise stated in EBCS 2 to 8, the characteristic values should be defined as the 5 %
fractile for strength parameters and as the mean value for stiffness parameters.
~~
(3) Material property values shall normally be determined from standardized tests performed under ).
specified conditions. A conversion factor shall be applied where it is necessary to convert the test J
results into values which can be assumedto represent the behaviour of the material in the structure
or the ground (see also EBCS 2 to 8).
:ti
t
.

(4) A material strength may have two characteristic values, an upper and a lower. In most cases only ;!
the lower value will need to be considered. In some cases, different values may be adopted "~i
depending on the type of problem considered. Where an upper estimate of strength is required (e.g. I~
for the tensile strength of concrete for the calculation of the effects of indirect actions) a nominal
upper value of the strength should normally be taken into account. I!"
:()\

(5) Where there is a iack of information on the statistical distribution of the property a nominal value .,.
may be used; where the limit state equation is not significantly sensitive to its variability a mean value J
may be considered as the characteristic value. I

(6) Values of material properties are given in EBCS 2 to 8. ~,j

"
iii
~!

1.6 GEO)IE~fRICAL DATA ,

71
5'
.(1) Geometrical data are represented by their characteristic values, or in the case of imperfections ~
-directly by their design values. :i

-' (2) The characteristic values usually correspond to dimensions specified in the design. I

(3) Where relevant, values of geometrical quantities may correspond to some prescribed fractile of I
the statistical distribution. j
,It
(4) Tolerances for connected parts which are made from different materials shall be mutually ;.
compatible. Imperfections which have to be taken into account in the design of structural members f
are given in EBCS 2 to 8 f!
~

1.7 MODELLING FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND RESISTANCE t,i'

1.7.1 General 't

(1) Calculations shall be performed using appropriate design models involving relevant variables. The
models shall be appropriate for predicting the structural behaviour and the limit states considered.

(2) Design models should normally be based on established engineering theory and practice, verified
experimentally if necessary.

.1.7.2 Modelling in the Case of Static Actions

(1) The modelling for static actions should normally be based on an appropriate choice of the farce -
.deformation relationships of the members and their connections.

(2) Effects of displacements and deformations should be consider~d in the context of ultimate limit
-state verifications (including static equilibrium) if they result in an increase of the effects of actions
by more than 10%. 1

-EBCS -1 19,,95 1 7 ,
.\
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .

(3) In generalthe structuralanalysismodelsfor serviceabilitylimit statesand fatigue may be linear.

Modelling in the Case of Dynamic Actions

(1) Whendynamic actionsmay be consideredasquasi-static,the dynamicparts are consideredeither

by including them in the static valuesor by applyingequivalentdynamic amplificationfactors to the
sta\ic actions. For someequivalentdynamicamplificationfactors, the naturalfrequencieshaveto be
determined.

(2) In somecases(e.g. for cross wind vibrationsor seismic actions)the actionsmay be defined by
provisions for a modal analysisbased on a linear material and geometricbehaviour. For regular
structures,where only the fundamentalmodeis relevant,an explicit modalanalysismaybe substituted
by an analysis with equivalentstatic actions, dependingon mode shape, natural frequencyand
damping. ..
(3) In somecasesthe dynamicactionsmaybe expressedin terms of time histories or in the frequency
domain, for which the structural responsemay be determined by appropriate methods. When
dynamic actions may cause vibrations that may infringe serviceability limit states guidance for
assessingtheselimit statesis given in annexC, togetherwith the models of someactions.
1.8 DESIGN ASSISTED BY TESTING ~

1.8.1 General

(1) Where calculationrules or materialpropertiesgiven in EBCS 2 TO 8 are not sufficient or where

economymay resultfrom testson prototypes,part of the designproceduremaybe performed on the
basis of tests. Someof the clausesin this sectionmayalsobe helpful in caseswherethe performance
of an existing structureis to be investigated.

(2) Testsshall be setup and evaluatedin sucha way thatthe structurehasthe samelevel of reliability
with respect to all possible limit states and design situations as achieved by design based on
calculationproceduresspecifiedin EBCS2 to 8.

(3) Samplingof testspecimensand conditionsduring testingshouldbe representative.

(4) Where EBCS 2 to 8 include implicit safetyprovisions related to comparablesituations, these

provisions shall be takeninto accountin assessingthe test results and may give rise to corrections.
An exampleis the effect of tensile strengthin the bendingresistanceof concretebeams, which is
normally neglectedduring design.

1.8.2 Types of Tests

(1) The following testtypes are distinguished:

(a) teststo establishdirectly theultimateresistanceor serviceability propertiesof structuralparts

e.g. fire tests;
(b) teststo obtain specific materialproperties,e.g. ground testing in situ or in the laboratory,
testing of new materials;
(c) tests to reduceuncertaintiesin parametersin load or resistancemodels, e.g. wind tunnel
testing, testingof full size prototypes,te~tingof scalemodels;
(d) control tests to check the quality of the delivered products or the consistency of the
productioncharacteristics,e.g. concretecubetesting;

18 EBCS -1 1995
 ~

.CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN !

..;
!
(e) tests during execution in order to take account of actual conditions experienced e.g. post-
.tensioning, soil conditions;
(f) control tests to check the behaviour of the actual structure or structural elements after
completion, e.g. proof loading for the ultimate or serviceability limit states.

(2) For test types (a), (b) and (c), the test results may be available at the time of design; in those cases ,
the design values can be derived from the tests. For test types (d),(e) and (f) the test results may not t
be available at the time of design; in these casesthe design values correspond to that part of the
production that is expected to meet the acceptancecriteria at a later stage.
j'
1.8.3 Derivation of Design Values ij
;:
I.

(1) The derivation of the design values for a material property, a model parameter or a resistance
value from tests can be performed in either of the following two ways:
. (a) by assessinga characteristic value, which is divided by a partial safety factor and possibly
multiplied by an explicit conversion factor;
(b) by direct determination of the design value, implicitly or explicitly accounting for the
conversion aspects and the total reliability required..

(2) In general method (a) above should be used. The derivation of a characteristic value from tests
should be performed taking account of:

.(a) the scatter of test data;

-(b) statistical uncertainty resulting from a limited number of tests;
(c) implicit or explicit conversion factors resulting from influences not sufficiently covered by
.the tests such as:

(i) time and duration effects, not taken care of in the tests;
(ii) scale, volumes and length effects;
(iii) deviating environmental, loading and boundary conditions;
(iv) the way that safety factors as partial factors or additive elements are applied to get
design values.

The partial safety factor used in method (a) above should be chosen in such a way that there is
sufficient similarity
safety factor used inbetween theverifications.
numerical tests under consideration and the 1.3.4).
(see also Section usual application field of the partial ;'

(3) When for special casesmethod (b) above is used, the determination of the design values should
be carried out by considering:

(a)
the relevant limit states;
(b)
the required level of reliability;
(c)
the statistical and model uncertainties;
(d)
the compatibility with the assumptions for the action side;
.(e) the classification of design working life of the relevant structure according to Section 2;
!.-(f) (4) Further
priorinformation
knowledgemayfrombesimilar
found cases
in EBCS
or calculations.
2 to 8. ~

-I ~
..ji'
",,;

EBCS -1 1995 19

"1
 ETHIOPIAN 8UILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .: ,.

1.9 VERIFICATION BY THE PARTIAL SAFETY FACTOR METHOD .

1.9.1 General

(1) In EBCS 2 to 8 the reliability accordingto the limit state conceptis achievedby applicationof
the partial factor safetymethod. In the partial safetyfactormethod, it is verified that, in all relevant
designsituations,the limit statesare not exceededwhendesignvaluesfor actions,materialproperties
artd geometricaldata are used in the designmodels.

(2),In particular, it shall be verified that:

(a) the effects of design actions do not exceedthe design resistanceof the structure at the
ultimate limit state; and
(b) the effects of designactionsdo notexceedthe performancecriteria.for the serviceabilitylimit
state.

Other verifications may also needto be consideredfor particularstructurese.g. fatigue. Details are
I presentedin EBCS 2 to 8.

. (3) The selecteddesignsituations shall be consideredand critical load casesidentified. For each
critical load case,the designvalues of the effects of actionsin combinationshall be determined.
I

.I (4) A load caseidentifiescompatibleload arrangements,

setsof deformationsand imperfectionswhich .
shouldbe consideredsimultaneouslyfor a particularverification. -

(5) Rules for the combinationof independentactionsin designsituationsare given in this section. .
Actions .which cannot occur simultaneously,for example,due to physical reasons,should not be
consideredtogetherin combination.

(6) A load arrangementidentifies the position, magnitudeand direction of a free action. Rules for
different arrangementswithin a single actionare given in Chapters2 and 3.

(7) Possibledeviationsfrom the assumeddirectionsor positionsof actionsshouldbe considered.

(8) The designvaluesused for different limit statesmaybe different and are specified in this section.

1.9.2 Limitations and Simplifications

(1) Application rules in Chapter1 are limited to ultimateand serviceabilitylimit statesfor structures
subjectto staticloading. rhi~ includescaseswherethe dynamiceffectsare assessed using equivalent
quasi-staticloadsand dynamic amplificationfactors,e.g. wind.

(2) Simplified verification basedon the limit stateconceptmay be use1:

(a) by consideringonly limit statesand load combinationswhich from experienceor special

criteria are known to be potentially critical for the design; -"
(b) by using the simplified verification for ultimate limit statesand/or serviceability limit states
as specifiedfor buildings in Sections1.9.4.5 and 1.9.5.5; .
(c) by specifyingparticular detailingrulesand/orprovisionsto meetthe safetyand serviceability -
requirementswjthout calculation.

20 EBCS -1 1995 .
..
CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN (
f'
.1.9.3 Design Values ' I.
l.
1.9.3.1 Design Values of Actions \

(1) The design value F d of an action is expressed in general terms as:

Fd = 'YFF,ep (1.1)

where 'YF is the partial safety factor for the action considered taking account of:

(a) the possibility of unfavourable deviations of the actions;

(b) the possibility of inaccurate modelling of the actions;
(c) uncertainties in the assessmentof effects of actions.
F,epis the representative value of the action.

(2) Depending on the type of verification and combination procedures, design values for particular
actions are expressed as follows:

Gd = 'YGGkor Gk
Qd = 'YQk' 'YQ'¥oQk''¥IQkorQk (1.2)
Ad = 'Y~k or Ad
.Pd = 'Y~k or Pk
-AEd = AEd

.(3) Where distinction has to be made between favourable and unfavourable effects of permanent
-actions, two different partial saftey factors shall be used.

(4) For seismic actions the design value may depend on the structural behaviour characteristics (see
EBCS 8).

1.9.3.2 Design Values of the Effects of Actions

(1) The effects of actions (E) are responses(for example intern~Jforces and moments, stresses, strains
and displacements) of the structure to the actions. For a specific load case the design value of the
effect of actions (Ed) is determined from the design values of the actions, geometrical data and
material properties when relevant:

Ed = E(Fdll Fd2,...adl' adz, ",Xdl' Xdz,"') (1.3)

where Fdl'.'" adl,..' and Xdl' ...are chosen according to Sections 1.9.3.1, 1.9.3.3 and 1.9.3.4,
respectively.

(2) In some cases, in particular for non-linear analysis, the effect of the uncertainties in the models
used in the calculations should be considered explicitly. This may lead to the application of a
-0 coefficient of model uncertainty 'Ysdapplied either to the actions or to the action effects, whichever
is the more conservative. The factor 'Ysdmay refer to uncertainties in the action model and/or the
-action effect model.

(3) For non-linear analysis, i.e. when the effect is not proportional to the action, the following
! simplified rules may be considered in the case of a single predominant action.
I

1 EBCS -1 1995 21

i
 -

t -
,
,::

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING &.

(a) When the effect increases more than the action, the partial safety factor is applied to the
representative value of the action. .
(b) When the effect increases less than the action, the partial safety factor is applied to the action
effect of the representative value of the action.

In other cases more refined methods are necessary which are defined in the relevant Codes (e.g. for
prestressedstructures).
,
1.9.3.3 Design Values of Material Properties

(1) The design value Xd of a material or product property is generally defined as:

Xd = l1X/'YMor Xd = X/'YM (1.4)

where 'YM is the partial saftey factor for the material or product property, given in EBCS 2 to
8 which covers
(a) unfavourable deviations from the characteristic values;
(b) inaccuracies in the conversion factors; and
(c) uncertainties in the geometric properties and the resistance model.

11is the conversion factor taking into account the effect of the duration of the load, volume and
scale effects, effects of moisture and temperature and so on.

In some cases the conversion is implicitly taken into account by the characteristic value itself, as
indicated by the definition of 11,or by 11M'

1.9.3.4 Design Values of Geometrical Data

(1) Design values of geometrical data are generally represented by the nominal values:

ad = allOm (1.5)

Where necessary EBCS 2 to 8 may give further specifications.

(2) In some cases when deviations in the geometrical data have a significant effect on the reliability
of a structure, the geometrical design values are defined by: I
i
ad = allOm+~a (1.6)' i

where ~a takes account of the possibility of unfavourable deviations from the characteristic i
values
~a is only introduced where the influence of deviations is critical, e.g. imperfections in
buckling analysis. Values of ~a are given in EBCS 2 to 8.

, 1.9.3.5 Design Resistance

~

(1) Design values for the material properties, geometrical data and effects of actions, when relevant,
shall be used to determine the design resistance Rd from:

Rd = R(ad/,ad2' ",Xd/l Xd2' ...J (1.7)

where ad/, ...is defined in Section 1.9.3.4 and ~/, ...in Section.1.9.3.3. -

:~c:IIIIIIIIII.!,J5~
'. \,1. :2 EBCS.1 1995
.
,...
-CHAPTE:'~"~:~:~::.."__.'
(2) Operational verification formulae, based on the principle of expression (1.7), may have one of
.the following forms:

Rd = R{Xk !-YM'anom} (1.7a)

Rd = R{Xk, anom}/"IR (1.7b)
Rd = R{Xk /"Im' anom}/"I1ri (1.7c)

where "IR is a partial safety factor for the resistance;

"1m is a material safety factor;
"Ilri covers uncertainties in the resistance model and in the geometrical properties.

(3) The design resistance may also be obtained directly from the characteristic value of a product
resistance, without explicit determination of design values for individual basic variables, from:

Rd = R/"IR (1.7d)

This is applicable for steel members, p'iles, etc. and is often used in connection with design by testing.

1.9.4 Ultimate Limit States

1.9.4.1 Verifications of Static Equilibrium and Strength

(1) When considering a limit state of static equilibrium or of gross displacement of the structure as
.a rigid body, it shall be verified that:

Ed,d.sl
oSEd,slb (1.8)
.
where Ed,dsl is the design value of the effect of destabilizing actions;
Ed,sib is the design value of the effect of stabilizing actions.

In some cases if may be necessaryto replace eq. (1.8) by an interaction formula.

(2) When considering a limit state of rupture or excessive deformation of a section, member or
connection it shall be verified that:

Ed oSRd (1..9)

where Ed is the design value c.f the effect of actions such as internal force, moment or a vector
representing several internal forces or moments;
Rd is the corresponding design resistance, associating all structural properties with the
respective design values.

In some cases it may be necessary to replace'eq. (1.9) by an interaction formula. The required load
casesare identified as described in Section 1.9.1.

.1.9.4.2 Combination of Actions

i (1) For each critical load case, the design values of the effects of actions (Ed) should be determined
;; by combining the values of actions which occur simultaneously, as follows:

(a) Persistent and transient situations: Design values of the dominant variable actions and the
combination design values of other actions.

EBCS -1 1995 23
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .

(b) Accidental situations: Design values of pennanent actions together with the frequent value
of the dominant variable action and the quasi-pennanent values of other variable actions and -

the design value of one accidental action.

(c) Seismic situations: Characteristic values of the pennanent actions together with the quasi-
pennanent values of the other variable actions and the design value of the seismic actions.

(2) When the dominant action is not obvious, eachvariable action should be considered in turn as the
dominant action.

(3) The above combination process is represented in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1: Design Values of Actions for use in the Combination of Actions

Single variable actions Qd Ac~idental

D -..Pennanent actIons or
esIgn sItuatIon .
actIons
G
d
...
seIsmIc actIons
Dominant Others Ad

Persistent and
transient 'YGGk('Y~J 17QIQkl 17Ql'l'QiQkj

Accidental 'YGAGk
('YPAPJ 'l'llQkl 'l' 2iQki 'Y~k or Ad

Seismic Gk 'l' 2iQkj AEd .

Symbolically the combinations may be representedas follows

(a) persistent and transient design situations for ultimate limit states verification other than those -I
relating to fatigueI,

L 'YGkj + 'YPI+'Yqi+ L 'YQiIt-oiQkj (1.10)

j ~1 i >/

Note: This combination rule is an amalgamation of two separate load combinations:

L 'YGkj + 'YP,+'Yqi+ L It-OIQk/ + L 'YQiIt-OIQkj (1.10a)

j ~ I i >/

Lj ~I 'YGkj + 'YP,+'Yqi + Llt-ol Qk/ + i~/'YQiIt-OI Qkj (1.10b)

~ is a reduction factor for 'YGjwithin the range 0.85 and 1.

(b) Combinations for accidental design situations

1:: L 'YGAjGkj + 'YPAPk + Ad + It-il Qk/ + L 1t-2iQkj (1.11)

.
(c) Combination for the seismic design situation

24 EBCS -1 1995
 .CO",; " 0/ " .., ,

--CHAPTER 1.. BASIS OF DESIGN

.LGkj + Pk + A&f + L1/I2i Qkj (1.12)

"+" "implies" to be combined with"

E implies "the combined effect of";
Gkj is the characteristic value of permanent actions;
Pk is the characteristic value of a prestressing action;
QkJ is the characteristic value of the variable action;
Qkj is the characteristic value of the variable actions;
Ad is the design value of the accidental action;
A&f is the design value of seismic action;
'YGj is the partial factor for permanent action j;
'YGAj is the same as 'YGj'but for accidental design situations;
'YPA is the same as 'Yp' but for accidental actions;
'Yp is the partial factor for prestressing actions;
'YQi is the partial factor for variable action i;
'¥ are combination coefficients (see 1.4.3).

(4) Combinations for accidental design situations either involve and explicit accidental action (A (e.g.
fire or impact )or refer to a situation after an accidental event (A=O). For fire situations, apart from
the temperature effect on the material properties, Ad refers to the design value of the indirect thermal
action.

--(5) Equations (1.10) and (1.11) may refer to either actions or action effects; for non-linear analysis,
see Section 1.9.3.2 (3).

-.(6) Where components of a vectorial force are partially correlated, the factors to any favourable
component may be reduced by 20 %.

(7) Imposed deformations should be considered where relevant.

(8) In some caseseqs. (9.10) to (9.12) need modification; detailed rules are given in the relevant parts
of EBCS 1 to 8.

1.9.4.3 Partial Safety Factors

(1) In the relevant load cases, those permanent actions that increase the effect of the variable actions
(i.e. produce unfavourable effects) shall be represented by their upper design values, those that
decrease the effect of the variable actions (i.e. produce favourable effects) by their lower design
values.

(2) Where the result of a verification may be very sensitive to variations of the magnitude of a
permanent action from place to place in the structure, the unfavourable and the favourable parts of
this action shall be considered as individual actions. This applies in particular to the verification of

. static equilibrium.

(3) For building structures, the partial safety factors for ultimate limit statesin the persistent, transient
and accidental design situations are given in Table 1.2. The values have been based on theoretical"
.: considerations, experience and back calculations on existing designs.

.EBCS -1 1995 25 J

I:,
l.
 .-
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

Table 1.2 Partial Safety Factors: Ultimate Limit States for Buildings -,.
f':"-
Situations
Case!) Action Symbol
PIT A
Case A Permanent actions: self weight
Loss of static of structural and non-structural
equilibrium;strength of components, permanent actions
structural material or caused by ground, ground-
ground insignificant (see water and free water
Section 1.9.4.1 -unfavourable 'YGsup4) 1.102) 1.00
-favourable 'YGinf4) 0.902) 1.00

Variable actions
-unfavourable 'YQ 1.60 1.00
1.00
Accidental actions 'YA
Case BS) Permanent actions 6)
Failure of structure or (see above)
structural elements, inclu- -unfavourable 'YGsup4) 1.303) 1.00
ding those of the footing, -favourable 'YGinf4) 1.003) 1.00
piles, basementwalls etc., Variable actions ,
governed by strength of -unfavourable 'YQ 1.60 1.00 -
structural material (see
Section 1.9.4.1) Accidental actions 'YA 1.00 .

Case CS) Permanent actions (see above)

Failure in the ground -unfavourable 'YGsup4) 1.00 1.00
-favourable 'YGinf4) 1.00 1.00

Variable actions
-unfavourable 'YQ 1.30 1.00 '

Accidental actions 'YA 1.00

P: Persistent situation T: Transient situation A: Accidental situation

(1) The design should be verified for each A, B and C separately as relevant.
(2) In this verification the characteristic value of the unfavourable part of the permanent action
is multiplied by the factor 1.1 and the favourable part by the factor 0.9. More refined
rules are given in EBCS 3 and EBCS 4.
(3) In this verification the characteristic values of all permanent actions from one source are
multiplied by 1.3 if the total resulting action effect is unfavourable and by 1,0 if th~ total
:iJ'C ,,~~ resulting action effect is favourable.
(4) In caseswhen the limit state is very sensitive to variation of permanent actions, the upper
and lower characteristic values of these actions should be taken according to Section 1,4.2
(3),
(5) For casesBand C the design ground properties may be different, see EBCS 7.
(6). Instead of using 'YG(1.30 and 'YQ= (1.60) for lateral earth pressure actions the design c,.
ground properties may be introduced in accordance with EBCS 7 and a model factor 'Ysdis t:
applied.

~ 26 E8CS
-1 1995 -
.

CHAPTER 1: BASIS OF DESIGN

:-
1.9.4.4 'if Factors

(1) '¥ factors for buildings are given in Table 1.3. For other applicationsseerelevantChapterof
this code.

Table 1.3 'if Factors for Buildings

Action '¥ 0 '¥ I '¥ 2
Imposedloads in buildings 1)
categoryA: domestic,residential 0.7 0.5 0.3
categoryB: offices. 0.7 0.5 0.3
categoryC: congregationareas 0.7 0.7 0.6
categoryD: shopping 0.7 0.7 0.6
categoryE: storage 1.0 0.9 0.8
Traffic loads in buildings
categoryF: vehicle weight ~ 30kN 0.7 0.7 0.6
categoryG: 30kN < vehicle weight ~ 160kN 0.7 0.5 0..3
categoryH: roofs 0 .0 0
Wind loads on buildings 0.6 0.5 0
Temperature(non-fire) in buildings 0.6 0.5 0
(1) For combinationof imposedloads in multistoreybuildings, see Chapter2.

1.9.4.5 SimplifiedVerificationfor BuildingStructures

(1) The process for the persistentand transient situations described in Section 1.9.4.2 may be
simplified by consideringthe mostunfavourablefor the following combinations:

(a) Designsituationswith only one variable action Qkl

E 'YGiGkj + 1.6 Qkl (1.13)

j ~I

(b) Designsituationswith two or more variable actions Qk,i

E 'YGj + 1.35 E Qkj (1.14)

j ~I

In this case the effect of actionsshould also be verified for the dominantvariable actions using
Eq. (1.13).

(2) The 'YGvaluesare given in Table 1.2.

1.9.4.6 Partial Safety Factorsfor Materials

Partial safetyfactors for propertiesof materialsand productsare given in EBCS2 to 8.

EBCS -1 1995 27
 '.
.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD F(}R LOADING

1.9.5 ServiceabilityLimit States

1.9.5.1 Verification of Serviceability

(1)- It Shall be verified that:

, ,,'-.y Ed~ Cd (1.15)

~-
where Cd is a nominal value or a function of certain design properties of materials related to
the design effects of actions considered; and
Ed is the design value of the action effect (e.g. displacement, acceleration), detennined
on the basis of one of the combinations defined in Section 1.9.5.2.

1.9.5.2 Combination of Actions

(1) The combination of actions to be considered for serviceability limit states depends on the nature
of the effect of actions being checked, e.g. irreversible, reversible or long tenn. Three combinations
designated by the representative value of the dominant action are given in Table 1.4.

Table 1.4 Design Values of Actions for use in the

Combination of Actions

Permanent Variable actions Qd -

Combination actions -
Gd Dominant Others

Characteristic (rare) Gk (PJ Qkl 1/I0iQki

Frequent Gk (PJ '¥ IIQkl '¥'¥ 2iQki
4
Quasi-permanent Gk (PJ '¥21Qkl '¥2iQki
Note: For serviceability limit states, the partial factors (serviceability) "fa
"fQ are taken as 1.0 except where specified otherwise.

(2) Three combinations of actions for serviceability limit states are defined symbolically by the
following expressions:

(a) Characteristic (rare) combination

E Gki "+" Pk "+" Qkl "+" E'¥olQki (1.16)

(b) Frequent combination

E Gkj "+" Pk"+" '¥lIQkl"+" E'iI.'iQki (1.17)

(c) Quasi-permanent combinati<;>n

r G "+ "
i.J kj Pk "+" E '¥ 2iQki ( lIB
. )

Where the notation is as given in Sections 1.1.6 and 1.9.4.2 :-

(3) Loads due to imposed deformations shoul"dbe considered where relevant.

28 EBCS -1 1995
 ~ -"~--"~

-.
CHAPTER 1: SA SIS OF DESIGN

.(4) In some casesEqs. (1.16) to (1.18) may require a modification; dttailed rules are given in
EBCS 1 to 8.

1.9.5.3 Partial Safety Factors

The partial safety factors for serviceability limit statesare equal to 1.0 except where specified
otherwise,e.g. in EBCS2 to 8.

1.9.5.4 'l' Factors

Values of '¥ factors are given in Table 1.3

1.9.5.5 Simplified Verification for Building Structures

(1) For building structuresthe characteristic(rare) combinationmay be simplified to the following

expressions,which may also be usedas a substitutefor the frequentcombination.

(a) Designsituationswith only one variable action Qkl

'\:'"'
L.,
Gkj +
Qkl (1.19)
j ~I

(b) Designsituationswith two or more variable actions, Qkl

~;,.i! L Gkj + 0.9 E Qkj (1.20)
j ~l j ~I

In this case the effect of actionsshould also be verified for the dominant variable action using
Eq. (1.19).

(2) Where simplified prescriptiverules are given for serviceabilitylimit states,detailedcalculations

using combinationsof actionsare not required.

1.9.5.6 Partial Safety Factorsfor Materials

Partial safetyfactorsfor the propertiesof materialsand productsare given in EBCS2 to 8.

EBCS~ 1 1995 29

~
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .
..

--
[TillS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK]

I !:

...I~ ,30 EBCS-=--11995

IIII_IE
 ""

CHAPTER 2
ACTION ON STRUCTURES
-DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT
AND IMPOSED LOADS

.2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 Scope
(1) Designguidanceand actionsare provided for the structural designof buildings and civil engin-
eering works including some geotechnicalaspectsfor the following subjects:

(a) Densitiesof constructionmaterialsand storedmaterials;

(b) Self-weightof constructionelements;
(c) Imposedloads

(2) Section 2.4 gives characteristicvalues for densities of specific building materials, and stored
.materials. In addition for specific materials,the angle of reposeis provided.

(3) Section2.5 provides methodsfor the assessment

of the characteristicvalues of self-weight of
.construction elements.

(4) Section2.6 givescharacteristicvaluesof imposedloadson floors androofs in building structures.

(5) Thesecharacteristicvaluesare defined accordingto categoryof use as follows:

(a) areasin dwellings, offices etc;

(b) garageand vehicle traffic areas;
(c) areasfor storageand industrialactivities;
(d) roofs

(6) The loads on traffic areasgiven in Section2.6 refers to vehiclesup to a gross.weightof 160kN.

{7) For barriers or partition walls having the function of barriers, horizontal forces due to persons
are given.

(8) Section2.6 does not specify fatigue loads and dynamic loads causingvibrations or dynamic
effects.

.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS

2.2.1 Self-Weight
j
.
i (1) Self-weightsof constructionelementsare classified as permanentactionsand generallyalso ar'"
j fixed actions(see Chapter1).

lI I
' EBCS -1 1995 31 ~

.I!
 .

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING I ..

(2) Earth loads on roofs and terracesshall be consideredasvariable actions. Pressureon basement
walls induced by earth loads shall howeverbe considereda permanentaction. Pore water pressure .
shall also be considereda permanentaction.
~
(3) Loads due to ballast snaIlbe consideredasvariableactions.
2.2..2 , Imposed Loads ..~

(.1)Imposed loads are classified asvariable and free actions(seeChapter1).

(2) Imposed loads should be consideredas static loads, non resonantdynamic effects being
considered.

2.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS

2.3.1 General

(1) The relevant self-weights and imposed loads shall be determinedfor each design situation
identified in accordancewith Chapter1.

2.3.2 Self.,Weight

(~) P~st-executionadditionalnewcoatingsand!or distributionconduitsshoul~be consideredin design I

situations. !i.

(2) The source and moisture contentof bulk materialsshouldbe consideredin designsituationsof
buildings used for storagepurposes. .;,:
~ .'10.

2.3.3 Imposed Loads "

(1) For casesinvolving interactionwith other types of load (e.g. wind), the total imposedload on a
building shall be consideredas a single action.

(2) Where the characteristicvalue of the imposedload is reducedby 1/1factors in combinationwi.th

other actions, the loads shall be assumedin all storeyswithout reductionby the factor an,
I
I (3) This Chapterdoes not specify fatigue loads.

(4) In the case of productionareaswhere the numberof load variationsor the effects of vibrations
may causefatigue, a fatigue.load model shall be establishedfor the particularcase.

2.4 DENSITIES OF BUILDING MATERIALS AND STORED MATERIALS

2.4.1 Definitions
(1) The bulk weight densityis the overall weight per unit-volume of a material, including a normal
distribution of voids an.dpores. In everydayusagethis term is frequentlyabbreviatedto 'density'
(which is strictly massper unit vqiume).

(2) The angle of reposeis the angle which the naturalslope of the sides of a heapedpile of loose
material makesto th.ehorizontal.

,~" 32 EBCS -1 1995 !~".;

:JMi
I !
CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES. DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED LOADS
~--
2.4.2 Tables

(1) The densitiesand anglesof reposeprovided in Tables2.1 to 2.8 of somematerialsmay vary from
those indicateddependingon moisturecontent, settlementand depthof storage.

Table 2.1 Construction Materials

Density
Materials 'Y
[kN/m3]
concret~
lightweight 9-20
normal weight 24' ,,~
heavyweight > 28 j,
reinforcedand prestressedconcrete + 1 I

unhardenedconcrete + 1

mortar
cementmortar 23
gypsummortar 17
lime mortar 19

masonry units
basalt 27
limestone 25
granite 27
sandstone 23
Trachyte 26

metals
aluminium 27
brass 83
bronze 83
copper 87
iron, cast 71
iron, wrought 76
lead 112
steel 77
zinc 71

'density may be in the range20-28 dependingon local material

c'

EBCS -1 1995 33
 ;,- ""~k'-~ ~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

..
Table 2.1 Construction Materials (cont'd)

Density
Material 'Y
[kN/m3]
wood
Bahir Zaf (EucalyptusGlobulus Labill) 8.5
~ Kerero (PouteriaFerrginea) 6.5
Samba(EkebergiaRueppeliana) 6.5
Tid (JuniperusProcera) 7.5
Zegba (PodacargusGracilior) 6.0

plywood:
raw plywood (softwoodand birch) 6
laminboardand blackboard 4

particleboards:
chipboard 8
cement-bonded particleboard 12
flakeboard,orientedstrandboard, waterboard 7I I
fibre building board:
hardboard,standardand tempered 10
medium densityfibreboard 8 .
softboard 4
other materials .
glass, in sheets 25
plastics:
acrylic sheet. 12
polystyrene,expanded,
granules 0.25
slate 29

"
,

.
.

34 EBCS -1 1995

t ' ~
 ~ " ..'i' "'. .-' ---"-,

.CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES. DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED LOADS

.
Table 2.2 Stored Materials -Building and Construction

Density Angle
Materials 'Y of repose
[kN/m3] <t>[O]

aggregates
lightweight (pumice) 7 30
lightweight (scoria) 12 30
normal 14 30

gravel 14 35
sand 14 30
brick sand, crushedbrick, broken bricks 15 -
venniculite. .
exfoliated, aggregatefor concrete 1 -
crude 6 -9 .

bentonite
loose 8 40
shaken down 11-

.cement
.in bulk 16 28
.in bag 15-

fly ash 10 -14 25

glass, in sheets 25-
gypsum, ground 15 25
lignite filter ash 15 20
lime 13 25
limestone, powder 13 27
magnesite, ground 12-
plastics, ,

polyethylene,polystyrol granulated 6.4 -

polyvinylchloride, powder 5.9 -
polyesterresin 11.8-
glue resins 13-
; water, fresh 10-
~- --

I
!
-,t-

1
EBCS -1 1995 35

\
 1 :~~
~,. ~

ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODESTANDARD
FORLOADING .
-~-

Table 2.3 Stored Materials -Agricultural

Density Angle
Materials 'Y of repose
[kN/m3] ct> [O]
,
fannyard
manure (minimum' 60% solids) 7.8 -
manure (with dry straw) 9.3 45
dry chicken manure 6.9 45
slurry (maximum 20% solids) 10.8 -

fertiliser, artificial
NPK, granulated 8 -12 25
:':~ basic slag, crushed 13.7 35
I phosphates, granulated 10 -16 30
I potassium sulphate 12 -16 28
urea 7 -8 24

fodder, green, loosely stacked 3.5 -4.5 -

grain
whole (~ 14% moisture content
unless indicated otherwise)
general 7.8 30
barley 8.0 30
beans 7.0 30
brewer's grain (wet) 7.0 30
coffee 8.8 30
herbage seeds 8.0 30
corn 3.4 30
maize in bulk 7.4 30
maize in bags 8.0 30
legumes 5.0-
oats 5.0 30
oilseed rape 8.0 30
sorghum 6.4 25
rye 9.0 25
tef 7.0 30
wheat in bulk 7.8 30
wheat in bags 7.5-
-~

' A 36 EBCS-11995
 m'" --:~

I
-., CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES -DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED LOADS :

.i
;

Table2.3 StoredMaterials-Agricultural (contn'd)

Density Angle
Material 'Y of repose
[kN/m3] <p [O]

grass cubes 7.8 40

hay
(baled) 1 -3 -
(rolled bales) 6 -7 -
hides and skins 8 -9 25
hops 1 -2
malt 4 -6
meal 7 45
ground 7 40
cubes 9.5 -
silage 5 -10 -
straw -
in bulk (dry) 0.7 -
baled 1.5 -
tobacco in bales 3.5 -5 -
wool -
., in bulk 3 -
'.-';~;'" baled 7 -13 -

I
i
I

EBCS -1 1995 37
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
.
.
Table 2.4 Stored Materials -Foodstuffs

Density Angle
Materials 'Y of Repose
, [kN/m3] ct>[O]

bltter 9.5-
eggs, in stands 4 -5 -

flour
bulk 6 25
bagged 5-

fruit
loose 8.3 30
boxed 6.5-
honey 13-
milk 10.5-
sugar
bulk (loose) 9.5
sacks(compact) 16.0 -
vegetables, green
cabbages 4-
lettuce 5-

vegetables,legumes
,f beans
general 8.1 35
soya 7.4-
.peas 7.8-

vegetables,root
general 8.8-
beetroot 7.4 40
carrots 7.8 35
onions 7 35

potatoes
in bulk 7 35
in boxes 4.4-
 ;

-.t
I
CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES -DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED.LOADS

.Table 2.5 Stored Materials -Liquids

Density
Materials 'Y
[kN/m3]
beverages
beer 10.3
milk 10.1
water, fresh 9.8
wine 10

natural oils
castor .oil
linseed oil 9.3
9.2
organic liquids and acids
alcohol 7.8
ether 7.4
hydrochloric acid (40% by weight) 11.8
methylated spirit 7.8
nitric acid (91 % by weight) 14.7
sulphuric acid (30% by weight) 13.7
.sulphuric acid (37 % by weight) 17.7
-turpentine, white spirit 8.3

.hydrocarbons
aniline 9.8
benzene (benzole) 8.8
coal tar 10.8 -12.8
creosote 10.8
naphtha 7.8
paraffin (kerosene) 8.3
benzine (benzoline) 6.9
oil, crude (petroleum) 9.8 -12.8
diesel -8.3.
fuel 7.8 -9.8
heavy 12.3
lubricating .8.8
I p~trol (gasolene,gasoline) 7.4
liquid gas
butane 5.7
propane 5.0

! other liquids
,t mercury 133
i-red lead paint 59
white lead, in oil 38
sludge, over 50% by volume water 10.8

EBCS -7 7995 39
F'
 ETHIQPIANBUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
.-
.
Table 2.6 Stored Materials -Solid Fuels

Density Angle
Materials "Y of Repose
[kN/m3] ct> [O]
,
charcoal
air-filled 4-
air-free 15-

firewood 5.4 45I

Table 2.7 Stored Materials -Industrial and General

M .1 Density Angle
atena
"Y of Repose
[kN/m3] ct> [O] -,
-:-

books and documents

booksand documents 6 -.
.denselystored 8.5 -

filing racks and cabinets 6 -

garments and rags, bundled 11 -
ice, lumps 8.5-
leather, piled 10 -,~,
paper -j..'!
layers 11.0 -c"
rolls 15.0-
rubber 10 -17 45
rock salt 22 40
salt 12
sawdust
dry, bagged 3-
dry, loose 2.5 45
wet, loose 5 45
tar, bitumen 14-

.
,.

40 EBCS -1 1995
-.CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES -DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED LOADS

. Table 2.8 Flooring and Walling

Materials Density
kN/m3

Flooring
clay tiling 21
Marble tiling 27
Parquet, timber board 9
PVC covering 16
Rubbercovering 17
Granulithic, terrazzopaving 23 -

Walling
Solid brick 22
Perfuratedbrick 19
,;
Concretehollow-block ~
.';;f
S~oneag.gregate.14-20* .:t~
LIghtweIght (pumIce)aggregate 10-14* ~
Asoestoscementsheet 17 ,:";j
FI.brous p I asterboard 10 :;f;
.,J"

'Lower values for smallersize thicknesses(100mmto 200mm) i'l

~. 2.5 SELF-WEIGHT OF CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS

.2.5.1 Representationof Actions

(1) Constructionelementsin,cludestructuraland non-structuralelements.

(2) For the purposeof this section,the self-weightof non-structuralelementsshall includethe weight
of fixed machinery.

(3) Non-structuralelementsinclude:
t
(a) roofing
(b) s~rfacingand coverings
(c) non-structuralpartition walls and linings
(d) handrails, safetybarriers, parapetsand kerbs
(e) wall cladding
(f) suspendedceilings
(g) insulation
(h) fixed machinery
(i) earthand balast

(4) Fixe~ machineryincludes:

(a) lifts and moving stairways

(b) heating, ventilating and air conditioningequipment
.(c) electrical equipment
(d) pipes without their contents
(e) cable trunking and conduits.

EBCS -1 1995 41
 .-
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(5) Loads due to movablepartitions shallbe treatedasimposedloads(seeSection2.6). .

(6) The self-weightof industrial equipmentshouldbe consideredas an imposedload. Only the self-
weights of equipmentincorporatedinto the constructionshallbe classifiedas permanentactions.

(7) Where there is a reasonablelikelihood that serviceswill at sometime be relocated within the
building, loadsdue to theseservicesshallbe consideredasimposedloads.

2.5.2 Load Arrangements

(1) In the case where the self-weight is classified as a fixed action it may be assumedthat the
variationsof densitiesas well asthe differencesbetweennominaland actualdimensionsof construc:,
tion elementsdo not changewithin a given structure.

2.5.3 Self-Weight -Characteristic Values

2.5.3.1 Assessmentof Self-Weight ...

2.5.3.1.1 CharacteristicValue

(1) The weights of parts of structuresand of non-structuralelementsshall be determinedfrom the

weights of the elementsof which they are composed.
(2) Unless more reliable data are available(i.e. from product standards,the supplier or by direct
..
weighing), the characteristicsvalue of the weight of individual elementsshall be estimatedfrom
nominaldimensionsand the nominaldensitiesof their constituentmaterials. .

(3) However, in accordancewith ChapterI, it may be necessaryto considerboth upper and lower
characteristicvalues for the self-weight. This may apply to thin concretemembersor in casesof
uncertaintyaboutthe precisevalue of self-weight,or where dimensionalalternativesand the type of
materialsto be used remain openat the designstage.

2.5.3.1.2Dimensions

(1) In generalnominal dimensionsshouldbe thoseas shownon the drawings.

(2) In general,wherethe weight of thin finishesis small in comparisonin comparisonwith the weight
of the elementsto which they are applied, it is not necessaryto considervariation in finish thickness.
However variation in thickness may need to be considered when the thickness depends on the
deflectionof the structuralcomponentto which the finish is appliedor whenthe maintenanceof the
finish may includethe addition of further layers of material.

2.5.3.1.3 J)ensities

(1) For the assessment

of nominaldensitiesSection2.4 shouldbe used. .

(2) If the density of the material is likely to deviate significantly from the specified value, such
deviation shallbe considered. -~

(3) For structureswheremore accuratevaluesare required,fo!,"example,where a designis likely to

be particularly sensitiveto variations,inpermanent10ad,a representativesampleof the materialsto -
---
.
.c
42 EBCS -,',995
L;';' 1
r

"
f!
-.; CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES -DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND IMPOSED LOADS :

.I
should then be deteffilined accordingto Chapter1. f\

(4) For somematerialsthe bulk weight densityhas significant variability and may be dependenton
the source and moisturecontent.

2.5.3.2 Self-Weightfor Buildings

2.5.3.2.1 Floors and Walls and Partitions

(1) For determiningthe effect of the self-weightdueto partitions, an equivalentuniformly distributed

load may be used.

(2) Account shouldbe takenof voids madefor the purposeof theffilal insulationor for the reductton
of weight.

(3) For suspendedbeamand block floors and beamand hollow-pot floors, data may be provided by
the manufacturer. Whenthe dimensionsof thin concreteslabsare unlikely to be controlled to within
:I::5 % of their nominal valuesa range of valuesfor the permanentload shall be taken into account
arid treatedas indicated in Chapter1.
-:;:1(1:-
(4) For deteffiliningthe weight of umenderedmasonrywalls the weight of mortar shall be takeninto
. account.

2.5.3.2.2 Roofs
4

.(1) The weights shall be calculatedfrom the weight of the componentmaterialsand the geometry
(e.g. pitch tiles/sq.metreetc).

(2) Infoffilation may be takenfrom documentsprovided by the manufacturer.

2.5.3.2.3. Claddingsand Finishes

(1) For, the purpose of this sectioncladdings shall be consideredto include curtain walling (and
fixings), overcladding(and fixings) a.'1droof coverings.

(2) When designingindividual structuralelementsthe estimationof weight shall include the weight
of claddingsand finishes,'unlessalternativeprovisionhas beenmade(seeSection2.5.3.1). Finishes
include in-situ finishes (suchasplasterand screeds),prefabricatedwall-paneltjnishes, and timber and
other floor finishes.

2.6 IMPOSED LOADS ON B1J1LDINGS

j 2.6.1 Representation of Actions

-j- (1) Imposedloads on buildings are thosearising from occupancy. They may be causedby:

(a) normaluse by persons;

(b) furniture and moveableobjects(e.g. lightweightmoveablepartitions, storage,the contentsof
containers);
(c) machinesand vebic1es~_~ ;;

EBCS -1 1995 43
 ~-
.

ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARDFORLOADING .-

(d) exceptionaluse, suchas exceptionalconcentrationsof personsor of furniture, or the moving

or stackingof commoditieswhich may occur during reorganizationor redecoration. .

(2) The self-weightof structuralandnon-structuralcomponentsand of fixed equipmentshallbe taken

into accountaccordingto Section2.5.

! \3) Imposedloadsare modelledby uniformly distributedloadsor concentratedloadsor combination-

of-theseloads.

(4) The characteristicvalues of the loadsare determinedfor a referenceperiod, ( See Chapter1).

(5) The characteristicvalues of the loads are composedof long-term, medium-termand short-term
componentsthat, accordingto their duration, mayhavedifferenteffectson materialssensitiveto time:-
dependentactions.

2.6.2 Load Arrangements

n
2.6.2.1 HorizontalMembers

(1) For the designof the elementsof a floor structurewithin one storeythe action shall be assumed
as a free action on the most unfavourabletributary zone of the influencearea. Where the loads on
other floors are relevant, they may be assumedto be distributed uniformly (fixed actions).

(2) Imposed loads from a single occupancymay be reducedaccordingto the tributary area by a
reduction factor aA accordingto Sections2.6.3.1.2(3)and 2.6.2.2(4).

(3) To ensure a minimum local resistanceof the floor structure a separateverification shall be
performed with a concentratedload that, unlessstatedotherwise, shall not be combined with the
uniformly distributed loads or other variable loads.

2.6.2.2 VerticalMembers
"
(1) For the designof columnsor walls actingas vertical members,loaded from severalstoreys,the
loads on the floor of eachstorey shallbe assumedto distributed uniformly (fixed actions).

(2) Where the imposed loads from severalstoreysare relevant, the loads may be reduced by a
reductionfactor an accordingto Sections2.6.1.2(4)

2.6.3 Imposed Loads -Characteristic Values

2.6.3.1 Residential,Social,CommercialandAdministrationArea

2.6.3.1.1 Categories

(1) Areas in residential, social, commercial and administrationbuildings are divided into five
categoriesaccordingto their specificusesshownin Table.2.9.

'",6..1 44 EBCS-11995
 -.
. Category
Table 2.9 Categories of Building Areas
Specific Use Example
A Area for domestic and resi- Rooms in residential buildings and houses; rooms
dential activities and wards in
hospitals;bedroomsin hotelsand hostels;,
kitchensand toilets
B Areas where people may Cl: Areas with tables,etc.
congregate(with the exce- e.g. areasin schools,cafes,restaurants,dining
ption of areasdefined under halls, readingrooms, receptionsetc.
categoryA,B,D, and E)
C2: Areas with fIXedseats,e.g. areasin
churches,theatresor cinemas,conferencerooms,
I lecturehalls, assemblyhalls, waiting rooms, etc.

C3: Areas without obstaclesfor moving people,

e.g. areasin museums,exhibitionrooms, etc and
accessareasin public and administrationbuild-
ings, hotels, etc.

\ C4: Areas susceptibleto overcrowding, e.g.

,. dancehalls, gymnasticrooms, stages,etc.
...J cs: Areas susceptibleto overcrowding,e.g. in
buildings for public-eventslike concerthalls,
.\
.'1;
sportshalls includingstands,terracesand access
'i 1, are~, etc.
~,. D Shoppingareas Dl: Areas instationery
g~neralretail shops,e.g. areas
warehouses, -andoffice stores, etc. in

E Areas susceptibleto accu- Areas for storageuse includinglibraries. The

mulation of goods,includ- loadsdefined in Table 2.1-0 shall be takenas
ing accessareas minimum loadsunlessmore appropriateloadsare
defined for the specificcase. Further guidanceis
given in Table2.7.

2.6.3.1.2 Values ofActions

(1) The characteristicvaluesq;.and Q;.are given in Table 2.10.

(2) For local verifications a concentratedload Q;. acting alone shall be taken into account. The
characteristicvaluesQ;.are given in Table2.9. Whereconcentratedloadsfrom storageracksor from
lifting equipment may be expectedQ;. shall be determinedfor the individual case (see Section
. 2.6.3.3).

The local concentratedload shallbe consideredto act at any point on the floor, balconyor stairsand
to have an applicationarea comprisinga squarewith a sOmmside.

(3) The reduction factor aA for categoriesA to E shouldbe determinedasfollows:

With the restriction for categoriesC and D: aA ~ 0.6

EBCS -1 i
..co
 f~ ~
~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

.-
aA = 5/7. 1/1+ ~A ~ 1.0 (2.1) .
0 A

where 1/10is the factor according to Chapter 1.

Ao 10.0m2 j
A is the loaded area '- --.'--r-""
, "
.il ';: ,t,
",; (4) The reduction factor an for categories A to E should be determined as follOws:
",,'
I a-.
n
-2+(n-2)
n
1/10
(2 2)

, where n is the number of storeys (> 2) above the loaded structural elements

Table 2.10 Imposed Loads on Floors in Buildings

Loaded area qk
(kN/m2) Qk
(kN)

Category A -general 2.0 2.0

-stairs 3.0 2.0
-balconies 4.0 2.0

Category B 3.0 2.0

Category C -Cl 3.0 4.0

-C2 4.0 4.0
-C3 5.0 4.9
-C4 5.0 7.0
-C5 5.0 4.0

Category D -D1 5.0." 4.0

-D2 5.0 7.0

Category E 6.0 7.0

2.6.3.2 Garageand Vehicle Traffic Areas

2.6.3.2.1 Categories

; (1) Traffic areas in buildings are divided into two categories according to their accessibility for
vehicles as shown in Table 2.11. ---

",

46 EBCS -1 1995
..,.- """""'~-c'Tq" : c"";',;",C- ---'-'-

-.CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES DENSITIES,SELF-WEIGHTAND IMPOSED LOADS

, Table 2.11 Traffic Areas in Buildings
. Category Specific Use Example
F Traffic and parking areasfor e.g, garages;
light vehicles(~ 30 kN total parking areas,parking halls
weight and ~ 8 seatsnot
including driver)
Traffic and parking areasfor e.g. accessroutes; delivery
G mediumvehicles(>30 kN, zones;
~ 160 kN total weight, on 2 zonesaccessibleto fire engines
axles) (~ 160 kN total weight)

(2) Accessto areasdesignedto categoryF shallbe limited by physicalmeansbuilt into the structure.

(3) Areas designedto categoriesF anc;iG shouldbe postedwith the appropriatewarning signs.

! 2.6.3.2.2 Values of Actions

(1) The characteristicvalues for the concentratedloadsQkrepresentinga singleaxle with dimensions

accordingto Fig. 2.1 and the distributed load qkare gi"venin Table 2.12.

. ;

-'.
: qiG!~~--
0,1..0 1 1.So ~~la
I :IJI.+ q 1.0

Figure 2.1 Dimensions of Axle Load

Table 2.12 Imposed Loads on Garagesand Vehicle Traffic Areas

Traffic areas qk
(kNfm2) ~
(kN)

CategoryF
vehicle weight: ~30, ~ 160 k1~ 2.0 10

Category G
.vehicle weight: > 30, ~ 160 kN
1-5.0 45
, -(2) Both the concentratedlqad Qkand the uniformly distributed.load q:t shaltbe consideredto act

together.

r:BCS -1 1995 47!

 I
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
.-
(3) Each concentratedload shall be applied on a squaresurfacewith a 200nun side in the positions
which will producethe most adverseeffects.

(4) The reductioncoefficient aAfor categoriesF and G shallbe consideredas follows:

aA = 1.0 (2.3)
,
(5) The reduction coefficient an for categoriesF and G shall be consideredas follows:

an = 1.0 (2.4)

2.6.3.3 Areasfor Storage and Industrial Activities

(1) The characteristicvalue of the imposedload and also the loading arrangement(free or fixed
actions) shall be defined, respectively, by the maximumvalue taking account9f dynamic effects if
appropriateand the most unfavourableconditionallowed in use.

(2) The maximumpennitted loadsshouldbe indicatedby sings in the rooms concerned.

(3) The characteristicvalues of vertical loads in storageareasmay be derived by taking the values
given in Section 2.4 and upper designvalues for stackingheights. When stored material exerts
horizontalforces on walls etc., the horizontalfor may be detenninedfrom specialistliterature. Any
~ effects of filling and emptying shall be takeninto account.

(4) Loads for storageareas for books and files shall be detenninedfrom the loaded area and the
height of the book casesusing the densityvalues in Section2.4.

(5) Loads on industrial areasmay comprisemachines,productionunits, heavy rolling enginesthat

canhavea definedlane, suspendedcranes,etc. t~atcannotbe modelledby unifonnly distributedloads
but needmore detailedmodelling.

(6) The imposedloads to be consideredfor serviceabilitylimit state verifications shall be specified

in accordancewith the service conditionsand the requirementsconcerningthe perfonnance of the
structure.

2.6.3.4 Roofs

2.6.3.4.1 Categories

(i) Roofs are divided accordingto their accessibilityinto three categoriesas shownin Table 2.13.

Table 2.13 Categorization of Roofs

Category Specific Use
H Roofs not accessibleexceptfor nonnal maintenance,repair, paint-
ing and minor repairs
I Roofs accessiblewith occupancyaccordingto categoriesA -G
K Roofs accessiblefor specialservices,suchas helicopterlandings I

8i'
.',

i"
'"X'
~
;~;::::;,
48 EBCS-1.1995
-J. I
"~ ,

11
-.,.
CHAPTER 2: ACTIONS ON STRUCTURES. DENSITIES, SELF-WEIGHT AND hWPOSED LOADS t

.(2) Loads for roofs of category H are given in Table 2.13 Loads for roofs of category I are given in
Table 2.10 and Table 2.12 according to the specific use. For roofs of category K the loads should
be established for the particular case.

2.6.3.4.2 Valuesof Actions

(1) The characteristic values Qkand qkare given in Table 2.14. They are related to the projected area
of the roof under consideration.

Table 2.14 Imposed Loads on Roofs

R00 f s qk
(kN/m2) Qk
(kN)

Category H Flat roof 0.5 1.0

Sl6ping roof 0.25 1.0 ti
"1
(2) Separate verification shall be performed for the concentrated load Qkand the uniformly distributed .',1
load qk, acting indepenQently. ~,.,
(.,.~
(3) For local checks the concentrated load Qk is given in Table 2.14. The application area of Qk

.
-(4)
comprises a square with a 50mm side.

The reduction coefficient aA for category i-I shall be considered as follows:

~ aA = 1.0 (2.5)

(5) Access ladders and walkways shall be assumed to be loaded according to Tabie 2.2 for a roof
slope < 20°. For walkways which are part of a designated escape route qk shall be assumedto be:

q; = 3.0 kN/m2 (2.6)

,
(6) The effects of water ponding on roofs should be considered.

2.6.4 Horizontal Loads on Partition 'Valls and Barriers due to Persons

(1) The characteristic values of the line load qk acting at the height of the hand rail but not higher than
1.20m are given in Table 2.15.

Table 2.15 Horizontal Loads on Partition Walls

and Barriers due to Persons

Loaded areas (k~im)

.Category A 0.5
Category Band C1 1.0
Categories C2 -C4 and D 1.5
Category C5 3.0

(2) For areas susceptible to significant overcrowding associated with public events e.g. for sports
stadia, stands,stands, stages, assembly halls or conference rooms, the line load shall be taken
according to category C5.

r EBCS -1 1995 49
 -

.-
£THIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
:~~---~~---
.

.
[TillS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK] . ":'

.
..

50 EBCS -1 1995
l- -
 .-

. CHAPTER3
WIND ACTIONS

: 3.1 SCOPE
t
(1) This Chaptergives rull.~sand methodsfor calculatingwind loadson building structuresup to a
height of 200m, their1compc'l1ents
and appendages.

(2) Wind loads shallbe calculatedfor eachof the loadedareasunderconsideration. Thesemay be:

(a) the whole structure

(b) parts of the structure, i.e components,claddingunits and their fixings

(3) This Chapteralsogivesrules for chimneysand othercantileveredstructures. Specialrequirements

for lattice towers are not given.

3.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ACTIONS

(1) Wind action are classified asfree actions,see Chapter1.

..
.3.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS
I
..
-(1) The relevantwind actions shall be determinedfor eachdesignsituationidentified in accordance
with Chapter1.

(2) The effect of changesof the form of the constructionworks which may modify the externaland
internalwind pressure(such asdoors normally closedbut left openunder storm conditions)shall be
considered.

(3) Structuressusceptibleto dynamic effect shall be designedfor fatigue loading.

3.4 REPRESENTA TION OF ACTIONS

3.4.1 Expansion of the Wind Actions and the Responseof t~1eStructures

(1) Wind actionsare fluctuating with time. They act directly on the externalsurfacesof enclosed
structuresand, through porosity of the externalsurface,also act indirectly on the internal surfaces.
They may also directly affect the internal surface of openstructures. Pressuresact on areasof the
surface producing forces normal" to the surface for the structure or for individual cladding
components. Additionally, when large areasof structuresare swept by the wind, frictional forces
acting tangentiallyto the surface, maybe significant.

To achievethe designaims accountshallbe takenof:

-(a) turbulentwind acting over part or all of the structure"(seeSection3.5 and 3.6 respectively)
(b) fluctuatingpressuresinducedby the wake behind the structure(see Section3.9.4)
(c) fluctuatingforces inducedby the motion of the structure(see Section3.9.4).

EBC$ -1 1995 51

I
 1:;

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

.
(2) The total responseof structuresand their elementsmay be consideredas the superpositionof a
"background" component,which acts quasi-staticallyand "resonant"componentsdue to excitation
close to natural frequencies. For the majority of structuresthe resonantcomponentsare small and
the wind load canbe simplified by consideringthe backgroundcomponentonly. Suchstructurescan
be calculatedby a simplified method. The limits to suchstructuresare set down in Section3.9.

(3) The dynamiceffectsare divided into different types accordingto the physicaleffect of the wind:

,(a) stochasticand resonantresponse(alongwind, crosswind and torsional direction) due to

turbulenceand wake effects
(b) responsedue to vortex shedding
(c) galloping
(d) interference
(e) divergenceand flutter.

(4) In this Chapter,the wind action is representedby a set of quasi-staticpressuresor forces whose
effects are equivalentto the extreme effects of the wind. Slenderstructures such as chimneys,
observationtowers, componentelementsof open frames and trusses,and in some caseshigh rise : ~
buildings shall be designedto resist the dynamic effect of vortex shedding. General rules for l ~
evaluating such situations are provided in Section3.9.4. Criteria are also given for aeroelastic
instability.

3.4.2 Modelling of "Vind Actions

(Ii The wind action is representedeither as a wind pressureor a wind force. The action on the
structurecausedby the wind pressureis assumedto act normalto the surfaceexceptwhereotherwise
specified; e.g. for tangentialfriction forces.

(2) The following parametersare used severaltimes and are definedbelow:

q'~f referencemeanwind velocity pressurederived from referencewind velocity as defined in

Section3.7.1. It is used asthe characteristicvalue
c~(Z) exposurecoefficient accountingfor the terrain and heightaboveground z given in Section
3.8.5. The coefficient also modifies the meanpressureto a peak pressureallowing for
turbulence
z referenceheightdefined in Appendix A appropriateto the relevantpressurecoefficient i
(z = z~)for externalpressureand force coefficient, z = Zjfor internalpressurecoefficient)
Cd dynamic coefficient accountingfor both correlationand dynamic magnification given in
Section3.9.

I"' ..3.5 WIND PRESSURE ON SURFACES

~ 3.5.1 Field .of Application )

(1) The representationof the wind pressuregiven in this Sectionis valid for surfaceswhich are
sufficiently rigid to neglecttheir resonantvibrationscausedby the wind, as is normally the case.

(2) If a naturalfrequencyof vibration of the surfaceis low (i.e. less than5 Hz), thesevibrations may
becomesignificant, and they shall be taken into account. These effects are not covered by this
Chapter.'

52 EBCS -1 1995
 r -1 CHAPTER
3: WIND
AC770NS~ '! ~ f

-..~
3.5.2 External
Pressure I
91'
"",:, .,it;
(1) The wind pressureacting on the externalsurfacesof a structure Weshall be obtainedfrom: t
i
We= qrt/ ce(ze)Cpt (3.1) 1
'j..
J

l~
where Cpt is the externalpressurecoefficientderived from AppendixA. Y

3.5.3 Internal Pressure

(1) The wind pressureactingon the internal surfacesof a structure ~ shall be obtainedfrom:

~ = qre/ ce(z)Cpi (3.2)

where Cpi is the internalpressurecoefficientobtainedfrom AppendixA.

3.5.4 Net Pressure

(1) The net wind pressureacrossa wall or an elementis the difference of the pressureson each
surfacetakingdue accountof their signs. (Pressure,directedtowardsthe surfaceis takenaspositive,
and suction, directed away from the surfaceasnegative). Examplesare given in Figure 3.1.

~.~,
"':, . ntg " Mg

!~~ ~- -~ --nl9 -pm- -; --r.tq

(a) (b)

-w: X- ~ ~
= = WeJ
==
3[J
-"==11
.-= -,
~ n~
w:

(c) ~) -

Figure 3.1 Pressure on Surfaces

3.6 WIND FORCES

. 3.6.1 Wind Forces from Pressures

;:
r:- (1) The wind forces acting on a structureor a structural componentmaybe determinedin two ways:
, ..

(a) by meansof global forces

.(b) as a summationof pressuresacting on surfacesprovided that the structureor the structural
componentis not sensitiveto dynamic response(Cd < 1.2 see Section3.9).

EBCS -1 1995 53~

,.
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

(2) The global' force F w shall be obtained from the following expression: --

Fw = qrtf Ct(Zt)Cd Cf Art! (3.3)

where Cf is the force coefficient derived from Section 3.10

Art! is the reference area for Cf(generally the projected area of the structure normal to the
,
wind) as defined in Section 3.10 ,'.

(3) For lattice structures and for vertical cantilevered structures with a slenderness ratio
heig~t/width > 2 and with nearly constant cross-section (e.g. tall buildingis', chimneys, towers) the
force F wjon the incremental area Aj at the height Zjis:

Fwj = qrt! Ct(Zj)Cd C.uAj ..(3.4)

where Zj is the height of the centre of gravity of incremental area Aj

C.u is the force coefficient for incremental area Aj as defined in Section 3.10
Aj is the incremental area

(4) Torsional effects due to inclined or non correlated wind may be represented on non circular nearly
symmetric structures by the force F w acting with the eccentricity e:

b
e = -(3.5)
10

where b is the dimension of the cross section transverse to the main axis considered (see
Fig.3.~).

~-~ ~ I
I

._0_.+._0_'

.
~$;~
I

I Fw
.
Figure3.2 Wind ForceActing on CrossSection

(5) More detailed values of the eccentricity for special cross sections are presented in Section 3.10.

3.6:2 Friction Force

(1) For structures with large area swept by the wind (e.g. large free standing roofs), friction forces,

'c,'"
f~,,;;;.
F fr may be significant. They shall be obtained from:

54_4 EBCS.11995
EBCS- 11995 , 0,

,
~::(;;~'
, ,

i
~
~'
CHAPTER 3: WIND ACTIONS ,"
-.' I
1l
...
Ffr = qrt/ ce(Ze)cfr Afr (3.6)
.,11 .0,

where Cfr is the friction coefficient derived from Section 3.10.13

Afr is the area swept by the wind

3.7 REFERENCE WIND

3.7.1 Reference Wind Pressure

(1) The reference mean wind velocity pressure qrefshall be determined from:

p Vrt/
qrt/ = "2 2

where Vrt/ is the reference wind velocity as defined in Section 3.7.2

p is the air density ,

The air density is affected by altitude and depends on the temperature and pressure to be expected in
the region during wind storms. A temperature of 20°C has been selected as appropriate for Ethiopia
and the variation of mean atmospheric pressure with altitude is given in Table 3,1.

Table 3.1 Values of Air Density p

~t;~ Site Altitude(m)

, .", Above sea level p( kg 1m3

~ 0 1.20
.500 1.12
1000 1.06
1500 1.00
2000 0.94

3.7.2 Reference Wind Velocity

(1) The reference wind velocity vrei is defined as the 10 minute mean wind velocity at 10m above
ground of terrain category II (see Table 3.2) having an annual probability of exceedence of 0.02
(commonly referred to as having a mean return period of 50 years).

(2) It shall be determined from:

Vref= CDIR
Cn;:.v
CALT
Vreto (3.7)

where Vreto is the basic value of the reference wind velocity to betaken as 22m/sec
VDIR is the direction factor to be taken as 1.0.
Cn;:.v is the temporary (seasonal) factor to be taken as 1.0.
~ CALT is the altitude factor to be taken as 1.0.
~:-
(3) For temporary structures, which are: 'I
i
J
(a) structures during construction (which may require temporary bracing supports t
(b) structures whose life time is known and is less than one year ~
!;~

EBCS-1199555,& ~1

r'
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
~

a reduction of the referencewind velocity may be allowed dependingupon:

(a) the duration of the situation ) .

(b) the possibilities of protecting or strengtheningof the structureduring wind storms
(c) the time neededto protect or strengthenthe structure
(d) the probability of occurrenceof wind storms
(e) the possibilities of forecastingwind storms

B~sedon Section3.7.3 and/or on special local climate situationthe temporaryfactor CTEM

according
to Eq. (3.7) describesthis redu~tion.

(4) Transportablestructures which may be dismantledand rebuilt at any time in the year are not
consideredto be temporarystructures.

3.7.3 Annual Probabilities of Exceedenceother than 0.02

(1) The referencewind velocity Vref(P)for annualprobabilitiesof exceedence

p other thanthe value
of 0.02 (see Section3.7.2 (1) canbe found usingthe following expression:

-
[ l-K1ln[ -In (1-p)] ] n (3.8)
v fn) -V
ref'l'" ref l-K1ln(-lnO.98)

where- v ref is the referencevelocity with an annualprobability of exceedenceof 0.02 (see -

Section3.7.2) .
k] shapeparameter. The representativevalue K] = 0.2 canbe used.

n exponent. The representativevaluen = 0.5 canbe used. -

0.005

0.01
I
0.02 I
:
p I I I
+ 0.05 I I

0.1
0.2

0.5
0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2

vre ,(p)/
/' vref

I Figure 3.3 Ratio Vrejp) vreffor k1 = 0.2 and n = 0.5 5iJ;::",I .

I ~ .
I I.5

I
EBCS -1 1995

1~
 ..'-"
.
CHAPTER3: WINDACTIONS ,
A.

3.8 WIND PARAMETER

3.8.1 Mean Wind Velocity

(1) In order to define the Reynoldsnumberin A.8 andthe wind coefficientsand other parametersof
this Chapter,the meanwind velocity v",(z)is required. It is definedby:

v",(z)= c,(z) c,(z)V,q (3.9)

where V,q is the referencewind velocity (Section3.7.2)

c,(z) is the roughnesscoefficient (Section3.8.2)
-cAz) is the topographycoefficient (Section3.8.4)

3.8.2 RoughnessCoefficient

(1) The roughnesscoefficient c,(z)acCQunts

for the variability of meanwind velocity at the site of the
structuredue to:

(a) the height aboveground level

(b) the roughnessof the terrain dependingon the wind direction.

(2) The roughnesscoefficient at height z is defined by the logarithmicprofile:

-c ,(z) = kT In(zlzo) for Zmin~ Z ~ 200m (3.10)

c,(z) = c,(z",;J for z < Zmin (3.11)

where kT is the terrain factor

Zo is the roughnesslength
Zmin is the minimum height

Theseparametersdependon the terrain categoryas given in Table 3.2. -

(3) At heightsmore than 200m aboveground level specialistadviceis recommended.

3.8.3 Terrain Categories

(1) The terrain categoriesare defined in Table 3.2.

--~

r
1-
EBCS -1 1995 57

!~ [
I .1
 , "'

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

Table 3.2 Terrain Categoriesand Related Parameters

Terrain Category kr zo(m) Zmin(m} .
I Lakes with at least 5km fetch upwind and
smoothflat country without obstacles 0.17 0.01 2
II Farmland with boundaryhedges,occasional
small farm structure,housesor trees 0.19 0.05 4
~ III Suburbanor industrial areasand permanent .

forests 0.22 0.3 8

.IV Urban areasin which at least 15% of the surface
is covered with buildings and their average
height exceeds15m 0.24 1 16

(2) If the structure is situatedneara changeof terrain roughnessat a distance:

(a) less than 2km from the smoothercategoryI

(b) less than 1km from the smoothercategoriesII and II
the smootherterrain categoryin the upwind directionshouldbe used.

(3) In the abovetransitionzonessmall areasof differentroughnessshouldbe ignored (less than 10%

of the area under consideration).

(4) Whenthere is any doubt aboutthe choicebetweentwo categoriesin the definition of a givenarea, -,
the worse caseshouldbe taken.

(5) Table 3.3 gives roughnesscoefficient c,(z}for selectedvalues of height Z .

Table 3.3 RoughnessCoefficient c,

z(m)
Terrain
Category 2 4 8 16 30 50 100 200 I
I

I 0.90 1.02 1.14 1.25 1.36 1.45 1.57 1.68

II 0.83 0.83 0.96 1.10 1.22 1.31 1.44 1.58
III 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.87 1.01 1.13 .1.28 1.43
IV 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.82 0.94 1.11 1.27

3.8.4 Topography Coefficient

(1) The topographycoefficient CAZ) accountsfor the increaseof meanwind speedover isolatedhills
and escarpments(not undulatingand mountainousregions). It is relatedto the wind velocity at the
base of the hill or escarpment. it shall be consideredfor locationswithin the topographyaffected
zone (seeFig. 3.5 and 3.6). It is definedby:

Ct = 1 for if! < 0.05 .

Ct = 1 + 2 s if! for 0.05< if! < 0.3 (3.12)
Ct = 1 + 0.6 s for if! > 0.3 -

-;~
58 EBCS-1 1995 )
-.CHAPTER 3: WIND ACTIONS

Where s is the factor to be obtainedby interpolationfrom the value of

s = 1.0 at the crest of a hill, ridge or escarpmentand the value s = 0 at boundary
of the topographyaffectedzone. (seefigs. 3.5 and 3.6). Interpolationshallbe linear
with horizontaldistancefrom crest and with heightabovethe local ground level.
If> is the upwind slopeH/L" in the wind direction (seefigs. 3.6 and 3.7)
Le is the effective length of the upwind slope, defined in Table 3.4
L" is the actuallength of the upwind slope in the wind direction
Ld is the actuallength of downwind slope in the wind direction
H is the effective height of the feature
x' is the horizontaldistanceof the site from the top of the crest
Z is the vertical distancefrom the ground level of the site

Table 3.4 Values of Le

Slope (If>= H/L,,)

Shallow (0.05 < If>< 0.3): Steep(If>> 0.3)

Le = L" Le = H/0.3

(2) In valleys, cJz) may be setto 1.0 if no speedup due to funnelling effects is to be expected. For
structuressituatedwithin steep-sidedvalleyscare shouldbe takento accountfor any increaseof wind
speedcausedby funnelling.
5=0

O.SLe
5=0

W"
ni H

X+

0.75 Le 1.5 Le

-TOEQ.GRAPHY AFFECTED ZONf.

: 6 Figure 3.5 Factor s: Cliffs, and Escarpments

EBCS -1 1995 59
 "-
"' ,
'?, ,
'"

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

" -
5= 0

r.y

O.SL~
$=0 5=0

Wi~ O'~le O.SLeII

I 0.754

~ TOPOGRAPHY AFFECTED ZONE

Figure 3.6 Factor s: Hills and Ridges

3.8.5 Exposure Coefficient ".

(1) The exposure coefficient, Ce(Z)takes into account the effects of terrain roughness, topography and .
height above ground on the mean wind speed and turbulence. It is defined by: -

ce(z) = c2,(Z)c2/(z)[1 + 2gIv(z)] (3.13)

:;. where g is the peak factor

I Iv (z) is the turbulence intensity, given by:
r '
'"

,," , kT
.};~ I,,(z) = (3.14)
'ii C' (z)' C/ (z)
.I '
'I (2) For codification purposes it has been assumed that the quasi-static gust load is determined from:

,
c(z) = c;(z) c;(z)
e
[ 1+ 7k T
c,(z) c/(z)
] (3.15)

--
,,~~
where kT is the terrain factor as defined in Section 3.8.2
c,(z) is the roughness coefficient as defined in Section 3.8.3
c/(z) is the topography coefficient as defined in Section 3;8.4 -~

(3) The exposure co~fficient c.(z)is given in Table 3.5 for e.ach 'terrain category defined in .
, \ Section 3.8.2. -' ..
'! !
I
l' ..,
"c-'r:;:
i#'4 ~-';:'

60 EBCS -1 1995
 CHAPTER 3: WIND ACTIONS

(4) For structures which need to be designed by a detailed dynamic analysis method, the simplification
in (2) above is not used.

3.9 CHOICE OF PROCEDURES

3.9.1 General
(1) Two procedures for calculating wind loads are required.

(a) the simple procedure of this Code applies to those structures whose structural properties do
not make them susceptible to dynamic excitation. This procedure can also be used for the
design of mildly dynamic structures by the use of the dynamic coefficient Cd, The value of
this coefficient dependsupon the type of structure (concrete, steel, composite), the height of
.the structure and its breadth.
(b) a detailed dynamic analysis procedure is required for those structures which are likely to be
susceptible to dynamic excitatiQn and for which the value of the dynamic coefficient Cd is
greater than 1.2.

(2) The dynamic coefficient Cdtakes into account the reduction effects due to the lack of correlation
of pressures over surfaces as well as tIle magnification effects due to the frequency content of
turbulence close to the fundamental frequency of the structure.

(3) Section 3.9.2 defines the field of application of this section, and the criteria for choosing between
simple and detailed procedures.

(4) Section 3.9.3 sets down the values of Cdfor use with the simple procedure (in-wind response).

(5) Section 3.9.4 gives criteria for vonex shedding and galloping.

3.9.2 Criteria for the Choice

(1) The simple procedure may be used for buildings and chimneys less than 200m tall provided the
value of Cd(see Section 3.9.3) is less than 1.2 (in-wind response). In all other cases a detailed
dynamic analysis is required in accordance with specialist literature.

3.9.3 Dynamic Coefficient for Gust Wind Response

(1) Values of Cdset out in Figs. 3.7 to 3.13 are based on typical values of the relevant parameters and
simplified equations for natural frequencies of structures.

(2) Values of Cdfor buildings are set out in Figs.3. 7 to 3.9 depending on the material of construction.

(3) Values of Cdfor chimneys are set out in Figs. 3.10 to 3.13 depending on the form of construction.

(4) For values of 1.0 ~ Cd ~ 1.2 it is recommended that a detailed procedure should be used.
,
'.

EBCS -7
 -
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
,

Table3.5 ExposureCofficientc.- .
CATEGORY I

z(m)

c1 2 4 8 16 30 50 100 200
.,
1.0 1.88 2.25 2.64 3.07 3.47 3.82 4.31 4.84
1.1 2.16 2.59 3.05 3.55 4.02 4.43 5.02 5.63
1.2 2.45 2.95 3.48 4.06 4.61 5.09 5.77 6.49
1.3 2.76 3.33 3.94 4.60 5.24 5.78 6.57 7.39
1.4 3.09 3.73 4.42 5.17 5.90 6.52 7.41 8.36
1.5 3.43 4.15 4.93 5.78 6.60 7.30 8.31 9.38
CATEGORY II

z(m)

c1 2 4 8 16 30 50 100 200

1.0 1.80 1.80 2.21 2.66 3.09 3.47 4.01 4.58

1.1 2.06 2.06 2.54 3.06 3.57 4.00 4.64 5.31
,
1.2 2.33 2.33 2.88 3.48 4.07 . 4.58 5.31 6.09
1.3 2.61 2.61 3.24 3.92 4.60 5.18 6.02 6.92
1.4 2.91 2.91 3.62 4.40: 5.16 5.82 6.7& 7.80 -
1.5 3..22 3.22 4.02 4.89 5.75 6.49 7.57 8.73
CATEGORY
III .

z(m)
cI 2 4 8 16 30 50 100 200
;~
1.0 1.63 1.63 1.63 2.11 2.59 3.00 3.60 4.25 ,-

1.1 1.86 1.86 1.86 2.41 2.96 3.44 4.14 4.90

1.2 2.09 2.09 2.09 2.72 3.35 3..90 4.71 5.59
1.3 2.33 2..33 2.33 3'.04 3.76 4.39 5.32 6.32
1.4 2.58 2.58 2.58 3.39 4.20 4.91 5.96 7.09
1.5 2.84 2.84 2.84 3.74 4.Q5 5.45 6.63 7.91
CATEGORY IV

z(m)
cI 2 4 8 16 30 50 100 200

1.0 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 2.04 2.46 3.08 3..75

1.1 ,, 1..77 , 1.77 1.77 1.77' 2.31 2.80 3.52 4.31
1.2 1.98 1.98 1.98 1.98 2.61 3.16 3.99 4.89 "
1.3 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.91 3.54 4.48 5.51 "
1.4 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.43 3.23 3.94 4.99 6.16
1.5 2.67 2.67 2.67 2.67 3.56 4.35 5.53 6.84 .
.

62 EBCS -1 1995 /-
 ; ..
\'1 It
; " It
(" i: ,,
[! if I
..II
'c
c
!
;
t
I
it.
CHAPTER 3; WIND ACTIONS ii'
.' ' I
: ..
I'

I" ..
.,

j;
""'
1"I !

~
,IN
J"I
.1-"
b
..-=-.f ,;i;
i

LD fh
I 'K)O
not of
prQcticQt
.
interest

)"
SO

height h ( lira

20

10
.5 10 20 ~ 100

.tx-.adth b (m)

Figure 3.7 Cd Values for Concrete and Masonry Buildings

Note: The criteria set down in this figure do not address comfort conditions at serviceability.
If this is likely to be of concern, more detailed procedures should be used.

-.

-EBCS -1 1995 63 ~
I
l f
 ~~/AN BUILDING CODE STANDA~~~ADING -

~
~rh notof
W proctlcal
, .)" Intlrlat

SO

40
height hIm)
~

20

10 20 100

brladth b 1m)
Figure 3.8 CdValues for Steel Buildings

b m
~
150

~ f m notof
~ proc
tical
~ in~erest

,~;,';:, hlighthfm)

!:~~~,,;;;,~~;,'~:: 30
t ."' Y',j

10
5 10 20 SO 100

breadth b (m) ,/
Figure 3.9 CdValues for Composite (Steel/Concrete)Buildings

A 64 EBCS
-1 -"995
 ,-

" -CHAPTER 3; WIND ACTIONS

.'ZOO

,CO For Cd> 1.2use .' f

dynamic metf1od crlttnJ or
vortex sheddi~
(6.~.~)
SO

heighth {mJ -~>-

20

-'-
0

,0,5 1 2 5 10
di.ame~r b (m)

" Figure 3.10 C; '"a1uesfor Unlined Welded Steel Chimneys

100 'I, .l
crl,erl; r~r
'tONal sl1tddi"9
{6.141
SO

h!igh,th (m) ~ -.,/ >-

0
"
2 ~

, 0, S 1 2 S 10 "i;

" -Figure
diameter b (tn)

3.11 Cd Values for Lined Steel Chimneys

c' ~c.
,;,,1
C,!!ji!i':C
\c:~i;~
cO

:~

j EBCS -1 1995 65
 -.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

200

'100 criteri~ for

I vortex sheOdiilg

SO

height h (m) b

'" -.,/.,"-
0-
20 c
II
"8

10
0.5 1 2 5 10
diimet~ b (m)

Figure 3.12 Cd Values for Brick Lined Steel Chimney '-

crite-ii ~or vortex

100 .
sh~lng

b
I 50 ,/,.L .
4 he~ht h (m) .
t 2
~J

, 10

0,5 1 2 5 ~
diimeter b (m)

Figure 3.13 CdVlaues for Reinforced Concrete Chimney .

!.

t;: t;: CQr'~ of of aa~

..
CHAPTER3: WIND ACTIONS-

3.9.4 Vortex Shedding, Aeroelastic Instability and Dynamic

Interference Effects

3.9.4.1 General

(1) For slender structures the following phenomena of dynamics and instability effects have to be
considered:

(a) vortex shedding

(b) galloping
(c) flutter
(d) divergence
(e) interference galloping

(2) Rules for analyzing such phenoIllena may be obtained from specialist literature.

(3) Criteria for the field of application of vortex shedding and galloping are given in Section 3.9.4.2.

i 3.9.4.2 Field of Application

!
(1) Buildings whose geometric dimensions satisfy the criteria gi~n in fig. 3.14 need not be checked
for vortex shedding and galloping. Buildings which do not satisfy these criteria shall be checked for
." vortex shedding and galloping.

.(2) Elongated structures, such as chimneys, whose geometric dimensions satisfy the criteria given in
~ figs. 3.10 to 3.13 and need not to be checked for vortex shedding, galloping, flutter and interference
galloping. Such structures which do not satisfy these criteria shall be checked for these phenomena.

~
field of ~ ~"Q" ~
~plication Ir ~ ~ ~ '?
~ ,""L. ? "
of~x '\.Ir ~~/o"';)b'~

heigh

Wind/
fl:Df--:-{
b 20
no sensitivity to
vortex shedding

~ 10
5 10 20 50 breadth 1m]
b
: -Figure 3.14 Ciriteria for Buildings for Vortex Shedding and Galloping

EBCS -1 1995 67
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING ..

[TillS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLAl"ll'K]

~ 68 EBCS-
77995
 "" "'
0 -, ' .f "

t; ,.1:\
'" i"
C

.-Appendix A 'I,
C
.,

.Aerodynamic Coefficients
A.l GENERAL

(1) This section presents the aerodynamic coefficients of the following structures, structural elements
and components:

-Buildings (Section A.2)

-Canopy roofs (Section A.3)
-Free-standing boundary walls, fences and signboards ( Section A.4)
-Structural elements with rectangular Section ( Section A.S)
-Structural elements with sharp edged Section (Section A.6)
-Structural elements with regular polygonal Section (Secion A.7)
-Circular cylinders (Section A.8)
-Spheres (Section A.9)
-Lattice structures and scaffoldings (Section A.I0)
-Friction coefficients (Section A.ll)
-Effective slenderness and slenderness reduction factor (Section A.12)

A.2 BUILDINGS

A.2.1 General

(1) The external pressure coefficients Cptfor buildings and individual parts of buildings depend on the
.size of the loaded area A. They are given for loaded areas A of 1m2and 10m2in the relevant tables
-for the appropriate building configurations as Cpt,land Cpt,IOrespectively -For other loaded areas the
variation of the values may be obtained from fig. A.l.

Note: The loaded area is the area of the structure, which produces the wind action in the section
to be calculated. ~

Cpe

C pe, 1 ,!1
,
'..
,

C~,10 1 2 it 6 8 ~ A [ m2}

Figure A.l Variation of External Pressure Coefficient for Buildings with Size of the
Loaded Area A.

Note: The Figure is based on the following:

: , Cpt; Cpt,) A S 1m2

Cpt= Cpt,}+ (Cr-e,IO
-cpt.l)logloA 1m2< A < 10m2
A ?; 10m2 Cpt = Cpe,IO

EBCS -1 1995 69
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .

(2) The values Cpe,lO

and Cpe,lin Tables A.l to A.5 are given for orthogonalwind directions00,90°, .
180°but representhighestvaluesobtainedin a range of wind direction () = :t 45° either side of the
relevantorthogonaldirection.I

(3) Thesevaluesare only applicableto buildings.

A.2.2 Vertical Walls of Rectangular Plan Buildings

,
~ (1) The referenceheight, Ze' for walls of rectangularplan buildings dependson the aspectratio h/bI
and ~sgiven in Fig. A.2 for the following three cases.

(a) Buildings, whose heighth is less than b, shallbe consideredto be one part.
(b) Buildings, whose heighth is greaterthan b, but less than 2b, shall be consideredto be two
-parts, comprising: a lower part extendingupwardsfrom the ground by a height equalto b
and an upperpart.
(c) Buildings, whose height h is greater than 2b, shall be consideredto be in multiple parts,
comprising: a lower part extendingupwards from the ground by a height equalto b; an
upper part extendingdownwardsfrom the top by a height equalto b and a middle region,
betweenthe upper and lower parts, divided into as many horizontalstrips with a maximum
height of b as desired.

b: crosswioowidth h >~
: -T Z.- h .
\

b< h< ~ ~ Z.- h. b '.

h<b 'TZ.-h Tz.-z

.
1: -h T z.-b TZ.-b

(a) (b) (c)

Figure A.2 Reference Height ZeDepending on hand b.

(2) The externalpressurecoefficientsCpe.lO

and Cpe,l for zoneA, B, C, D, and E defined in Fig. A.3
are given in Table A.l dependingon the ratio d/h. Intermediatevaluesmaybe interpolatedlinearly.

(3) Friction forces should be consideredonly for long buildings (seeSection3.6.2),

-.

70 EBCS -1 1995
~

"
 r
..~ APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMICCOEFFICIEN~

ELEVATlON

case
-- d>e

PLAN ~~..-! i
I- d-j -~ 'AI B I c , Th

wind'\ ~~e d~ ':

.0 Eb 8/5

/ H
VI
!!!L ~[=~l Th
., ,
.A

~ I B. :
.e=b or 2h
.whichever is smaller

Figure A.3 Key for Vertical Walls

Table A.I External Pressure Coefficients for Vertical Walls of

Rectangular Plan Buildings
Zone A B,B' C D E
d/h Cpe,IO Cpe,1 Cpe,lO Cpe,1 Cpe,IO1 Cpe,l Cpe,IO Cpe,I Cpe,lO1 Cpe,1

~1 -1.0 -1.3 -0,8 -0.1 -0.5 +0.8 +1.0 -0.3

~4 -1.0 -1.3 -0.8 -0.1 -0.5 +0.6 +1.0 -0.3

A.2.3 Flat roofs ,

.(1) Flat roofs are defined within a slope of :1:4°.

-(2) The roof should be divided into zones as shown in Fig. A.4
(3) The reference height Zeshould be taken as h.
.(4) Pressure coefficients for each zone are given in Table A.2.
.-(5) For long roofs friction forces should be considered (see Section 3.6.2).

EBCS -1 1995 71
 -.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

~
h

Parapets Cur.-edIl'd mansard,ave.s

ret.rlnc8height:
:.-h
d I .b or 2h
I- --I whicheveris smaller

./4
T F
b : crosswind dimlNion

wind
~
#'- G H I b

/
01"
I F -
I I. 1/10

t- I/2-i

Figure A.4 Key for Flat Roofs

A 72 EBCS-11995
..
i APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

.Table A.2 External Pressure Coefficients for flat roofs

Zone

F G H I

C!"IO Cpt 1 C!",IO Cpt,l C!",IO C!",I Cpt,IO CPt,1

Sharp eaves -1.8 -2.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.7 -1.2 :t 0.2

Hplh = 0025 -16 -2.2 -1.1 -1.8 -0.7 -1.2 :t 0.2

. h H,,/h = 0.05 -1,4 -2.0 -0.9 -1.6 -0.7 -1.2 :t 0.2

Witt I

parapets Hp/h = 0.10 -1.2 -1.8 -0.8 -1.4 -0.7 -1.2 :t 0.2

r/h=0.05 -1,0 -1.5 -1.2 -1.8 -0.4 :to.2

C d r/h = 0.10 -0,7 -1.2 -0.8 -1.4 -0.3 :t 0.2

urve
eaves r/h = 020 -0.5 -0.8 -0.5 -0,8 -0.3 :t O.:?

a = 30" -1.0 -1,5 -1.0 -1.5 -0.3 :to.2

mansard
eaves a = 45" -1 2 -1.8 -1.3 -1.9 -0.4 :t 0.2

a =60" -1.3 -1.9 -1,3 -1.9 -0.5 :to.2

Notes: (i) For roofs with parapets or curved eaves, linear interpolation may be used for
.intermediate values of hp/h and r/h.
-(ii) For roofs with mansard eaves, linear interpolation between a = 30", a
= 45°,
~. a = 60°, may be used. For a > 60" linearly interpolate between the values
for
a = 600and the values for flat roofs with sharp eaves.
(iii) In Zone I, where positive and negative values are given, both values shall be
considered. ,
(iv) For the mansard eave itself, the external pressure coefficients are given in
Table 3.2.4 "External pressure coefficients for duopitch roofs: wind
direction 0" Zone F and G, depending on the pitch angle of the mansard
eave.
(V) For the curved eave itself, the external pressure coefficients are given by
linear interpolation along the curve, between values on the wall and on the
roof.

A.2.4 Monopitch Roofs

(1) The roof should be divided into zones as shown in Fig. A.S

(2) The reference height Z. should be taken as h.

.(3) Pressure coefficients for each zone are given in Table A.3

(4) For long roofs friction forces should be considered (see Section 3.6.2).

-.(5) For elongated roof corners (see Fig. A,S) the zone R is under the same pressure as the
corresponding vertical wall. This rule is also applicable for roofs of other types.

i
I
~l EBCS -1 1995 73
 ..
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
-

~ t-q118W ~ NQh NY8

e .0- 1ow~_~"_= II h eo
., eo- hr r=~--r ..,.

.1
rlfttlnC8 height :
(a) general z. .h

8/4
I F
wind'"
.H b

/
8/4
I F
,. I 81/10 e .b or 2h
whichever is smaller
(b) wind directions g .0" It'\d e .180"
b : crosswind dimension .
wind ~ b/2 - hIg"~

\ Q ."

.-/ .b
b/2
I ' HI.

8/10 ~~
'- ~ I- 8/2
18 -8 I

(c) wind direction e = go8

Figure A.5 Key for Monopitch Roofs

~~~;

74 EBCS -1 1995 l
 , i

..
APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

Table A.3 External Pressure Coefficients for Monopitch Roofs

Zone for wind direction 0 = O' Zone for wind direction 0 = 180.

Pitch F G H F G H

angle a Cpr,lO Cpr,t Cpr,lO C",,! Cpr,tO Cpr,! Cpr,tO Cpr,l Cpr.IO Cpr,! Cpr,to Cpr.t

50 -1.7 -2.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.6 -1.2 -2.3 -2.5 -1.3 -2.0 -0,8 -1,2

150 -0.9 -2.0 -0.8 -1.5 -0.3 -2.5 -2.8 -1.3 -2.0 -0.9 -1.2

+ 0.2
300 -0.5 -0.2 -1.1 -2.3 -0.8 -1.5 -0.8

+ 0.4
450 + 0.7 + 0.7, + 0.6 -0.6 -1.3 -0.5 -0.7

600 +0.7 +0.7 +0.7 -0.5 -1.0 -0.5 -0.5

750 +0.8 +0.8 +0.8 -0.5 -1.0 -0.5 -0.5

.Zone for wind direction 0 = 90.

Pitch F G H

.angle a Cpr. to Cpr I Cpt.tO Cpr,t Cpt,t Cpt, 10 Cpt.t

.Cpr.tO

50 -1.6 -2.2 -1.8 -2.0 -0.6 -1.2

150 -1.3 -2.0 -1.9 -2.5 -0.8 -1.2 -0,7 -1.2

300 -1.2 -2.0 -1.5 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0,8 -1.2

450 -1.2 -2.0 -1.4 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0,9 -1.2

600 -1.2 -2.0 -1.2 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0,7 -1.2

750 -1.2 -2.0 -1.2 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0.5

Note: (i) At () = 00the pressurechangesrapidly betweenpositive and negativevaluesaround

a pitch angle of 1 = + 150to + 30", so both positive and ne.gativevaluesare given.
(ii) Linear interPolationfor intermediatepitch angles may be used betweenvalues of
samesign.

A.2.5 Duopitch Roofs

(1) The roof should be divided into zonesas shown in Fig. A.6

--(2) The referenceheightz. shouldbe takenas h.

-..(3) The pressurecoefficients for eachzone are given in Table A.4

(4) For long.roofs friction forces shouldbe considered(seeSection3.6.2)

EBCS -1 1995 75
 -.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

--
wi'Id fIC8 wW'Id ~ t2C8

~ >0
~ -~
~"'.:"'."~.
..""""""
I
dvw.-;-.w-~ face .-0-
-] '...'.. ~ ~,
downwV'ld fact
...0«0
,
:::::::~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
h h':::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::'
, -;;

Pitchlngl. positlv. PitChanglenegattlle

(I) genera!

.,
~ face v ,*~ ~

8/4 ,I ,!,
i
'd

wind"" f
.1-00 a H a Jib

/ f .
8/4 I ' 1 rt',ranC9
height:
.
..." 8/10 1-8/10 :. .h . I

(b) wind dlrectJon e .0-

.I 20 or 2..,

8/4
I ~
which r i~ smaller

wind"" -H I b : ero5..-wind dimension

Q /lid;I
.I-~ ~ rough b .'

/ I~ H I
8/4 ,
~ I .8110
,. t/2 .,

(c)winddirectione .90.
Figure A.6 Key for Duopitch Roofs

4.

76 EBCS -1 1995
 ~
~.
-.
APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

.Table A.4 External Pressure Coefficients for Duopitch Roofs

Zone ~ormnd direction 8 = 00

Pitch F G J

angle a Cpo,tO Cpo.! Cpo,tO Cpo.I Cpo.IO Cpo,

I' Cpo.IO Cpo,I

-450 -0.6 -0.6 -0.8 -0.7 -1.0 -1,5

-300 -1.1 -2.0 -0.8 -1.5 -0.8 -0.6 -0.8 -1,4

-ISo -2.5 -2,8 -1.3 -2.0 -0.9 -1,2 -0.5 -0.7 -1.2

-50 -2.3 -2.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.8 -1,2 -0.3 -0.3

50 -1.7 -2.5 -1.2 -2,0 -0.6 -1,2 -0.3 -0.3

150 -0.9 -2.0 -0.8 -1.5 .0.3 -0.4

-1.0 -1.5
+ 0.2 + 0.2 + 0.2

300 -0.5 -1:5 -0,5 -1,5 -0.2 -0,4

-0,5
+ 0.7 + 0.7 + 0.4

450 +0.7 +0.7 +0.6 -0.2 -0.3

600 + 0.7 + 0.7 + 0.7 -0.2 -0.3

.750 + 0.8 + 0.8 + 0.8 -0.2 -0.3

.Zone for mnd direction 8 = 90.

": F G H I

C I

-450 -.1.4 -2.0 -1.2 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0.9 -1.2

-300 -1.5 -2.1 -1.2 -2.0 -1.0 -1.3 -0.9 -1.2

-150 -1.9 -2.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.8 -1.2 -0.8 -1.2

-50 -1.8 -2.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.7 -1.2 -0.6 -1.2

50 -1.6 -2.2 -1.3 -2.0 -0.7 -1.2 -0.5

150 -1.3 -2.0 -1.3 -2.0 -0.6 -1.2 -0.5

300 -1.1 -1,5 -1.4 -2.0 -0.8 -1.2 -0.5

450 -1.1 -1.5 -1.4 -2.0 -0.9 -1.2 -0.5

600 -1.1 -1.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.8 -1.0 -0.5

750 -1.1 -1.5 -1.2 -2.0 -0.8 -1.0 -0.5

.Notes: (i) At 8 = 00the pressurechangesrapidly betweenpositive and negativevalues on the

-.windward face around a pitch angle of 1 = + 15°to + 300,so both positive and
negativevaluesare given.
.(ii) Linear interpolation for intermediatepitch angles of the same sign may be used
-.between valuesof the samesign. (Do not interpolatebetweena = + 5° anda = -5°,
but use the data for flat roofs in SectionA.6.

EBCS -1 1995 77
: ~
 .-
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
-
.
A.2.6 Inpped Roofs

(1) The roof should be divided into zonesasshown in Fig. A.7.

(2) The referenceheightz. shouldbe takenas h.

,
(3) The pressurecoefficientsare given in Table A.5.

.~ AI. 8~ ~ J.I

..bat2h
r.f.~ h~ : wtIJd\.,.
Itsmall.
z.."
b : crosswind dimension

.. 1110

...I
l
T *1 -
4..10 .~ I
1 10
wind'" M ..00 I ~ -~
-\. ..,t ~.;IO
' T .

/ / ...i ~ -
".1
T
.L
+8'10
"T-
.~.
.10 ~10

".10 .-2

(8) wind dr.CUon e .0- (b) wind direction 9 .90-

Figure A.7 Key for Inpped Roofs

A.2.7 Multispan Roofs

(1) Pressurecoefficients for eachspanof multispanroofs shouldbe derived from SectionA.2.4 for
monopitchroofs modified for their position accordingto Fig. A.8.

(2) The referenceheightz. shouldbe takenas h. .

--
(3) For long roofs friction forces shouldbe considered(seeSection3.6.2).

-.

78 EBCS -1 1995
..
APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS
.
-.~ '
"l
'"' -Q
bI) bI)
.., !"I !"I !"I !"I ~ .~
~ qq q qqq ~ ~
~ u ~
t .': ~
U Q. 0/)
...~
cu ~
-, I"! !"I I"! I"! 8 '=5
, ,l
,"" ; --.~
" -0/)
~ ..,...'oJ..,. -~ ='
9 9 ~ -
~ > cu
-.~ ~ OC! OC! ...>.
t,)l 9 9 9 9 "'g Q l""!
.-~-<
~ ~
-.00 0 000 ~ ~.S.
~ t,)l '<";i<";i <";i <";i<";i<";i o:S ~~~
:§ Q ~ 8 ,~
'g 0 o~u
~ 2!"1""""'" !"I !"I 0/) ~...~
= t,)l",;,",;,",;,",;, "';' "';' E~ "'CU-
~!;: ~
c.,. CU .0 ~ 8
0 > >.O~
-, 0 ~ CU";;'~
~ '~N > ...; E CU ='
0 '"" 0/)
0 V"\ ~ ~
..,; ~ \Q bI) > Q ~ ~
on'oJ'"
~ 0 9 9 9 9 ~ 'Oo'~ ~ ~
'0 ~ i I"! Q~~.s~
!. II U"';' 'g~~~.s
Q, ~ CUO/)O/)~Q
~ ~ ...~
~ C -.V"\!"I ~ E ~ -= ~
0 ~ >
Coo.
0
~.~
OJ
.c , ,"
'"' \Q " \Q ~ ~ .->
~ ~
'" 0
00 ~ 0bI)
rIJ"O"" q 099 0.>0/)";\=
-"0 ~ .-~ .-
~ .5 i ~ r--: 5 ~ '00 II ~
.-~ U ,9 ~ on Q 0/)
e.E. ~~cu~~
~ § -.~ "'g '5 -g ~
U N t,)l >. CU,': CU CU
~ ...V"\ ..,. -0.0
~~~Ir)U ~
I-t ...q q q q q q 'O,'~ ~ + .oS
=
rI1
~ CU.- .-
0/) ~
~ t,)l 0/) 0 ~ II ~~
~ ~;: § ~ ~
Q...~...~
~ l -' U -.-'" ~
~ -.!"I ...~Q~.-
CU 0 Q
E
~
~ ~

U'!"I""
"'.!"I
.0 '0000

\Q r-- ~ ~ 0 ...
.O/)
--"'~
0 ~ ,~
~~ 2.
l ~
9 9 + 9 + + + + ~=' C"\
0o~ 'r:,
Q.o
0 ~~ 0
II') U ~+cu_~
.--0-
-< :i:;ge.e-on
OJ -.0. V"\ "1 0 ~ B ~
:c t,)l ":i"'; "';' r- r- ~ 0 '!3 .s .5 '5
~= ~ 000 1I1I~0.'"
~ + + + CU...Q.
-!"I ~ ~ ~...
t ...; Q 0 ~
() ,9 ~ ~
<o~-~
.&. -,
..
V"\ 0
--' U !"I !"I
, r- r- ~
0 0 0
: r- 0\ + + + -,- -:';:;" .-
.t,)t .;: q v v v
-.~ .cu
~"Co
,.9.0
1111
o~
...~
~ ~ 0 . ~
V"\
,.
.-
V"\
r- Z
0
:Q:; .~II + + + + +
-.JA. I '~'~I I I I I I I
~ EBC$-1 1995
 .
.-
ETMOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

.
Cpt
O.SCpt 0.6 Cpt 0.6Cpt
r ,..",:.'.
I .
I ,
h
I

, C I.
C~ ~0 Cpt. -O.lt -0.4 -0."

CPlcO

.h ]
Cp. Cpt

~- h

rlfltinci hligh~ z.. h

CPI
0.8CpI 0.6CpI 0.6C.

..h

Figure A.S Key to Multispan Roofs

A.2.S Vaulted Roofs and Domes

(1) This sectionappliesto circular cylindrical roofs and domes. !

(2) The roof shouldbe divided into zonesas shownin Figs. A.9 and A.1O.

(3) The referenceheight shouldbe takenas:

Ze = h + 1/2 (

(4) The pressurecoefficientsare given in Fig. A.9 and Fig. A.1O.

1.11111. (5) Pressurecoefficientsfor the walls shouldbe takenfrom A.2.2.

':.;;' -80 EBCS-11995

-. -APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFIC/~

.
A B

( L ~10
~ ~j "
..f
Ii .I h

pe h+f t' -r

0,8

0,6
0,4 i
02 ~
,
0 I 5 01 ;'
I " , , 0,4 0#5 f/d ;
-0,2 ;
--O~
.I (

.-0',6 \ '
." A(h/d~O,5) .
\ "
-0,8
-10 ";
.I I I~--"~ --
-12 -: -I I~ B
, A (hId ~ 0,5)
,,

Note (i) for 0 ~ hid ~ 0.5, Cpe,10 is obtainedby linear interpolation

(ii) for 0.2 ~ lid ~ 0.3 and hid ~ 0.5, two valuesof Cpe,10 have be considered
(iii) the diagramis not applicablefor flat roofs

Figure A.9 External PressureCoefficients for Vaulted Roofs with Rectangular Base and
ll(h + j) ~ 10
...Note: Cpe,10
is constantalong arcs of circles, intersectionsof the sphereand of planesperpen-
dicular to the wind: it can be determinedas a first approximationby linear interpolation
.between the values in A, Band C along the arcs of circles parallel to the wind. In the
-.same way the valuesof Cpe,10 in A if 0 < hid < 1 and in B or C if 0 < hid < 0.5 canbe
I obtainedby linear interpolationin the figure above.

.EBCS -1 1995 81
 ;~--~~~
I

f ETHiOPIAN BUIi.DING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .-

-
I

I
..--
;' ...
I ~" ,-r '~--, -
4 .." If
, A;(-
.Ih -..
t, --.:..
1 CPe
.1.0 '- --
.0.8 A

.0.6
-O.t.

.0.2
0,0 O.Sf ((h/d=OI
-0.2 i'd
-Of.
.((h/d~O.S)
-0,

-0.
-1, .

-1 B(h/d=O)

-1, B(h/d~O.S)..
-\

Figure A.10 External Pressure Coefficients Cpt,tO

for Domes with Circular Base

A.2.9 Internal Pressure

(1) The internal pressure coefficient Cpifor buildings without internal partitions is given in Fig. A.II
a,ndis a function of the opening ratio 1/.,which is defined as

I/. = -L area of openings at the leeward and wind parallel sides (A.2)
L area of openings at the winward, leeward and wind parallel sides

(2) The reference"height; without internal partition and floors is the mean height of the openings .
with homogeneous distribution of height of the dominant opening. an opening is regarded as domi- -'
nant, if the ratio of its area to that of the remaining openings is larger than 10.

(3) the reference height; for buildings without internal partitions but with compartmentation -by ~-
internal floors is the mean height of the level considered.

82 EBCS -1 1995
"'"",

APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

..

.
-.-,
.0 "'0---,
0,8

0,5

'pi
0

-0, 25

-0,5
0 0,1 0,5 0,75 0,9 1
fA'

.
Figure A.I! Internal Pressure Coefficient Cpifor Buildings with Openings in the Walls

(4) For a homogeneous distribution of openings f9r a nearly square building the value Cpi= -0.25
shall be used.

(5) The worst values have to be considered for any combination of possible openings.

(6) For closed buildings with internal partitions and opening windows the extreme values:

Cp;= 0.8 or Cpi = -0.5 (A.3)

",
(7) In figure the most intensive suction is assumed to be Cpi= -0.5 (lowest point of the curve). If ':
one or more dominant openings exist in areas with more intensive suction than -0.5, then the curve
continues down to the lower value.

(8) Internal and external pressures are considered to act at the same time.

:. (9) the internal pressure coefficient of open silos is: '.

Cpo = -0.8 (A.4); "

.,.
i -.,;~ The reference height Zj is equal to the height of the silos. "

~.~~
-;; i

;j EBCS -7 7995 83
;;'
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

A.3 Canopy Roofs

(1) Canopy roofs are roofs of buildings, which do not have permanent walls, such as petrol station
canopies, dutch barns, etc.

(2) The degree of blockage under th~ canopy is shown in Fig. A.12 It depends on the solidity ratio
cp,which- is the ratio of the area of possible obstructions under the canopy divided by the cross area
ooder-the canopy, being both areas normal to the wind direction. cp = '0 represents an empty canopy,
cp = 1 represents the canopy fully blocked with contents to the down wind eaves only (this is not a
closed building).

(3) The net pressure coefficients Cp,net

are given in Table A.7 to A.9 for cp = 0 and cp = 1.
Intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.

(4) Downwind of the position of maximum blockage, Cp,net are given in Table 10.3.1 to 10.3.3 for cp
= 0 and-cp = 1. Intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.

(5) The overall coefficient represents the resulting force. The local coefficient represents the
maximum local force for different wind directions.

(6) Each canopy must be able to support the maximum (upward) loads as defined below:

.(i) for monopitch canopy (Table A.7) the centre of pressure shall be taken at w/4 from the .
windward edge (w = alongwind dimension, Fig. A.13) -
(ii) for duopitch canopy (Table A.8) the center of pressure shall be taken at the center of each
slope (Fig. A.14.) .
In addition, a duopitch canopy must be able to support one pitch with the maximum or .
minimum load, the other pitch being unloaded.
(iii) for multibay duopitch canopy each bay can be calculated by applying the reduction factors
..given in Table A.9 to the Cpn~t
values given in Table A.8.

In case of double skin, the impermeable skin and its fixings shall be calculated with Cp,n~t
and the
permeable skin and its fixings with 1/3 Cpn~t.

(7) Friction forces should be considered (see Section 3.6.2).

= -""--.::::::~:~~"'"
: ::::--=> " ~ ~

=--~-;?~~...~~--=
'////.1'//.1'//////////////////////////// ~ ' ". ~

= ~~~i~~m;",~
.~..~
-~ - ""::;>
/ .

--

Figure A.12 Airflow over Canopy Roofs

..

(8) Loads on each slope of multibay canopies shown -in Fig. A.lS are determined by applying the
factors given in Table A.9 to the overall coefficients for isolated duo-pitch canopies. -

84 EBCS -1 1995

;, _f~';} ~~.'.
~
..APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS
--

Table A.7 Cp.nttVaIues for Monopitch Canopies

Roof angle a Blockage cp Overall Local coefficients
[deg.] coefficients

1/10
~~~~.--tt w(1 0
w

0 ~ -
Minimumallcp +0.2 +0.5 +1:8 +1.1
0 Minimum cp=O -0.5 -0.6 -1.3 -1.4
Minimum cp=l -1.3 -1.5 -1.8 -2.2

Minimum all cp + 0.4 + 0.8 + 2.1 + 1.3

5 Minimum cp=O -0.7 -1.1 -1.7 -1.8
Minimumcp=l -1.4 -1.6 -2.2 -2.5

.Minimum all cp + 0.5 + 1.2 + 2.4 + 1.6

--10 Minimum cp=O -0.9 -1.5 -2.0 -2.1

. Minimumcp=1 -1.4 -2.1 -2.6 -2.7

-Minimum all cp + 0.7 + 1.4 + 2.7 + 1.8

15 Minimum cp=O -1.1 -1.8 -2.4 -2.5
Minimum cp=J. -1.4 -1.6 -2.9 -3.0

Minimumallcp +0.8 + 1.7 +2.9 +2.1

20 Minimum cp=O -1.3 -2.2 -2.8 -2.9
Minimum cp=1 -1.4 -1.6 -2.9 -3.0

Minimum allcp + 1.0 + 2.0 + 3.1 + 2.3

25 Minimum cp=O -1.6 -2.6 -3.2 -' 3.2
Minimumcp=1 -1.4 -1.5 -2.5 -2.8

Minimum allcp + 1.2 + 2.2 + 3.2 + 2.4

30 Minimum cp=O -1.8 -3.0 -3.8 -3.6
Minimumcp=l -1.4 -1.5 -2.2 -2.7

Note (i) + down

-up
(ii) zref= h

..

EBCS -1 199!i. 85
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
..

, h~ ~ ~ ,~

h ~ W
~
h
~ ::::-P
p O ~ ,. ".~

,,'~~

J cp<O

';-~~'-'.!: C1::: CP<O "':~ ~

..h ~ h
~~,I
---':~
i;1;11 I

"

"
f

i .

I .I

' .,
.I

Figure A.13 Load Arrangements for Monopitch Canopies .i

..

86 EBCS -1 1995
-..APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

-Table A.S Cpo"t'Values for Duopitch Canopies

Roof angle a Blockage tp Overall
[deg.] coefficients .J i/10

.1/10
w/10

-20
Minimum all tp
Minimum (,'=0
-0.7
-0.7
D__-
+ 0.8
-0.9
+ 1.6
-1.3
+0.6
-1.6
+1.7
-0.6
Minimum tp= 1 -1.3 -1.5 -2.4 -2.4 -0.6

Minimumalltp +0.5 +0.6 + 1.5 +0.7 +1.4

-15 Minimum tp=O -0.6 -0.8 -1.3 -1.6 -0.6
Minimum tp=l -1.4 -1.6 -2.7 -2.6 -0.6

Minimum all cp + 0.4 + 0.6 + 1.4 + 0.8 + 1.1

-10 Minimum cp=O -0.6 -0.8 -1.3 -1.5 -0.6
Minimum tp=l -1.4 -1.6 -2.7 -2.6 -0.6

Minimum all cp + 0.3 + 0.5 + 1.5 + 0.8 + 0.8

-5 Minimum cp= 0 -0.5 -0.7 -1.3 -1.6 -0.6
Minimumtp=l -1.3 -1.5 -2.4 -2.4 -0.6

Minimum all cp + 0.3 + 0.6 + 1.8 + 1.3 + 0.4

+ 5 Minimum cp=O -0.6 -0.6 -1.4 -1.4 -1.1
Minimumcp=l -1.4 -1.3 -2.0 -1.8 -1.5

Minimumallcp +0.4 +0.7 +1.8 +1.4 +0.4

+ 10 Minimumcp=O -0.7 -0.7 -1.5 -1.4 -1.4
Minimum cp=l -1.3 -1.3 -2.0 -1.8 -1.8

Minimum all cp + 0.4 + 0.9 + 1.9 + 1.4 + 0.4

+ 15 Minimum cp=O -0.8 -0.9 -1.7 -1.4 -1.8
Minimum cp=l -1.3 -1.3 -2.2 -1.6 -2.1

Minimum all cp + 0.6 + 1.1 + 1.9 + 1.5 + 0.4

+ 20 Minimum cp=O -0.9 -1.2 -1.8. -1.4 -2.0
Minimumcp=l -1.3 -1.4 -2.2 -1.6 -2.1

Minimum all cp + 0.7 + 1.2 + 1.9 + 1.6 + 0.5

+ 25 Minimum cp=O -1.0 -1.4 -1.9 -1.4 -2.0
Minimum cp= 1 -1.3 -1.4 -2.0 -1.5 -2.0

Minimum all cp + 0.9 + 1.3 + 1.9 + 1.6

.+ 30 Minimum tp=O -1.0 -1.4 -1.9 -1.4
-.Minimumcp=l -1.3 -1.4 -1.8 -1.4

.Note
-- (i) + down
-up
(ii) zref= h

EBCS .1
~;

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING

Cp>O /

~~-b~ hG;
hl~ ~~-\
~ --~---j-
hl~~~

, \-4-
h[!:C t~ ~ I-
h~7~~:~""-'-'7
ht::~~

hf~t--':'~-1
« Cp>O
~ h,-1-:---:-
-h ,~--~:---\
-
ll~;;;;:;;;~. ~""",~~:,~"",~",~~
;'~'r'_,","
t~-! ;\ -,--.!--: \- :
hl.,,"~:~~ hl~~:~"'7
'7"'"
h1:::::::.

Figure A.14 Load Arrangement for Doupitch Canopies

Table A.9 Cp,nel

Values for Multibay Canopies
Factorsfor all <p
Bay Location on maximum (downward) on minimum (upward)
overall coefficient overall coefficient
1 end bay 1.00 0.81
2 secondbay 0.87 0.64
3 third and subsequentbays 0.68 0.63

A.4 Free-Standing Boundary Walls, Fencesand Signboards

A.4.1 Solid Boundary Walls

(1) The wall shouldbe divided into zonesas shown in Fig. A.16

(2) Values of net pressurecoefficients cp,nel

for free-standingwalls and parapets,with or without
return comers, are given in Table A.10 for two values of solidity. Solidity <p= 1 refers to solid
walls, while ~ ,
<p= 0.8, refers to walls which are 80% solid and 20% open. The referencearea in both casesis the. -"
gross area. --
(3) Linear interpolation'for solidity ratio may be used in the range0.8 < <p< 1. For porouswalls' -
with solidity less than0.8, coefficientsshouldbe derivedas for planelattice frames(seeSectionA.10).
1 -
" 88 EBCS -1 1995

"~ :';'
.",
J
 , '--~ '.' -' '.
I!!~
. ~

-.-APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIEN~

.
~\'\/~'\\VII"\~\",I"'\,/I"\\,~/I\VI
~1 .2 .3_3 .3__. 2 .L h

-rT , ,.,., ., , , , , , " , , , ,. , ,,/' T' T,. , , , "r"Tr

Figure A.15 Multibay Canopies

(4) The slendernessfactor ~J (see"SectionA.12) may be applied.

(5) The referenceheightZeshouldbe takenas h.

Table A.10 Net Pressure Coefficients for Free-StandingWalls ~.,;,
Solidity Zone ABC D ;}c~
;::$
.without return 3.4 2.1 1.7 1.2 '.:~;~
\~';
-corners .'-;
-;:;'l!
.Ip = 1 With return 2.1 1.8 1.4 1.2 ~,:;.
.corners Jjo'~;'
;..,
'jf/:
Ip=O.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 :.i:

O.3h \- 2h ,

C h

(a I Key to zon., ze=h

I ..;.

u ~.~- L ~

~I Without ret1.Kncorner ~I With return corner

: -Ib) Key to wind angle

Figure A.16 Key to Boundary Walls
.
-.

EBCS -1 1995 89

i
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING
-

A.4.2 Pressure Coefficients for Porous Fences

(1) Porousfenceswith solidity ratio ~ ~ 0.8 shouldbe treatedas a planelattice usingthe provisions
of SectionA.10.

A.4.3 Signboards

f (f) The force coefficients for signboards,separatedfrom the ground by at least d/4 height (see
':!, Fig. A.17), is givenby:

cf = 2.5 ~A (A.5)

where ~~ slendernessreductionfactor (seeSection10.12)

r Q.."-j

b !
r'" ..., -+-'T.t
I .. d
I +r
.+. ~ "-1-. 11.1
1/,b
i'/4b i1/4b~ 74 14

Ze Zg

Figure A.I7 Key for Signboards -~

.-
Note: (i) reference: Z. = Zg+ d/2
(ii) referencearea: Art! = b d
(iii) Zg~ d/4 if not assumedas boundarywall -

90 EBCS -1 1995
r cc;:-,
,.

" .
APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFIClcNTS
..
.(2) The resultant force nonnal to the signboard should be taken to act at the height of the center of
the board, with an horizontal eccentricity of:

e = :to.25 b (A.6)

A.S Structural Elements with Rectangular Sections

(1) The force coefficient cf of structural elements of rectangular section and with wind blowing
normally to a face is given by:

Cf= Cfo'/Ir '/I), (A.7)

"
where cfo force coefficient of rectangular sections with sharp comers and infinite slenderness
ratio}.. (}.. = lib, 1 = length, b = width of element) as given in Fig, A.18. .'.
'/Ir reduction factor for square sections with rounded comers, '/Ir are given in Fig. A.19.
'/I), reduction factor for elements with finite slendernessratio as defined in Section 10.12.

(2) The reference area Are[is:

..;,
Are[ = 1 b (A.8) ;:.

.The reference height Zeis equal to the height above ground of the section being considered.

-.(3) For plate-like sections (dlb < 0.2) lift forces at certain wind angles of attack may give rise to
.higher values of Cf up to an increase of 25% (for example, see Section A.4 signboards).

A.6 Structural Elements with Sharp Edged Section

(1) The force coefficient cfof structural elements with sharp edged section (e.g. elements with cross
sections such as those shown in Fig. A.20) is given by:

cf = cfo '/Ir~ (A.9)

where Cfo force coefficient of stmctural elements with infinite slend~rnessratio}.. (A = l/b, 1 = ,
length, b = width), as defined in Fig. A.18. It is given for all sections and for both ~;"
wm. d d lrectlons as: cfo = 2,0
"
-'
I :'.
~,
'/IA slenderness reduction factor (see Section A.12)

.
-
".

,i: EBC.s. 1 1995 91

a:
 I

~~/AN BUILDING CODE STAND~~LOADI

2,8 y r-~l
, -~ ,- ~10b

2,5 2.1. ~ d~ T

2.35
1 V68J.
2 ~
I\.~

1,S

0,

0
,1.2 .6,7 1 S 10 SO d/b

Figure A.IS Force Coefficients Cf,o of Rectangular Section with Sharp Corners and
SlendernessA = lib = ~ and Trubulence Intensity of Iv ~ 6%

...92 EBCS-11995
 r
I
~r APPENDIXA: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS
~

-.1--OrJ j
0,5

0 rib
0 0,1 0.2 0,3 0,1.

Figure A.19 Reduction Factor '/Ir for a Square Cross-Sectionwith Rounded Corners

I=:VL I [ F ~r} Lx
y
1]

Note: L = length
--

...
--Figure A.20 Sharp Edged Structural Section

EBCS -1 1995 93
 -

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING .

.-.
(2) The referenceareas:

In x-direction: Art!x = Ib
In y-direction: Ar.!y = Ib

, (3) In all casesthe referenceheightz. is equalto the heightaboveground of the sectionbeing

considered.

A.7 Structural Elements with Regular Polygonal Section

(1) The force coefficient cfof structuralelementswith regularpolygonalsectionwith 5 or more sides

is given by:

cf = cfo 1/1~ (A. 10)"

where cfo force coefficient of structural elementswith infinite slendernessratio>.. (>" = lIb,
! I = length, b = diameterof circumscribedcircumference,seeFig. A.21)as defined
in Table A.ll.
1/1~slendernessreductionfactor as defined in A.14

bU ..
~~
Figure A.21 Regular Polygonal Section

(2) The referenceareaArofis:

A,of = lb (A. 11)

(3) The referenceheightz. is equalto the heightaboveground of the sectionbeing considered.

-.
.-

94 EBCS -1 1995
 r '~""--""".'
"-
r ."

..

~ 'i
?i8 .! ~,
i
..APPENDIXA: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS ;

~
Table A,ll Force Coefficient Cj.olfor Regular Polygonal Sections

Number of S .Finish of Surface

.
SId es ectlons and 0f Corners Reynolds Nurnber Re C:r.0

5 pentagon all all 1.8

6 hexagon all all 1.6
surface smooth Re ~ 2.4 .105 1.45
rib < 0.75(2) Re ~ 3 .105 1.3
8 octagon
surface smooth Re ~ 2 .105 1.3
rIb < 0.75(2) Re ~ 7 .105 1.1

10 decagon all all 1.3

surface'smooth (3) 2 .lOS < Re < 1.2 .106 0.9'
comers rounded
12 dodecagon
...Re < 2 .lOS 1.3
all other Re ~ 4 .lOS 1.1

snrface smooth (3) Re < 2 .105 like ~ircular

.
..2
16 comers rounded

.105 ~ Re < 1.2 .106

cylmders

0.7

.surface smooth (3) R 2 105 like circular

.18 comers rounded e< .cylinders

2 .105 ~ Re < 1.2 .1OS 0.7

Note: (1) Reynold number, Re, is defined in Section A.8

(2) r = comer radius, b = diameter
(3) from tests in wind tunnel with galvanised steel surface and a section with b = 0.3m
and comer radius of 0.06 b

A,S CIRCULAR CYLINDERS

A,S,I External Pressure Coefficients

(1) Pressure coefficients of circular sections depends upon the Reynolds numbers Re defined as:

Re = ~ (A.12)
v

where b diameter
.v kinematic viscocity of the air (v = 15.10-6m2/S)
: .vm(z.) mean wind velocity as defined in Section 3.8.1

= .(2) The external pressure coefficients c~ of circular cylinders is given by:

,.
'.:~J c~ = cp.o~>"a (A.13)
""
~',.
where cpo
0 external pressure coefficient for infinite slenderness ratio>.. (see (3) below)

" --.EBC~-'I: ~ii19~5 95

~;tI:~ " ~
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STAIVDARD FOR LOADING

~Xa slenderness reduction factor (see (4) below)

(3) The external pressure coefficient Cp.ois given in Fig.A.22 for various Reynolds numbers as a
function of angle a.

(4) The slenderness reduction factor ~"a is given by:

,
~~a = 1 for 00 ~ a ~ CiA
3600 -aA ~ a ~ 360'
~"a = 'Ji" for aA ~ a ~ 360' aA (A.14)

where aA position of the flow separation (see Fig. A.23)

~" slenderness reduction factor (see Section A.2)

P!~cpO '1
I --A
_tp! = cpqn '~).,

1a08
-2

Note: (i) Intermediate values rilay be interpoiated linearly

(ii) typical values in the above Fig. are shown in the Table below

Re amin Cpo.min aA Cpo,h

5 x 105 85 -2.2 135 -0.4

2 x 106 80 -1.9 120 -0.7

107 75 -1.5 105 -0.8

wher~ amin position of the minimum pressure

cpo.min value of the minimum pressure coefficien!
aA position of the flow separation
Cpo.h base pressure coefficient

(iii) The above Fig.is based on an equivalent roughness K/B less than 5.10-4. Typical values of .-
roughness height k are given in Table A.12.

Figure A.22 Pressure Distribution for Circular Cylinders for Different Reynolds
Number Ranges and Infinite Slenderness Ratio
!~
..96 EBCS -1 1995 -"'"
r-
r : APPENDIX
A: AERODYNAMIC
COEFFICIENTS I

-
.(5) The reference area Art[ is:
Art[ = lb (A.lS)!

(6) The reference height Zeis equal to the height above ground of the section being considered

A.8.2 Force Coefficients

(1) The force coefficient Ct' for a finite circular cylinder is given by:

Ct = c/,o1/1). (A.16)

where c/,o force coefficient of cylinder with infinite slenderness (see Fig. A.23)
c~ slenderness reduction factor (see A.12).

Cf.
I I klb
1.2 I .2
c I 10
10.3
,. , 1.0
;~ 10.4
-: 0.8 10-5

.-0.6
0.4

01
0 ' I
104 10 2 345678106 2 345678107 2 345 Re

Figure A.23 Force Coefficient Cl.O for Circular Cylinders with Infinite Slenderness Ratio and
for Different Equivalent RoughnessK/B

(2) Values of equivalent surface roughness k are given in T3.ble A.12

(3) For stranded cables c1,0is equal to 1.2 for all values of the Reynolds number Re.

.
.-

-~

EBCS
-1 1995 97
 -

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING -

Table A.12 Equivalent Surface Rou~hlless k .

,

Type 0 f surlace
& Equiv;Jlent Equivalent
roughness k(Q'~1') roughness .{(mm)
0.01)15 ")
, I g:1.....:}, i st~eI
11<;(;( O..
polished metal 0.002 I 02
I smooth conc;-ete .

fine paint 1!.(J{!6 j, 1.0

r~J'.1gt;
1,;'.J.r!~
~tte
spray paint 1.1.\'1 2.0
ruSt
bright steel 0.05 30
brick\!,ofk .

cast iron 0.2

(3) The reference area At! is:

Art! = lb (t\. t7)

(4) The reference height z.. is equ:II to the heigp.t~bf)Vr;grolmd of the sect~ot1being cl)nsidert-;d.

(5) For cylinders near a plane surface with a di~ta:1ceri'!':'tl :::.:,1[:

< 1.5 (see Fig A.24) .specia.!a,j,:j,~~~
is necessary.

,..,/..,-~ --"'---'-"r
~::{::> (.) b
" ~'---+-
z
LT7 7--" ;"~'-r'~~7'-"-.1-7"""'~'

I Figure A.24 Cylinder near a Plane Surface

A.9 SPHERES

(1) The alongwind force coefficient Ctxof spheres is given in Fig. A.25 as a function of the Reynolds
number Re (see A.8.1) and the equivalent roughne~s Klb (see Table A.12)

(2) The values in Fig. A.25 are limited to values z~ > b12, where Zgis the distance of sphere from
a plain surface, b i$ the diameter, Fig. A 26 r or z~ < bl2 the force coefficient Cr., shall be
multiplied by a factor 1.6.

A 98 EBCS
-1 1995
 r
.,
~
:i"

..

APPENDIJI.-A: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENTS

.)
w T[~;: venical for::~ coefficient ..-of
;. s;",p.er:;s
- ~jiill be assumed to be:

cf,: = 0 for Zg > b!2 (A.I8)

C!;~ = .. I
() 6 f 'or 7
~g
'-:.
r
h:J
.J, -

r) In both cases the refereni.:carea ,4,"1is:

~~ (A.19)
4

The referen:.:1.'
hcigh( should be t.ikeil as: (A.2Q)

Z~ --;
-~. I- ,')
,- [1-

.~,.-- -

Ct,x 0,6

.k/b
0.1. _.' 1C-3
.
.
..10-4

.~ 0.1 '0-')

2 2 2 3 Re

f.~i~UfeA.25 Aj,;ngwllld FO[Ll' Coefficient of a Sphere

j'
c::~=!.;>
(~
"
--X" b
--+
,.. -, , r7-'7->-,-,-"--r.1h-~, 2g , 7--'-

:
..- -Figure A.26 Sphere near a Plaiu Surface

.-A.I0 Lattice Structures and Scaffoldings

.-
U (1) The force coefficient Cj' of lattice structures and scdffuldings is given by:

-cf = cl.O 1,t-~

1,t-sc (A.2I)

EBCS. 1 1995 99
~

-i
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD Fon LOADING I
-.~

where cf,o force coefficient of lattice structures and scaffoldings with infinite slenderness h (h .
= lb , 1 =length, b = width, Fig. A.27). It is given by Figs. A.28 to A.30 as a
function of solidity ratio cp(2) and Reynolds number Re
re Reynolds number given by Eq. A,12 and calculated using the member diameter bi
1f'h slenderness reduction factor (see A.12)
1f'screduction factor for scaffolding without-air tightness devices and affected by solid
, building faces (see-Fig. A;31) plotted as a function of the obstruction factor <l>B'

l A.
I:~::~~:~~~:.:~~::~~=~~::~:::S;
1 b.

Figure A.27 Lattice Structures or Scaffolding

(2) The obstruction factor is given by:

AB n (A.22)
CPB= --:-
AB,g

where Ab,n net area of the face ..~

AB,g gross area of the face .

(3) Solidity ratio, is defined by:

..
cp = A/Ac (A.23)

where A Sums of the projected area of the members and gussetplates of the
face = Eb./. + E A
J I I gl
Ac the area enclosed by the boundaries of the face projected normal to the face = b
1 length of the lattice
b width of the lattice
bili width and length of the individual member i
Agi area of the gussetplate i

(4) The reference area Ar.i.is.defined by:

Art! = A (A..24)

(5) The reference height z. is equal to the height of the element above ground.

~ A.11 Friction Coefficients Cfr .

: .'
;, (1) Friction coefficients cfr' for long walls and roof surfaces are given in Tabie A.13 -:

(2) The reference areas swept by the wind Art! are given Fig. A.32 --
.

j 100 EBCS -1 1995

'"
'1;\ -
"i
r
~I
~. .-APPENDIX A: AERODYNAMICCOEFFICIENTS i I
..
.:

(,0
I.Z

1.0

0.'
O.~
OJ
~ Z )~5

"0 "0
1,'
'.~ .A
g.ZS'9'tO,6
1.2 1.2

1,0 1.0

0,8 0,8
101. Z ) ~5 .,.. Z] Co5 "JQ~

1,2

1.0

Figure A.30 Force Coefficient cf,Ofor Plane and Spatial -Lattice Structure with
Members of Circular Cross-Section

'" ] r11---
II

II
I LJ
I
I
I
I
1
I
I ~
-~ vitti ~..~..';'." waUs Q,D3
I ~ till Go'
, .,... U
.m 1.D~
..-
.
..Figure A.31 Reduction Factors for the Force Coefficients.of Scaffoldings without Air-
Tightness Devices, Affected by Solid Building-Face Versus Obstruction
Factor cI»B

EBCS. 1 1995101
 -~~. ~~"~"--'--~ ~
"

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING -

.-
(3) The referenceheightZeshouldbe takeninto accountaccordingto Fig. A.32 .

.
~ Arl 1
;(~
L
t.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~n
d..
.
. T .z. = h + 0,5 t
h
"rJ,..
II
"""
b A. -2b.1
I II a r"'rwf -
-L ~ ..Jr

z. = 0,6 h

r Ar.,= 2h"1
L .
,
4

Figure A.32 Key to ReferenceArea Areffor Walls and Roof Surfaces .

Table A.13 Frictional Coefficients cfr for Walls and Roof Surfaces
Surface Friction coefficient Cfr
smooth 0.01
(i.e. steel, smoothconcrete

rough 0.02
(i.e rough concrete,tar boards)

very rough 0.04

(i.e. ripples, ribs, folds)

A.12 EFFECTIVE SLENDERNESS A AND SLENDERNESSREDUCTION FACTOR ~A

(1) The effective slendernessA is defined in Table A.14

(2) The slendernessreductionfactor ~A' versusthe effective slendernessA and for different solidity .
i ratios 'P is given in Fig. A.33. .:

.
-~

102 EBCS -1 1995

 --~r ! :),
~ APPE~DIX~: AERODYNAMIC COEFFICIENT~ ...+tie1
I j

-. ,,
Table A.14 Effective SlendernessA for Cylinders, Polygonal Sections, Rectangular
~ Sections, Sign Boards, Sharp Edged Structural Section.~and Lattice
.Structures
Positionof the structure, .
No . d rrna1 th I
WIn no to e p ane 0f the page EffectIve slendernessA

1
I t 1
,J;J=~"""'r!:Ib lib
for I~ b

2
~~
01 ~ t, -i4
I ~ b [==:::~~ bJ
"for'61 ("" ",,7r

,
-b
3

f1
~ b,s1.5b Hh,s1.5b
t
~ l
lib ~70

--l.. b$I
-..
,. 4
t '
bL~==~ ---1 T.
217,.,.t~~~ --J ...f
~I--f

5 ~
JI T ni::r l
~1 t-lb--l ~ lib ~ 70
..c;~:~~ ~ 2b

.-
--
.--
.'

-EBCS -1 1995103 II

r
-'~
!:~
 ;1
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING -
-
w 0 -
k ~ .
10 :
'J!;t,

0.9

, 0.8

0.7

0.6
, 10 ~O 200
Figure A.33 SlendernessReduction Factory 1J'
A as a Function of Solidity Ratio I/'
Versus SlendernessA

(3) The solidity ratio IPis given by ( seeFig. A.34):

IP = A/Ac (A.24)

where. A sum of the projectedareasof the members -"J

Ac enclosed area Ac = lb ..
~',~
r~

~ = bot

Figure A.34 Definition of Solidity Ratio Ip

104 EBCS -1 1995

 I
[
~ .INDEX
~.
. A .Design24 assistedby
.ccidenul Designcriteria 3 testing 18
Accidenul action 4' Designmodels 17
Accidenul actions 14, IS, 24 Designresistance22
Accidental situation 26 Design situation 24
Accidenul situations 10, 24 Designsituations 3, 10, 27, 51
Action 4 Designvalue 23
Action 6ffect 4 Designvalue of a geometricalproperty 6
Action on structures 31 Designvalue of a materialproperty 5
Actions 13, 21, 24 Designvalue of an action 5
Administration Area 44 Designvalues 19,21, 22, 24, 28
Aerodynamic coefficients 69 Designvalues of actions 21
Aeroelastic InsUbility 67 Designworking life 3, 11
Aggregates 35 Destabilizingactions 23
Agricultural 36 Dimensions 42
Air density 55 Direct action 13
Angles of repose 33 Divergence 52, 67
Annual Probabilities of Exceedence56 Domes 80
Assumptions 1 Dominantaction 24
DuopitchCanopies 87
B amers
.Duopitch
49 canopy75,77
DuopitchRoofs 84
Basis of design 1 Durability 11
Beverages 39 Dynamic InterferenceEffects 67
Brick lined steel chimney 66 Dynamic action 4
Building materials 32 Dynamic actions 14, 18
Buildings 69, 70 Dynamic Coefficient 61
Dynamic effects 52
~ Canopy roofs 69, 84
4 Categoriesof building areas 45 Effective slenderness69, 103
..Cement 35 Effects of Actions 21
: Characteristic 28 Effects of displacements17
Characteristicvalue 5, 23, 42 Environmentalinfluences II, 13, 16
Characteristicvalue of a geometricalproperty 5 EquivalentSurfaceRoughness 98
Characteristicvalue of an action 5 Escarpments59
Characteristicvalues 24, 42, 44 Execution 2
Characteristicvalues of actions 14 Explosion 3, 9
Circular cylinders 69, 95, 96 ExposureCoefficient 60
Civil engineering 2 ExposureCofficient 62
Civil engineeringworks 2 ExternalPressure 53
Claddings 43 ExternalPressureCoefficient 69
Classification of actions ~ I, 51 External pressure coefficients 69-71, 73, 75, 77, 79, 95
Cliffs 59
Combinationof actions 5, 23, 24, 28
Combinationvalue 16 Factors ;,9
)

Combinationvalues 5 Failure in the ground 26

Commercial 44 Failure of structure 26
Composite(steel/concrete)buildings 64 Farmyard 36
Concrete 33 Fatigue 16, 18, 20
Concreteand masonrybuildings 63 Fences 69, 88
Constructionmaterial 2 Fertiliser 36
Constructionmaterials 31, 33, 34 Finishes 43
ConstructionWorks 2 Fire 9
Control tests 19 Fixed action 4
~ ~ Cylinders 103 Fixed actions 14, 31
.Flat
-- roof 49
.-efinitions D 2 Flat roofs
Flooring 4171,72
-.Densities 31,33,42 Floors 43
Derivation of the design 19

-EBCS -1 1995105
 --~c,c --::-

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR LOADING -

.-
Fluctuatingforces 51 Loss of static equilibrium 26 .
Fluctuatingpressures 51 .
Flutter 52, 67
Foodstuffs 38
M aintenance 4 .
Force Coefficients 97 Masonry units 33
Form of structure 2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES 16,22
Free action 4 Materials 29
Free actions 14 Mean Wind Velocity 57
Free-standingboundarywalls 69 Metals 33
Free-StandingWalls 89 Method of construction 2
Freq~encyof vibration 52 Modelling 17
Frequent 28 Modelling of Wind Actions 52
Frequentvalue 16 MonopitchCanopies 85
Frequentvalue of a variable action 5 Monopitch canopy 84
Friction coefficients 69, 100 MonopitchRoofs 73-75
Friction Force 54 Monumentalbuilding 11
Friction forces 84 Mortar 33
Frictional Coefficients 102 Multibay Canopies 88
FundamentalRequir~ments9 Multibay duopitchcanopy 84
MultispanRoofs 78

Galloping 52, 67
G
arage
46 N et Pressure 53
Garages 47 Net pressurecoefficients 84
Geometricaldata 17, 21, 22 Non-linearanalysis 21
Global force 54
Grain 36 Parking areas 47
GustWind Response 61
Partial Safety Factors for Materials 29
Partial safetyfactor 19,21-23 .
Hazard 3 PARTIAL SAFETY FACTOR METHOD 20 .
Hills 60 Partial SafetyFactors 25, 26, 29 -
Hipped Roofs 78, 79 Partial SafetyFactorsfor Materials 27 ..-
Horizontal Loads 49 PartitionWalls 49 .
Horizontal Members 44 Partitions 43
Hydrocarboqs 39 Performancecriteria 11
Permanentaction 4, 14, 32
I Permanentactions 14, 24, 28
mpact 3, 9 Persistentand transient 24
Imposedloads 27, 31, 32, 48 Persistentand transientsituations 23
IMPOSED LOADS ON BUll..DINGS 43 Persistentdesignsituation 3
ImposedLoads on Floors 46 Persistentsituation 26
Indirect action 13 Persistentsituations 10
Industrial Activities 48 Plastics 35
Industrial areas 48 PolygonalSections i03
Intendedprobability 15 PorousFences 90
Interference 52 Potentialda:mage9
Ipterferencegalloping 67 Pressureon SIJrfaces53
InternalPressure 53, 82 Pressures 53
Irreversible serviceabilitylimit states 3 Prestressedstructures 22
Prestressing 14
L Propertiesof materials 16
attice structures 69, 99, 103
Limit State Design 13
Limit states 3, 12 Q uality assurance 10, 12
Limitations 20 Quasi-permanent16,24,28
Lined SteelChimneys 65 Quasi-permanent value of a variable action 5 ."
Liquids 39 Quasi-staticaction 5 .
Load arrangement3 ~ :
Load
L d Arrmgements
3 42, 44 R ectangular sections. 103 .-
oa case
Local failure 3 Reductioncoefficient 49

106 EBCS -1 1995

 1r:

.
-INDEX -
.Reduction factor 46 Structuralsystem 2
.Reference period 5, 15 Structure 2
.Reference wind pressure 55 Symbols 6
Referencewind velocity 55, 57
Regular polygonalsections 95
Reinforcedconcrete chimney 66 T emperature 27
Reliability 4, 9 Temporarystructure 11
Reliability differentiation 9 Temporarystructures 55
Representationof actions 41, 43, 51 Terrain Categories 57
Representativevalue of an action 5 Tolerances 17
Representativevalue of the action 22 Topographycoefficient 57, 58
Representativevalues of variable 15 Torsional effects 54
Requirements 9 Traffic loads 27
Residential 44 Transientdesignsituation 3
Resistance 3 Transientsituation 26
Resonantresponse 52 Transientsituations 10
Reversibleserviceability limit states 3 Turbulent 51
Ridges 60 Type of building 2
Robustness 10 Type of construction 2
Roofs 43, 48 Types of Tests 18
Roughnesscoefficient 57, 58
S Ultimate limit states 3, 12, 16,23,26
caffoldings 69, 99 Unfavourabledeviations 22
Seismic 24
Seismicactior. 4
Seismicactions 15, 24 V alues of Actions 47, 49
Seismicsituations 10, 24 Variable action 4
.Self-weight 31, 32, 42 Variable actions 14, 15, 32
.Self-Weight of constructionelements 41 Vaulted Roofs 80
" Serviceability 9, 10 Vegetables 38
--Serviceability limit states 3, 12, 13, 28, 29 Vehicle traffic area 47
, Sharpedged structural sections 103 Vehicle traffic areas 46
Shoppingareas 45 Verification 20, 21
Sign boards 103 Verification of serviceability 28
Signboards 69, 88, 90 Verifications 23
Simplifications 20 Vertical members 44
Simplified verification 20, 27, 29 Vertical walls 70,71
Single action 4 Vortex shedding 52, 67
Single variable actions 24 Vortex sheddingand galloping 67
Slendernessreduction factor 69
Sloping roof 49
Social 44 W alkways 49
Solid boundarywalls 88 Walling 41
Solid fuels 40 Walls 43, 88
Spatial variation 14 Waterponding 49
Spheres 69, 98 W~lded s~eelchimneys 65
Stabilizing actions 23 W~ndactIons 51
Static action 4 Wmd forces 53
Static actions 14 17 Wind loads 27,51
Static equilibriu~ 23 Wind pressureon surfaces 52
SteelBuildings 64 Wood 34
Storageareas 48 Workmanship II
Stored materials 31, 32, 35, 36, 40 'l' Factors 27, 29
.Strength 4, 23
..Structural elements 69

..
: -Structural
-Structural
\
elementswith rectangularsections 91
elementswith regular poiygonal section 94
Structural Elementswith SharpEdged Section 91
Structural model 2
Structural safety 9
,

EBCS -1 1995107
,

r I
 -,

-.~~. i .EBCS-2
.

r;y

Ed'\iopian Building Code Standard

-

STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

.
~

!.,
!

i
\

..
I
\

.1. Wnistry ofWorks &,UrbanDevelopment

j Addis Ababa.,Ethiopia. 4

~ 1995

. [1

I
I
,
':1~

EBCS-2 '.

structural use of concrete

Technical Committee Members

NegussieTebedge(Secretary)
Asrat Tessema
Bekele Mekonnen
Mikyas Abayneh
ShifferawTaye

Editors
ACME Designers& Consultants
Addis Ababa

.\
I
j
I
~

~ 1
'f'..J:",
 j

;\:~1. FOREWORD
.'
'"

The Proclamation to defme the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive
Org~s of the Transitional Governmentof Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowersthe Ministry of Works
and Urban Developmentto preparethe Country's Building Code, issue Standardsfor design and
.constructionworks, and follow up and supervisethe implementationof same.

,In exercise of thesepowers and in dischargeof its responsibility, the Ministry is issuing a
series of Building Code Standards of generalapplication.

The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the

application of which is deemedto ensurecomplianceof buildings with the minimum requirements
for design, constructionand quality of materials set down by the National Building Code.

The major benefits to be gained in applying these standardsare the harmonization of

professional practice and the ensuringof appropriatelevels of safety, health and economywith due
consideration of the objective conditions and needsof the country.

As these standardsare technical documentswhich, by their very nature, require periodic

updating, revised editions will be issued by the Ministry from time to time as appropriate.
.
The Ministry welcomescommentsand suggestionson all aspectof the Ethiopian Building
-Code Standards. All feedbackreceived will be carefully reviewed by professionalexperts in the
field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendments in future
editions.

Haile Assegidie
Minister
Ministry of Works and
Urban Development
1995
 T ABLE OF CONTENTS
.
CHAPTER 1 -GENERAL 1
1
1.1 SCOPE 1
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETEWORKS 1
'1.3 UNITS 1
1.4 NOTATIONS 2

CHAPrER 2 -DATA ON-CONCRETE AND SrEEL 9

2,1 GENERAL 9
2.2 GRADES OF CONCRETE 9
2.~ CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH OF CONCRETE 9
2.4 CHARACTERISTIC TENSILE STRENGTH 10
2.5 DEFQRMATION PROPERTIESOF CONCRETE 10
2.5.1 Stress-StrainDiagrams 11
2.5.2 Modulus of Elasticity 11
2.5'.3 Poisson'sRatio 11
2.5.4 Creep and Shrinkage 11
2.5.5 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 12
2.6 CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
2.7 CLASSIFICATION AND GEOMETRY OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
~ 2.8
2.9 PHYSICAL
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
PROPERTIES OF REINFORCING STEEL
OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
14

2.9.1 Strength 14
~ 2.9.2 Ductility 14
2.9.3 Stress-StrainDiagram 14
2.9.4 Modulus of Elasticity 14
2.9.5 Fatigtle 14
2.10 TECHNOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 14
2.10.1 Bond and Anchorage 14
2.10.2 Weldability 15

CHAPfER 3 -BASIS OF D~GN 17

17
3.1 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 17
3.2 LIMIT STATES 17
3.2.1 General 17
3.2.2 Ultimate Limit States 18
3.2.3 ServiceabilityLimit States 18
3.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS 18
3.4 ACTIONS 18
3.4.1 Definitions and Principal Classification 18
3.4.2 RepresentativeValues of Actions 19
.3.4.3 RepresentativeValues of PermanentActions 19
3.4.4 RepresentativeValues of Variable Actions 20

EBCS2 -1995 vii

 .
3.4.5 RepresentativeValues of Accidental Actions 20
3.4.6 Design Values of Actions 20 ~
3.4.4 Design Values of the Effects of Actions 21
3.5 MATERIALS 21
3.5.1 CharacteristicStrength 21
3.5.2 DesignStrength 21
, 3.5.3 Partial Safetylimit
Factors for Materials 22
3.5.3.1 Ultimate State 22
3.5.3.2 ServiceabilityLimit States 22
,3.5.4 Design Strengthfor Concrete 22
3.5.5 Design Strengthfor Steel 22
3.6 COMBINATION OF ACTIONS 23
3.6.1 Ultimate Limit States 23
3.7 ANALYSIS OF LINE ELEMENTS 24
3.7.1 Methods of Analysis 24
3.7.2 Load Arrangementsand Load Cases 24
3.7.3 Imperfections 24
3.7.4 Time DependentEffects 25
3.7.5 Idealization of the Structure 25
3.7.6 Stiffness 26
3.7.7 Effective SpanLength 26
3.7.8 Effective Flange Width for T -Beamsand L-Beams 26
3.7.9 Redistribution of Moments 26i
3.7.10 Second-OrderEffects 27
j 3.8 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF PLANE ELEMENTS 27 .
\ 3.8.1 Slabs 27
~ 3.8.1.1 Methods ofAnalysis 27 ..
j 3.8.1.2 Linear Analysis, with or without Redistribution 27
.3.8.1.3 Plastic Analysis 27
f 3.8.2 Flat Slabs 28
j 3.8.2.1 Definition 28
3.8.2.2 Method ofAnalysis 28

CHAPI'ER 4 .ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES 29

4.1 SCOPE 29
4.2 BASIS OF DESIGN 29
4.2.1 Analysis of Sections ~ 29
4.2.2 Strain Distribution 29
4.2.3 Idealized Stress-StrainDiagram for Concrete 29
4.2.3.1 Parabolic-RectangularDiagram 29
4.2.3.2 RectanglarDiagram 29
4.2.4 Stress-StrainDiagram for Steel 31
4.3 FLEXURAL MEMBERS .31
4.3.1 General 31
4.3.2 DistanceBetweenLateral Supportsof Flexural Members 31 ~
4.4 COMPRESSIONMEMBERS 31
4.4.1 Scopeand Definition 31
4.4.2 Anal)Jis and Design Procedures 32
); :'~

viii EBCS 2 .1995 '"

 4.4.3 Allowance for Imperfections 32
~ 4.4.4 Classificationof Structuresand Structural Elements 33
4.4.4.1 General 33
4.4.4.2 SYvayor !Von-S~ Stnuctures 33
4.4.4.3 Braced or UnbracedStnuctures 34
4.4.4.4 Isolated Columns 34
4.4.5 Definition of SlendernessRatio 34
4.4.6 Limits of Slenderness 35
4.4.7 EffeCtiveBuckling Length of CompressionMembers 35
4.4.8 Frame stability 37
4.4.8.1 General 37
4.4.8.2 Analysis of SwayFrames 37
4.4.9 Design of Non-SwayFrames 37
4.4.10 Design of Isolated Columns 38
4.4.10.1 General 38
4.4.10.2 Total Eccentricity 38
4.4.10.3 Second-OrderEccentricity 38
4.4.11 Amplified Sway MomentsMethod for SwayFrames 39
4.4.12 Determination of Story Buckling Load !Vcr 40
4.4.13 Effect of Creep 41
4.4.14 SlenderColumns Bent About the Major Axis 42
4.4.15 Biaxial Bending of Columns 42
4.4.15.1 Small Ratios ofRelative Eccentricity 42
4.4.15.2 OverlappingBuckling Curves 42
4.4.15.3 ApproximateMethod 42
4.5 SHEAR 43
.4.5.1 General 43
4.5.2 Limiting Value of Ultimate ShearForce 43
4.5.3 ShearResistanceof Concrete in Beamsand Slabs 44
4.5.3.1 Members WithoutSignlflcant Axial Forces 44
4.5.3.2 MembersSubjectedto Signlflcant Axial Compression 44
4.5.3.3 MembersSubjectedto Axial Tension 44
4.5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement 45
4.5.5 Web-Flanie Connections 45
4.5.5.1 General 45
4.5.5.2 Resistanceto Inclined Compression 46
4.5.5.3 Resistanceto Diagonal Tension 46
4.6 TORSION 47
4.6.1 Definitions 47
4.6.2 General 47
4.6.3 Limitini Value of Ultimate Torque 48
4.6.4 Torsional Resistanceof Concrete 48
4.6.5 Deaiin of Torsional Reinforcement 48
4.6.6 Combined Action-Effects 49
4.6.6.1 Torsion and Bending and/or Longitudinal S!resses 49
.4.6.6.2 Torsion and Shear 49

:.

..ESCS " .1995 Ix

., c..-~~ 4.7 PUNCHING SO
4.7.1 General SO
4.7.2 Loaded Area 50 .
4.7.3 Critical Section 50
4.7.3.1 ~Area Remotefroman Openingora Free Edge 51
4.7.3.2 LoadedArea Qose to an Opening 51
4.7.3.3 LoadedArea Qose to Free Edge 51
4.7.4 Applied Load Effect 52
, 4.7.5 Moment Transfer BetweenSlabsand Columns 53
4.7.6 Resistanceof Slabsor Footings Without PunchingShearReinforcement 53
4.7.7 Resistanceof Slabsor Footings with PunchingShearReinforcement 53

CHAFfER 5'-SERVICEABILITY LIMIT ~A~ SS

5.1 SCOPE 55
5.2 LIMIT STATE OF DEFLECTION 55
5.2.1 General 55
5.2.2 Limits on Deflection 55
5.2.3 Requirementsfor Effective Depth 55
5.2.4 Calculationof Deflections 56
5.2.4.1 ImmediateDeflections 56
5.2.4.2 Long Term Deflections 57
5.3 LIMIT STATES OF CRACKING 57
5.3.1 General 57
5.3.2 Minimum ReinforcementAreas 57
5.3.3 Limit Stateof Crack Formation S9 -
5.3.4 Limit Stateof Crack Widths 59
5.3.4.1 General 59
5.3.4.2 Cracksdue to Flexure 59 .
5.3.4.3 Cracking due to Shear 62

CHAPrER 6 -SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 63

, 6.1 SCOPE 63
~ 6.2 WALLS 63
1 6.2.1 Reinforced ConcreteWalls 63
~ 6.2.1.1 Design of ReinforcedConcreteWallsfor Flexure and Axial Loads 63
~ 6.2.1.2 ShearResistanceofReinforcedWalls 64
4 6.2.2 Plain ConcreteWalls -:..!(. 64
~ 6.2.2.1 Design ofPlain ConcreteWallsfor Flexure and Axial Loads 65
6.2.2.2 ShearResistanceofPlain Walls 65
6.3 DEEP BEAMS 66
6.3.1 General 66
6.3.2 Design for Shear 66
6.3.2.1 Definitions and Limitation 66
6.3.2.2 Shear Strength of DeepShearSpans 67
6.3.2.3 Shear Carried by DeepShearSpans 67

X EBCS 2 -1995
- 6.4 CORBELS 67
6.4.1 Definitions and Limitations 68
~ 6.4.2 Design 68
6.5 FOOTINGS ,,68
6.5.1 Moment in Footings 69
6.5.2 Flexural Reinforcement 69
6.5.4 Bearing 69 '
6.5.5 Minimum Footing Depth 70 r
6.5.6 Plain ConcretePedestalsand Footings 70
6.6 PILE CAPS 70
6.6.1 Moment in Pile Caps 70
6.6.2 Flexural Reinforcement 70
6.6.3 Shear 71
6.6.4 Footings on Two Piles 71
6.6.5 Minimum Thickness 71
6.7 PARTICULAR CASES 71
'6.7.1 Local Forces 71
6.7.2 ConcentratedForces 71
6.7.3 Bursting Forces 72
6.7.4 Indirect Supports 73

CHAPTER 7 -DETAILING PROVISIONS 75

7.1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT 75

7.1.1 General 75
.7.1.2 Bending of Bars 75
7.1.3 ConcreteCover to Reinforcement 75
.7.1.4 Spacingof Reinforcement 77
7.1.5 Bond 77
7.1.5.1 Design Bond Strength 77
7.1.6 Anchorageof Reinforcement 78
7.1.6.1 Basic AnchorageLength 78
7.1.6.2 RequiredAnchorageLength 78
7.1.6.3 Additional Requirements for Loops 79
7.1.6.4 l1es and Sti~ps 79
7.1.6.5 Laps and Joints 80
7.1.6.6 Additional Rulesfor DefonnedBars of Large Diameter «p > 32 m:m) 80
7.1.6.7 Additional Rulesfor BundledBars 81
7.1.7 Curtailment of Longitudinal Flexural Reinforcement 81
7.1.7.1 StaggeringRule 81
7.1.7.2 AnchorageLength of Reinforcement 82
7.1.7.3 Anchorageof BottomReinforcementat Supports 82

.
, .
EBCS 2 -1995 XI

:
I
,.
. j
, -

7.2 DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 83

7.2.1 Beams 83
7.2.1.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement 83 .
7.2.1.2 Shear Reinforcement 83
7.2.1.3 Torsional Reinforcement 83
7.2.2 Slabs 84
7.2.2.1 Thickness 84
7.2.2.2 Flexural Reinforcement 84
, 7.2.3 Hollow or Ribbed Slabs 84
7.2.3.1 Sizes 84
7.2.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement 84
7.2.3.3 1ransverseRibs 85
7.2.4 Columns 85
7.2.4.1 Size 85
7.2.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement 85
7.2.4.3 Lateral Reinforcement 85
7.2.5 WALLS 86 ,
7.2.5.1 Sizes 86
7.2.5.2 Vertical Reinforcement 86
7.2.5.3 Horizontal Reinforcement 87
7.2.5.4 1ransverseReinforcement 87
7.2.6 Deep Beams 87
7.2.6.1 Thickness 87
7.2.6.2 SupplementaryReinforcement 87
7.2.7 Corbels 88 .

CHAFfER 8 -MATERIAlS AND CONSTRUCTION 89

.
8.1 SCOPE 89
8.2 SPECIFICATION OF CONCRETE 89
8.2.1 Methods of SpecifyingConcrete 89
8.2.2 ConstituentMaterials of Concrete 89
8.2.2.1 Cement 89
8.2.2.2 Aggregates 89
8.2.2.3 Water 89
8.2.2.4 Admatures 91
8.2.3 Composition of the Concrete 91
8.2.4 Requirementsof Fresh Concrete '-..:;. 91
8.2.4.1 Workability 91
8.2.4.2 Temperature 91
' 8.2.5 Hot Weather Concretini 91
" ,{.;;I;
f -.;'" 2 5 1 at
8...nera I 91
~ 8.2.5.2 'Placing of Concrttt 91
I 8.2.5.3 Curing of Concrttt 92
I 8.2.6 Minimum CementContent 92
I 8.2.7 Maximum CementContent 92
8.3 SPECIFICATION OF REINFORCEMENT 93
I 8.3.1 Basic requirements 93
I
I
I "
I X" EBCS2. 7995
I
I

\
,
-8.4 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION RULES 93
8.4.1 General 93
.8.4.2 Handling and Storageof the Materials usedfor Making Concrete 93
8.4.2.1 Cement 93
8.4.3 Batching and Mixing 94
8.4.4 Transporting, Placing and Compacting 94
8.4.5 ConstructionJoints 94
8.4.6 Formwork 94
8.4.6.1 Basic Requirements 95
8.4.6.2 SurfaceFinish 95
8.4.6.3 TemporaryWork Inserts 96
8.4.6.4 Removal ofFormwork and Falsework 96
8.4.7 Curing 96
8.5 REINFORCING STEEL CONSTRUCTION RULES 97
8.5.1 Transport, Storageand Fabricationof the Reinforcement ~7
8.5.2 Surface Condition 97
8.5.3 Welding 97
8.5.4 Joints 97
8.5.5 Fabrication, Assemblyand Placing of the Steel 98
8.6 TOLERANCES 98
8.6.1 General 98
8.6.2 Toleranceswith regara-to Structural Safety 99
8.6.3 Tolerancesfor ConcreteCover 99
8.6.4 Tolerancesfor ConstructionPurposes 99

.CHAPTER 9 -QUALITY CONTROL 101

9.1 DEFINITIONS 101

.9.2 PRODUCTION CONTROL 101
9.2.1 Inspectionof Materials 101
9.2.2 InspectionPrior to Concreting 101
9.2.3 Control of Mixing, Transportationand Placementof Concrete 101
9.2.4 Control for Curing the Concrete 101
9.2.5 Information of ConstructionProcedures 102
9.3 COMPLIANCE CONTROLS 102
9.3.1 ComplianceControls for Concrete 102
9.3.1.1 Samplingand TestingMethods 102
9.3.1.2 Size of Lot and Frequencyof Sampling 102
9.3.1.3 ComplianceCriteria 103
9.3.2 ComplianceControls for the CompletedStructure 104
9.4 MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE 104
9.4.1 General 104
9.4.2 Sequenceof Measures 104
9.4.3 Check Testson Structural Concrete 104
9.4.3.1 General 104
9.4.3.2 1YpesofOleck Tests 105

EBCS 2 -1995 xiii

~

~
 -

9.4.4 Load Tests of Structure or Parts of Structures 105

9.4.4.1 General 105 ..
9.4.4.2 TestLoads 105 ,
9.4.4.3 MeasurementsDuring the Tests 105 i
9.4.4.4 Assessmentof Results 1<W>

APPENDIX A -ANALYSIS OF SLABS 107

,
A.1 SCOPE 107
A.2 ONE-WAY SLABS 107
'A.2.1 General .107
A.2.4 Distribution of ConcentratooLoads 107
A.3 TWO-WAY SLABS 107
A.3.1 General 107
A.3.2 Individual Panel Moments ! 108
A.3.3 Moments in ContinuousSlabs 110
A.3.3.1 General ': 110
A.3.3.2 Method I .: 110
A.3.3.3 Method11 112
A.3.4 Elastic Values of Support Moments 112
A.3.5 Loads on SupportingBeams 112
A.4 FLAT SLABS 115
A.4.1 Scope 115
A.4.2 Definitions 115
A.4.3 Analysis of Flat Slab Structures 115 .
A.4.3.1 General 115
A.4.3.2 EquivalentFrame Method 111
A.4.3.3 Simplified Method 11& .
A.4.3.4 Division of MomentsBetweenColwnn and Middle Strips 119
A.4.4 Design Considerations 119
A.4.4.1 General 119
A.4.4.2 Internal Panels 121
A.4.4.3 Edge Panels 121
A.4.4.4 Moment Transfer BetweenSlaband Colwnn 122
A.4.4.5 Panel with Marginal Beamsor Walls 124
A.4.4.6 NegativeMomentsat Free Edge 124
A.4.5 Opening in Panels ~;; 124
A.4.5.1 General ,' 124
A.4.5.2 Holes in Areas Boundedby Colwnn Strips 124
A.4.5.3 Holes in Areas Commonto Thlo Colwnn Strips 124
A.4.5.4 Holes in Areas Commonto a Colwnn Strip and a Middle Strip 124

APPENDIX B -PRFSf~ED CONCRErE 125

B.1 SCOPE 125

B.2 DATA ON PRESTRESSEDSTEEL AND PRESTRESSINGDEVICES 125.
B.2.1 PrestressingSteel 125
B.2.1.1 General 125
B.2.1.2 OasSijicatiOlland Geometry 125

xiv EBCS 2 -1995 ,

-

.B.2.1.3 Physical Properties 126

B.2.1.4 Mecp.anical Properties 126
B.2.1.4.1 Strength 126
B.2.1.4.2 Stress-Stram Diagram 126
B.2.1.4.3 Ductility C/'.aract£'ristics 126
B.2.1.4.4 Modulus of Elasticity 127
B.2.1.4.5 Fatigue 127
B.2.1.4.6 },-[ulti-Axial Stresses 127 ;\'it
B.2.1.5 Technological Frope.rtil!s 127 "s
B.2 .1. 5.1 Surface Conditi'-'l1 127
B.2.1.5.2 Relaxation 127
B.2.1.5.3 Susceptibilit)' to .5tressCorro,\'ion 127
B.2.2 Prestr~ssing Device.s 128
B.2.2.1 Anchorage.\' and CoIl;plers 128
B.2.2.1.1 Genl!rlll 128
B.2.2,1.2 Mec,ltanical Pr(>pertie.s 128
B.2.2.2 Ducts and Sheath.'i 129
B.2,2.2.1 General 129
B.3 BASIS OF DES!GN 129
B.3.! Partial S3fety Factors for Materials 129
B.3.2 Partial Safety Factors f()r .\ction on Building Structures 129
B.4 ANALYSIS 130
B.4.1 Prestressed 5130.5 130
-B.4.2. Anchorage Zcne-,sfor Post~Tel\SioningForces 130
B.4.3 Determination of the Ef~ect~ of P(e~tre.~sjng 130
B.4.3.1 General 130
.B.4.3.2 Dete;mil1atiol1 o.fPrrstre\'S'in,gforce 131
B.4.3.3 Effects of Prestre.'i.~ingunder Service Conl:itions 132
13.4.3.4 F.ffect,\'ofPr-:,.\'tre'ising ot the Ultimate Limit States 132
B.4.3.4.1 Structural Allal~sis -I..inear Methods 132
B.4.3.4.2 De.\"i~71 {)_f-Secli!).'1.~ 132
B.4.3.5 DetelminatitJ1! oflhe Effect.so.fTime Dependent Deformation of Concrete 13.3 t
B.4.3.5.1 General 133
B.5. SECTION AND MEMBER DESIGN 134' I
B.5.1 Prestressing Steel: General 134
B.5.2 Physical Properties of Pre.strE',ssingSteel 134 I
B.5.3 Mechanical Properties of Prestressing Steel 135
B.S.3.1 Strength 135 t
B.5.3.2
B.5.3.3 Modulus of Ela.\'ticity
..S'tress-Strain
Diagram 135
135 i'

B.5.3.4 Ductility 136

B.5.3.5 Fatigue 136
B.5.3.6 Multi-,ixial Stresses 136
B.5.3.7 Anchorage or Coupler Assemblies of Tendons 136
~ B.S.4 Technological Propertie... of Prestressing Steel 137
B.S.4.1 Relaxation 137
-B.5.4.2 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion 137
B.5.4.3 Temperature Depe71l1ent Behaviour 138

~ EBCS 2 ~ 1995 XV

~
 !I

.i
,

B.5.5 Design of Members in PrestressedConcrete 138

B.5.5.1 General 138 .
B.5.5.2 Minimum Strength Classfor PrestressedConcrete 138
B.5.5.3 Minimum Number of PrestressingUnits in Isolated StructuralElements 138
B.5.5.4 Initial PrestressingForce 139
B.5.5.5 Loss of Prestress 140
B.5.5.6 AnchorageZones of PretensionedMembers 142
, B.5.5.7 AnchorageZone.\'of Post-tensionedMembers 144
B.5.5.8 Designfor Shear 145
B.5.5.8.1 Memberswith Inclined Prestre\".\'ing
Tendons 145
.B.5.5.9 Limit State of Cracking 145
B.5.5.9.1 General 146
B.5.5.9.2 Minimum Rein:forcement Areas 146
B.5.9.9.3 Control of Cracking without Direct Calculation 146
B.6 DETAILING PROVISIONS 147
B.6.1 Arrangementof the PrestressingUnits 147
B.6.2 Concrete Cover 147
B.6.3 Horizontal and Vertical Spacing 147
B.6.3.1 Pre-tensioning 147
B.6.3.2 Post-tensioning 147
B.6.4 Anchoragesand Couplers for PrestressingTendons 147
B.6.5 AnchorageZones for Post-TensioningForces 148
B.7 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP 148
B.7.1 Objectives 148
B.7.2 Basic Requirements 149 .
B.7.3 Transport and Storageof the Tendons 149
B.7.4 Fabrication of Tendons 149
B. 7.5 Placing of Tendons 149 .
B.7.6 Tensioningof the Tendons 150
B. 7.6.1 Pre-tensioning 150
B.7.6.2 Post-tensioning 150
B.7.7 Grouting and other Protective Measures 151~
B.7.7.2 CementGrout 151
B. 7.7.3 Instructionsto the Site 152
B.7.7.4 Grouting Operations 152
B. 7.7.5 Sealing 152
B.7.7.6 Other Protections 153
B.8 QUALITY CONTROL ~ 153
B.8.1 Objectives 153
B.8.2 ComplianceControls 153
B.8.2 Control prior to Concreting and during Prestressing 153

xvi EBCS 2 -1995 1

.
-CHAPTER 1
-GENERAL ,;f!
\~"
~~
1.1 SCOPE j,

(1) This Code of Practice applies to the design of buildings and civil engineeringworks in plain,
reinforced and prestressedconcretemade with normal weight aggregates.

(2) The Code has beenpublished in two parts:

Part 1: Design, Materials and Construction

Part 2: Design Aids
(3) This Code is only concernedwith the requirementsfor resistance,serviceabilityand durability of .
concretestructures. Other requirements, such as those concerningthermal or sound insulation, are
not covered.

(4) Constructionis coveredto the extent that is necessaryto indicatethe quality of the construction
materials and products which should be used and the standardof workmanship on site neededto
comply with the assumptionsof the design rules. Construction and workmanship are covered in
Chapters8 and 9, and are to be consideredas minimum requirementswhich may haveto be further ;
developedfor particular types of buildings or civil engineeringworks and methodsof construction. I

.(5) This Code does not cover the special requirementsof seismicdesign. Provisionsrelatedto such t
requirements are given in EBCS 8 "Design of Structures for Earthquake Resistance" which F
complements,and is consistentwith, EBCS 2. r
.;

(6) Numerical values of the actionson buildings and civil engineeringworks to be takeninto account
in the designare not given in this Code. They are provided in EBCS 1 "Basis of Designand Actions
on Structures" applicableto the various typefi of construction.

(7) The design aids in Part 2 have beenprepared in accordancewith the assumptionslaid down in
Part 1, with the intention that they may be used as standarddesignaids and so avoid duplication of
efforts by individual designoffices. ,

(8) It has beenassumedin the drafting of this Code that the designof concretestructuresis entrusted
to registeredstructural or civil engineers, appropriately qualified, for whose guidance it has been
prepared and that the execution of the work is carried out under the direction of appropriately
qualified supervisors.

1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE WORKS

(1) Concreteworks are classifiedas either Class lor II dependingon the quality of workmanshipand
the competenceof the supervisorsdirecting the works.

(2) Works carried out under the direction of appropriately qualified supervisors ensuring the
attainmentof level of quality control envisagedin Chapter9 are classifiedas ClassI works.

EBCS2 -199'i 1
..

a
 .
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(3) Works with a lower level of quality control are classified as Class n works. -

(4) Class n works are permissible only for single story structures.

1.3 UNITS
,
The units used in this Code are those of the International System of units known as SI, and shall be
accordingto ISO 1000.

1.4 NOTAnONS

The symbols used in this Code are in accordance with ISO Standard 3898. The symbols used in this
Code are as follows:

Ac Area of concrete
Ac,'1 The section of the zone of the concretewhere the reinforcing bars can effectively influence the
crack widths
AcA Area of rectangular core of column measuredout-to-out of hoop I
Acl Area of concrete within tensile zone. The tensile zone 'is that part of the section which is
calculated to be in tension just before formation of the first crack
Ad Desiin value (specified value) of the accidental action
A, The cross-sectionalof the longitudinal rainforcement
AIj Enclosed area within a mean polygonal perimeter
A, Area of prestressingtendon or tendons .
A, Area of tension reinforcement
A", Area of compression reinforcement
A,.. Cross-sectionalarea of shear reinforcement .
A"cal Theoretical area of reinforcement required by the design
A',1j Area of reinforcement actually provided
A'l Area of transverse reinforcement per unit length perpendicular to the webflange interface
A'A Area of transverse hoop bar
A", The l<?ngitudinalsteel inside the slab, within the projection of the slab
Ay The area of shear reinforcement within a distance s
AI Lcaded area of the restricted zone under local contact pressure
A2 Distribution area of the local contact pressure

al Distance for displacing the moment diagram (Fig. 10-3)

ay Shear span
aI' ~ The side length of area AI and Az1 respectively

b Width of wall measuredcenter-to-center of bracing walls, or width measuredfrom the center

of a bracing wall to the free edge, or actual flange width in a T or L beam
b, The effective width of aT-beam
b.. Width of the web or rib of a member
bl
b2 Side
Slde length
lenith of
of the
the rectangle
rectanile of
of outline
outline u
u parallel to the to
perpendicular eccentricity
the eccentricity .

b.. Width of the web on T I I, or L beams

I

c Concrete cover

d The distance from extreme compression to centroid of tension rein-forcemtne

dlj The diameter of the lariest circle which can be inscribed within UIj ..

'7. ~R~-\" ~ -f aas

.
it .CHAPTER 1..GENERAL
:~':
~ .Ec Tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at a stress O'c= 0 and at 28 days
Ecd Design value of the secantmodulus of elasticity
Ed Short term elastic modulus of concrete ~
Ec(l) Tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at a stress of O'c= 0 and at time t
Ec. Secantmodulus of elasticity of concrete
E, Elastic modulus of reinforcement or prestressing steel
Ec(t,) Tangent modulus of elasticity at time tD
EcZ8 Tangent modulus of elasticity at 28 days

e Eccentricity
ea Additional ~entricity according to Eq 4.1
e. Equivalent constant first-order eccentricity of the design axial load
e.q Equivalent uniaxial eccentricity
e, Initial ~entricity
eD Equivalent uniform first order eccentricity
eol Smaller first order eccentricity
eoz Larger first order eccentricity
ez Second-order eccentricity (Section 4.4.10.3).
elDl Total eccentricity in the direction of the larger relative eccentricity

Fd Design load
F Ii Characteristic axial load of long duration causing creep
F I +q,i Characteristic total axial load
Fi Characteristic load
Fp. Ultimate tendon force
F,., Service value
Frequent values
F, Tensile force developed by anchorage

Ibd Design bond strength

/c Compressive strength of concrete
/cd Design compreseivestrength of concrete
/c* Characteristic compressive stren~h of concrete
/c. Mean value of concretecompressive streneth
/cr..! Tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may first be expectedto
occur
!rid Desiin tensile streneth of concrete
/clt Characteristic tensile streneth of concrete
/c... Mean value of axial tensile streneth of concrete
Id Desiin strenith
it Characteristic strenith
/p Tensile strenith of prestressin¥steel ~c'
lpi Charactersistic tensile strenerh of prestressini steel ,,'
lpO,1 0.1 % proof-stress of prestressing steel
lpO,l* Charactersistic0.1 % proof-stress of prestressing steel
../, Tensile strenitb of reinforcement

lit Characteristic tensile str~nith of reinforcement

., /y Yield strenith of reinforcement
1)Id' Desiin yield strenith of reinforcement
: I~ Characteristic yield strenith of reiforcement
I Iywd Desiin yield strenitb of stirrups
~ !o.z Yield 8trenith of reinforcement at 0.2% offsct ".

EBCS 2 -1995 3
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .

GbId Indirect action

Gt Characteristic permanentload ~,
Gt,;"! Lower characteristic value of the permanentaction 1
Gt,Iop Upper characteristic value of the permanentaction
GtJ Characteristic value of permanentactions
G, Permanentstabilizing action
G2 Permanentnon-stabilizing action
,
gd is the uniformly distributed design permanentload

h Overall depth of section in the plane of bending. Cross-sectional dimension in the direction
of buckling
he! Thickness of equivalent hollow section
h! Thickness of flange
hI Height of supported beam
h2 Height of girder

Ico II Moments of inertia of the concrete and reinforcement sections, respectively, of the substitute
column, with respect to the centroid of the concrete section
I, Sec6nd moment area of the uncracked transformed concrete section

i Radius of gyration
ip Dispertion length

J (1,10) Creep function at time t .

Kc Flexural stiffness of column

Keq Flexural stiffness of equivalent column ~
Kif Effective beam stiffness coefficient (EIIL)
K, Total lateral stiffness of the columns of the story (story rigidity), with modulus of elasticity
taken as unity

k Relative eccentricity ratio

Unintentional angular displacement (per unit length) related to the profile of the tendons
kc Coefficient which takes account of the nature of the stress distribution within the section
immediately prior to cracking
k, ,~ Margin of strength

L Clear span or clear height of a member

Le Effective buckling length
Lc Distance betweenpoints of zero moments
Lx Length of the shorter sid~ of a panel
4 Length of the longer side of a panel

I Nominal dimension
10 Anchorage length
Ib Basic anchorage length .

Ib""u. Minimum anchorage length

Ib"", Required anchorage length
I" Length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined, measuredface-to-face of
supports
10 Let'lgth of lap of bars ~

4 EBCS 2 -1995 .
 "':

CHAPTER 7: GENERAL

I.,miIt Minimum lap length

Ip Transmission length
I, Distance between points of zero shear
II Length of span in direction that momentsare being determined, measured center-tocenter of
supports
lz Length of span transverse to It, measuredcenter-to-center of supports

Mbal Balanced moment capacity of the column.

Mcr Theoretical cracking moment
Md Design moment at the critical section including second-order effects
Mt Maximum applied moment at mid-span due to sustainedcharacteristic loads
Mo Total factored static moment ;'
M'd Design value of the applied internal bending moment
M. Ultimate moment
M1 Smaller first order moment due to design load
M2 Larger first order moment due to design load

mJ Span moment in two-way slab

~ Moment per unit width at the point of reference
.mzJ Span moment in the shorter direction of a panel
~J Span moment in the longer direction "'1 a panel

Ncr Critical value for failure in a sway mode

Nd Design axial load
-Ndt Maximum design axial load acting on a column or wall during an eal1hquake
NId Transverse tensile force
NSd Design axial force (tension or compression)
-NM Ultimate axial load
NMb Axial load capacity of simultaneousassumedstrain of concrete and yielding of tension steel

n Number of bars in a bundle

Modular ratio, E,/Eclft

~p c Loss due to elastic deformation of the member at transfer

Pd Design value of prestress at ultimate limit state
~P1r Short-term relaxation loss
Pt,'IIp' Pt,~Jare respectively the upper and lower characteristic values
P1ft Prestress after occurrence of all losses
P1ft
,0 Initial prestress at time 1 = 0
P1ft,I Mean value of the prestressing at time 1 and at a particular point along the member
Po Initial force at the active end of the tendon immediately after stressing
~P'I Loss due to anchorage slip
~P,(l) Loss due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at time 1
~P ,.(x) Loss due to friction
, ,
Qt Characteristic imposed loads
Qt, I Characteristic values of one of the variable actions
Qt,I Characteristic value of the other variable actions
Q, Variable non-stabilizing action

qd Uniformly distributed design live load

.R, Coefficient given in Table A-2

EBCS 2 -7995 5
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .

S~ Design situation for combination of action for ultimate limit statesfor persistentand transient .
design situation
s Shear reinforcement spacing in the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement
s~ Spacing of horizontal stirrups
s- Maximum spacing between stirrups
s. .Standard deviation of the set of sampl,eresults
s,. Average distance between cracks
sr Spacing of vertical stirrups

Tc Torque caried by the concrete

T,/ Torsional resistance of the reinforcement
Tu Torsional resistance of a section
TId Design torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement

t Time
to Time at initial loading of the concrete

" Periphery of critical section

"'f Mean polygonal perimeter

Vc Shear carried by the concrete

V cd Shear resistance of the concrete
V cw Additional shear force of a member subjected to axial force
V~ Shear resistance of horizontal stirrups
Vu Shear resistance of a section -
VUI Shear resistance to inclined compression
V K4l Shear resistance to diagonal tension
V, Shear resistance of vertical stirrups .
V.fd Shear acting along the periphery" of the critical section

v Punching shear
vl4 Longitudinal unit shear
Punching unit shear
v14.- Maximum punching unit shear

Wi Characteristic crack. width

w. Mean crack. width
WI Limining value of crack. width
Wz Limiting value of crack.width

.% Neutral axis depth

.%I,.%z~ Strength of lot

Z Section Modulus

z Internal lever arm

a Coefficient for biaxial bending of columns (Table 5-1)

Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterally by center lines of adjacentpanels (if any) on each side of a beam
ac Ratio of flexural stiffness of columns abOveand below the slab to combined flexural stiffness
of the slabs and beams at a joint taken in the direction of the spanfor which momentsare being
determined

~ &.,.~~ -.,GG£~:
 .CHAPTER 1: GENERAL

acl Ratio of the sum of the column stiffnessesto the sum of the beam~tiffnessesat one end of the
-column
ac2 Ratio of the sum of the column stiffnessesto the sum of the beam stiffnesses at the other end
of the column
acmlll The minimum of acl and ac2

atc Ratio of flexural stiffness of equivalent column to combined flexural stiffness of the slabs and
beams at a joint taken in the direction of the span for which momentsare being determined ,
al Coefficient given in Table A-1 as function of aspectratio Ly11.% and support conditions
amlll , Minimum ac
al a in the direction of 11
a2 a in the direction of 12

{3 Shear coefficient given by Eq.6-13

Deflection coefficient depending on the loading condition
Ratio of long side to short sipe of footing
{3a Coefficient for effective depth given in Table 8-1
Ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit area (in eachcase without load factors)
{3a Factor for transmission length of prestressingstrand
{3, Reduction factor for torsion due to combined action effects
{3v Reduction factor for shear due to combined action effects

'Yc Partial safety factor for concrete

'Y! Partial safety factor for loads
Fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column connection
'Ym Partial safety factor for materials
'Yp Partial safety factor for prestress
'Y. Partial safety factor for steel
'YF' 'YG' 'Y12''YA and 'Yp Partial safety factors for the action cnn...irlpredtaking account of, for example, k
the possibility of unfavorable deviation of the actions
'YG,III! Lower value of the partial safety factor for the permanentaction
'YG,sup Upper value of the partial safety factor for th~ permanentaction
'YGJ Partial safety factor for permanent action j
'YGA. i as 'YG.i' but for accidental design situations

~Gp.c+.+rVariation of stress in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at location x, at time
l
Gpgo Initial stress in the tendons due to prestressand permanentactions
~Gpr Variation of stress in the tendons at section x due to relaxation
E.(l, l,J Estimated shrinkage strain, derived from the values in Table 2.7 for final shrinkage
ltI(l, l.J Creep coefficient, as defined in Section 2.5.4

0 Reduction coefficient for redistribution of moments

0, Deflection due to the theoretical cracking moment Mcr acting on the uncracked transformed
section
01/ Deflection due to the balance of the applied moment over and above the cracking value and
,.,t acting on a section with an equivalent stiffness of 75% of the cracked value.
:~ OmIU Deflection of fully cracked section

01/llU Deflection of fully cracked section

EBCS 2 -7995 7
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

Ec Strain in concrete fiber

E. Strain of reinforcement
E"" Mean strain of reinforcement considering the contribution of concrete in tension
EI The larger concrete strain below the neutral axis of the cracked section
E2 The smaller concrete strain below the neutral axis of the cracked section
Ec.~' Final shirinkage strain
Eyt Characteristic value of the elongation at maximum load

e Sum of the angular displacementsover a distance x (irrespective of direction or sign)

K", Correction coefficient to take account of the effect of the slope of stirrups on the spacing of
cracks
K( Coefficient which characterisesthe bond properties of bars
K2 Coefficient representing the influence of the form of the strees diagram

>.. Slendernessof a column

Coefficient for standard deviation of the set of sample results ,1
IJ. Coefficient of friction betweenthe tendons and their ducts ]

JI Relative design axial load

.
p Geometrical ratio of reinforcement
p. Effective geometrical ratio of reinforcement
Pu Geometrical ratio of reinforcement in the x direction
Pey Geometrical ratio of reinforcement in the y direction -
Pmax Maximum geometrical ratio of reinforcement
PmiJI Minimum geometrical ratio of reinforcement
P'" Geometrical ratio of web reinforcement -
P""miJI Minimum geometrical ratio of web reinforcement

(Jcpo Initial stress in the concrete adjacentto the tendons, due to prestress
(JC8 Stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and any other permanent
actions
(JCI Maximum tensile stress in the concrete appropriate to a serviceability limit state
(Jo,max Maximum stress applied to the tendon
(Jpmo Stress in the tendon immediately after tensioning or transfer
(J. Maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after formation of the c~ck
(J., Steel stress at rupture of concrete section

tP Diameter of reinforcement bar

tP(I"O) Creep coefficient
4»(.".,) Final creepcoefficient
tPb Diameter of bars forming the bundle
tP. Effective diameter of the bundle
tP(I",,) Creep coefficient related to the elastic deformation at 28 days
(U Mechanical reinforcement ratio
.
~oFk Combination values
~2Fk Quasi-permanentvalues
~o Combination value
~I Frequent value
~2 Quasi-permanentvalue
~O'~I'~2 Partial safety factors defined in Section 3.4.4 (3). -

;1;' n
.

.CHAPTER 2 ~~
DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL ~~
~
"
,.,":Ii

;;;'
jJ'"
2.1 GENERAL ~;
i
~,
F~
(1) The strength and other. datafor the concreteare defined on the basis
..-;, of standardtesta. t~,

2;2 GRAD~ OF CONCRETE

(1) Concreteis gradedin terms of its characteristiccompressivecubestrength. The gradeof concrete
to be used in designdependson the cl~sification of the concretework and the intendeduse. ;~I
...
.r
(2) Table 2.1 gives the permissiblegradesof concretefor the two classesof concreteworks.
g

(3) The numbersin the grade designationdenotethe specifiedcharacteristiccompressivestrength in

MPa. ,
,;
.;
Table 2.1 Grades of Concrete ~
~
.Class PermissibleGradesof Concrete t
I C5 C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 CSO C6O t
ri
-n C5 C15 C20 W '"
c
,
,
Grade C5 shall be used only as lean concrete i
t
t

2.3 CHARACTERISTIC COMPRF$SIVE STRENGm OF CONCRETE

(1) For the purpose of this Code, compressivestrength of concreteis determinedfrom testson 150
mm cubes at the age of 28 days in accordancewith Ethiopian Standards.

(2) The characteristiccompressivestrengthis defined as that strengthbelow which 5% of all possible

strength measurementsmay be expected to fall. In practice, the concrete may be regarded as
complyingwith the gradespecifiedfor the designif the resultsof the testscomply with the acceptance
criteria laid down in Chapter9.
(3) Cylindrical or cubical specimensof other sizes may also be used with conversion factors
determinedfrom a comprehensiveseries of tests. In the absenceof suchtests,the conversionfactors
given in Table 2.2 may be appliedto obtainthe equivalentcharacteristicstrengthon the basis of 150

mm cubes.
(4) In Table 2.3 the characteristiccylinder compressivestrength!.! are given for the different grades

of concrete.

EBCS 2 -1995 9
~
"

~
ETHIOPIAN DUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL ,..~.~
USE OF CONCRETE .
Table 2.2 Conversion Factors for Strength
Size and Type of Test Specimen 'CbnversionFactor ~

Cube (200 mm) 1.05

Cylinder (150 mm diameter300 mm height) 1.25

\

Table 2.3 Grades of Concrete and Characteristic Cylinder Compressive Strength I.k
Gradesof
Concrete C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60
1.1 12 16 20 24 32 40 48

2.4 CHARACTERISTIC TENSILE STRENGnI ~~

.c' c"
(1) In this Code, the char.acteristictensile strengthrefers to the axial tensile stren~ as determined :i~
;~:
by tests ip accordancewith standardsissuedor approvedby Ethiopian Standards. ;~

(2) In the absenceof more accuratedata, the characteristictensile strength may also be determined
from the characteristiccylinder compressivestrength accordingto Eq. 2.1.

I.It = 0.7icbn (2.1) ~

wherehbnis the meanvalue given by Eq. 2.2.

icbn= 0.3ick2/3 (2.2)

(3) The correspondingvaluesoficlt andhbnfor the different gradesof concreteare given in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 Grades of Concrete and Values of I./Aand I./m

Gradesof
Concrete C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60

icbn 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

hit 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.5 2.8

2.5 DEFORMATION PROPERTI~ OF CONCRETE

(1) The values of the material properties required for the calculation of i~tantaneous and time
dependentdeformationsof concretedependnot only upon the gradesof concrete but also upon the -
propertiesof the aggregatesand other parametersrelatedto the mix designand the environment.For
this reason,wherean accuratecalculationis considerednecessary,the valuesshallbe establishedfromI
known data appropriate to the particular materials and conditions of use. For many calculations an
approximate estimate will usually be sufficient.II

-1

10 EBCS 2 -1995
1 ~
 .CHAPTER 2: DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL

2.5.1 Stress-Strain Diagrams

(1) Any idealized stress-strain diagram which results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with the results of comprehensive tests may be used (see Section 4.4)

2.5.2 Modulus of Elasticity

(1) The modulus of elasticity depends not only on the concrete grade but also on the actual properties
of the aggregates used (see Section 2.5(1) above).
~
(2) In the absenceof more accurate data, or in caseswhere great accuracy is not required, an estimate '.i
of the mean value of the secant modulus Ecmcan be obtained from Table 2.5 for a given concrete
grade. 'I
I

Table 2.5 Values of the Secant Modulus of Elasticity Ec,,"in GPa

Grades of
Concrete CIS C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60

Ecm 26 27 29 32 35 37 39

(3) The values in Table 2.5 are based on the following equation:

.-Ecm = 9.5 ifck + 8)1/3 (2.3)

Where Ecmis in GPa andfck is in MPa. They relate to concrete cured under normal conditions'and
-made with aggregates predominantly consisting of quartzite gravel. When deflections are of great
importance, tests shall be carried out on concrete made with the aggregate to be used in the
structure. In other casesexperience with a particular aggregate, backed by general test data, will
often provide a reliable value for Ecm' but with unknown aggregates, it would be advisable to
consider a range of values.

(4) As a rule, since the grade of concrete corresponds to a strength at an age of 28 days, the values
of Ecmin Table 2.5 also relate to that same age. Where great accuracy is not required, Ecmcan also
be determined from Eq.2.3 for a concrete age t other than 28 days. In this case,tk is replaced by the
actual cylinder concrete strength at time t.

2.5.3 Poisson's Ratio

(1) Any value between 0 and 0.2 can be adopted for Poisson's ratio.

2.5.4 Creep and Shrinkage

(1) Creep and shrinkage of the concrete depend mainly on the ambient humidity, the dimensions of
the element and the composition of the concrete, Creep is also influenced by the maturity of the
concrete when the load is first applied and on the duration and magnitude of the loading. Any
estimation of the creep coefficient ct>(I./OJ'
and of the basic shrinkage strain, fcs' shall take these
parameters into account.

.EBCS 2 -1995 11.

 ~ --1
-"c""
.
,...

II
.
(2) In caseswhere great accuracyis not required, the values given in Tables2.6 and 2.7 respectively
can be consideredas the final creep coefficient cp(~.",)
and the final shrinkagestrain Ec.rof a normal ~
weight concretesubjectedto a compressivestressnot exceeding0.45tk at the time to at fIrst loading.

(3) The data given in Tables2.6 and 2.7 apply for a range of the meantemperatureof the concrete
between10 °C and 20 °C. Maximum seasonaltemperatureup to 40 °C can be accepted.In the same
way, variations in relative humidity aroundthe meanvaluesgiven in Tables2.6 and 2.7 betweenRH
=,20% and RH = 100%are acceptable.

(4) Linear interpolationbetweenthe values in Tables2.6 and 2.7 is permitted.

Table 2.6 Final Creep Coefficient ~(""') of Normal Weight Concrete

Notional size 2Aju (in mm)

Age at
Loading 50 150 600 50 150 600
t
(da;s) Dry atmospheric Humid atmospheric
conditions (inside) conditions (outside)
(RH = 50%) (RH = 80%)
1 5.5 4.6 3.7 3.6 3.2 2.9
7 3.9 3.1 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.0
28 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.9 1.7 1.5
90 2.4 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.2
365 1.8 1.5 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0 -

Table 2.7 Final Shrinkage Strains fcl~ (in 0/00)of Normal Weight Concrete

Location of Relative humidity Notional size 2Aju (mm)

the number (%) ~ 150 600
Inside 50 -0.60 -0.50
Outside 80 -0.33 -0.28
where: Ac = cross-sectionalareaor concrete
u = perimeterof that area

(5) The values of Tables 2.6 and 2.7 apply to concretehaving plastic consistencywhen fresh. For
concreteof other consistencythe valueshaveto be multiplied by 0.70 (stiff consistency)or 1.20 (soft
consistency)

(6) For concretewith superplasticizers,the consistencybeforeaddingthe superplasticizersis usedfor

the evaluationof the creepand shrinkagecoefficientsas given in Tables 2.6 and 2.7. .

2.5.5 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

(1) The coefficient of thermal expansionmay be taken as 10'x 10-6per OC.

12 EBCS 2 -1995 .
"'f!
.
i:,'

~ CHAPTER
2: DATAON CONCRETE
AND STEEL

2.6 CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH OF REINFORCING STEEL

~ (1) The mechanical and technological properties of steel used for reinforced concrete shall be defined
by standard and/or agr~ment documents or by certificates of compliance.

(2) The characteristic strength fyt is defined as the 5% fractile of the proof stress /y or 0.2 % offset
strength, denoted as/0.2

(3) If the steel supplier guarantees a minimum value for f, or /0.2' that value may be taken as the
characteristic strength.

2.7 CLASSIFICATION AND GEOMETRY OF REINFORCING STEEL

(1) Reinforcing steel shall be classified according to:

(a) Grade, denoting the value of the specified characteristic yield stress <l;J in MPa.
(b) Class, indicating the ductility characteristics
(c) Size
(d) Surface characteristics
(e) Weldability

(2) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a certificate containing all the information necessary
for its identification with regard to (a) to (e) above, and additional information where necessary.

(3) The actual cross sectional area of the products shall not differ from their nominal cross sectional
area by more than the limits specified in relevant Standards.

-(4) In this Code, two classes of ductility are defined (see Section 2.9.2):
(a) high (Class A)
(b) normal (Class B)

(5) In this Code two shapes of surface characteristics are defined:

(a) Ribbed bars, resulting in high bond action
(b) Plain, smooth bars, resulting in low bond action.

(6) For other types of bar, with other surface characteristics (ribs or indentations), reference should
be made to relevant documents, based on test data.

(7) Welded fabric, used as reinforcing steel, shall comply with the dimensional requirements in
relevant Standards.

2.8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF REINFORCING STEEL

(1) The following mean values may be assumed:

(a) Density 7 850 kg/m3

(b) Coefficient of thermal expansion 10 x 10-6per DC

EBCS2 -1995 13
ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARDFORSTRUCTURALUSE OF CONCRETE .

2.9 MECHANICAL PROPERTI~ OF REINFORCING&TEEL

2.9.1 Strel1lth
(1) The yield stress!,. and the tensile strength!. are defined respectivelyu the charactetiltlc value
of the yield load, and the characteristicmaximum load in direct axial tension, each divided by the
l1ominal cross sectionalarea.

(2) For products without a pronouncedyield stress!,. ,the 0.2% proof stressfo.~may be substituted.

2.9..2 Ductility

(1) The products shall have adequateductility in elongation,as specified in relevantStandards.

(2) Adequateductility in elongationmaybe assumed,for designpurposes,if the productssatisfy the

following ductility requirements:

(a) High ductility: E. > S% ; value of (J;/1,). > 1.08

(b) Nonnal ductility: E. > 2.S%; value of (J;/1,). > 1.0S

In whicHE. denotesthe characteristicvalue of the elongationat maximum load.

(3) High bond bars with diameterslessthan 6 mm shall not be treatedas having high ductility.

(4) The products shall have adequatebendabilityfor the anticipateduse.

2.9.3 Str~s-Strain Diagram -

(1) In the absenceof more accurateinfonnation, an elasto-plasticdiagram can be usedfor hot rolled
steelor steelcold worked by drawing pr rolling.

(2) For other types of production, the actual stress-straindiagrams can be replaced by bil inear,
trilinear or other diagramschosenso that the approximationsare on the safe side.

2.9.4 Modulus of Elasticity

(1) The meanvalue of modulus of elasticity E, may be assumedas 200 GPa. !

2.9.5 Fatigue

(1) Where required, the productsshall have adequatefatigue strength.

2.10 TECHNOLOGICAL PROPERTI~

2.10.1 Bond and Anchorage

(1) The surface characteristicsof ribbed bars shall be such that adequatebond is obtained with the
concrete,permitting the full force that is assumedin design,to be developedin the reinforcement. -

(2) Ribbed bars, having projected ribs not satisfyingthe requirementsfor high bond bars given in
reievantstandardsshall be treatedas plain bars with respectto bond. .
14 EBCS.2. 1995 .
 CHAPTER 2: DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL

(3) The behavior in bond of reinforcing steels with other surface shapes shall be defined in relevant
Standards or technical approved documents.

(4) The strength of the welded joints along the anchorage length of welded fabric shall be adequate.

(5) The strength of the welded joint can withstand a shearing force not less than 30% of a force
equivalent to the specified characteristic yield stress times the nominal cross sectional area of the
anchored wire.

2.10.2 Weldability

(1) The products shall have weldability properties adequate for the anticipated use

(2) Where required, and where the weldability is unknown, tests should be requested.

(3) Ductility characteristics; as specified in Section 2.9.2, shall be maintained, when necessary, at
sections near to weld.

..

EBCS2 .7995 15
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

.
!
, j
;

,
I
i\~

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK] -

..

16 EBCS 2 -1995
 ..
.CHAPTER 3
-BASIS OF DESIGN
3.1 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

(1) A structure shall be designedand constructedin sucha way that:

(a) With acceptableprobability, it will remain fit for the use for which it is required, havingdue
regard to its intendedlife, and
(b) with appropriatedegreesof reliability, it will sustainall actionsand influenceslikely to occur
during normal executionand use and have adequatedurability.

(2) A structure shall also be designed in such a way that it will not be damagedby eventslike
explosions, impact or consequencesof human errors, to an extent disproportionateto the origin,\!
cause.
,
(3) The potential damagedue to the eventsin (2) aboveshallbe minimized or avoidedby appropriate
choice of one or more of the following:

(a) Avoiding, eliminating or reducing the hazardswhich the structureis to sustain.

(b) Selectinga structural form which has low sensitivityto the hazardsconsidered.
(c) Selectinga structural form and designthat can survive adequatelythe accidentalremoval of
an individual element.
(d) Tying the structure together.

(4) The above requirementsshall be met by the choice of suitable materials, by appropriatedesign
and detailing and by compliance with control procedures for production, construction and use
.envisaged in this Code.

r 3.2 LIMIT srA~

3.2.1 General

(1) A structure, or part of a structure, is consideredunfit for use when it exceedsa particular state,
called a limit state, beyond which it infringes one of the criteria governing its performanceor use.

(2) All relevant limit statesshall be consideredin the designso as to ensurean adequatedegreeof
safety and serviceability. The usual approachwill be to designon the basisof the most critical limit
state and then to check that the remaining limit stateswill not be reached.

(3) The limit statescan be placed in two categories:

(a) The Ultimate Limit Statesarethoseassociatedwith collapse,or with other forms of structural
failure which may endangerthe safety of people. Statesprior to structural collapsewhich,
for simplicity. are consideredin place of the collapseitself are also treatedas ultimate limit
.states.
(b) The Serviceability Limit States correspond to states beyond which specified service
requirementsare no longer met.

..EBCS 2 -1995 17
 !

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE -

3.2.2 Ultimate Limit Stat~

(1) The ultimate limit stateswhich may require considerationinclude:

(a) Loss of equilibrium of a part or ~e whole of the structureconsideredas a ri&id body"

(b) Failure by excessivedeformation, rupture or loss of stability of the structureor my part of
, it, including supportsand foundations.

3.2.3 Serviceability Umit State

(1) Serviceabilitylimit stateswhich may require co~ideration include;

(a) Deformationsor deflections which affect the appearanceor effective use of the structure
(includingthe malfunction of machinesor services)or causedamageto finishes of non-struc-
tural elements.
(b) Vibration which causesdiscomfort to people,damageto the building or its contents,or which
limits its functional effectiveness.
(0) Cracking of the concretewhich is likely to affect appearance,durability or water tightness
adversely.

3.3 D~IGN SITUAnONS

(1) Design situationsare classified as:

(a) Persistentsituationscorrespondingto normal conditionsof use of the structure. -

(b) Transientsituations, suchas those, for exampleduring constructionor repair.
(c) Accidentalsituations. .

3.4 ACnONS

3.4.1 Definitions and Principal Classification

(1) An actionF is:

(a) A force (load) appliedto the structure (direct action), or

(b) an imposeddeformation (indirect action); for example,temperatureeffectsor settlement.

(2) Actions are classified:

(a) By their variation in time:

(i) Permanentactions (G), e.g. self-weight of structures, fittings ancillaries and fIXed
equipment.
(ii) Variable actions (Q), e.g. imposedloadsor wind loads.
(iii) Accidental actions (A), e.g. explosionsor impact from vehicles.
(b) By their spatialvariation: .
(i) Fixed actions,e.g. self-weight.
(ii) Free actions, which result in different arrangementsof actions, e.g. movableimposed -
loads and wind loads.

(3) Prestressing(F) is a permanentactionbut, for practical reasons,it is treateds~parately. .:

18 EBCS 2 -1995 -
 I.,:
-.' CHAPTER 3:
- BASIS OF DESION

C4).Indirect actions are either permanent Ow (e.g. settlementof support) or variable~ (e.g.
.temperature) and are treatedaccordingly.

(S) Supplementaryclassificationsrelating to the responseof the structure are given in the relevant
,sectionsCJfthis Code.

3.4.2 ~epr~entative Values of Actions

(1) For verification in the partial safetyfactor method, actio~ are introducedinto the calculationsby
representativevalues, i.e. by values correspondingto certain levels of intensity. For different
calculations,one may have to distinguishdifferent representativevalues of an action accordingto its
variation in time. The comp~eteset of representativevalues is as follows:

(a) Characteristicvalues, Fk
(b) Combinationvalues, ~oFk
(c) Frequentvalues, ~IFk
(d) Quasi-permanentvalues, ~.}f k

The abovevalues are evaluatedmainly o~ a statisticalbasis.

(2) l+.:'!uimumvalues and minimum values, whi-:h may be zero, are defined when appropriate.

(3) Dependingon the variation with time of certainactions, their representativevaluesare sometimes
subclassifiedas actions of long duration (or sustained actions) or of short duration (or transient
actionS).In special cases,certain actionshave their representativevaluesdivided into sustainedand
transientcomponents.

.3.4.3 Representative Values of Permanent Actions

(1) The representativevalues of permanentactionsare specifiedas:

(a) The characteristic values Fk specified in EBCS1 -"Basis of Design and Actions on
Structures", or
(b) by the client, or the designer in consultation with the client, provided that minimum
provisions, specified in the relevantcodesor by the competentauthority, are observed.

(2) The other representativevaluesare assumedto be equal to those in Section3.4.2(1).

(3) For permanentactions where the coefficient of variation is large or where the actions are likely
to vary during the life of the structure (e.g. for some superimposedpermanent loads), two
characteristicvalues are distinguished,an upper (Ok ) and a lower (Ok.11'/).Elsewhere, a single
characteristicvalue (GJ is sufficient.

(4) The self-weight of the structure may, in most cases,be calculatedon the basis of the nominal
I dimensionsand mean unit masses.

EBCS2 -1995 19
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

3.4.4 Representative Values or Variable Actions

(1) The main representative value is the characteristic value Q..

(2) For variable actions, the characteristic value (QJ corresponds to either:

(a) The upper value with an intended probability of not being exceeded or the lower value with
an intended probability of not being reached, during some reference period, having regard
~ to the intended life of the structure or the assumed duration of the design situation, or
(b) the specified value.

(3) Other representative values are expressed in terms of the characteristic value Q. by means of a
factor 1/1/.These values are defined as:

(a) Combination value: 1/10

Q.
(b) Frequent value: 1/11
Q.
(c) Quasi-permanent value: 1/12
Q.

(4) Supplementary representative values are used for fatigue verification and dynamic analysis.

~ (5) The factors 1/Iiare specified:

1 (a) in EBCS1 -"Basis of Design and Actions on Structures", or

t (b) by the client or the designer in conjunction with the client, provided that minimum
1 provisions, specified in the relevant codes or by the competent public authority, are observed. .

~ 3.4.5 Representative Values or Accidental Actions

~
~ (1) The representative value of accidental actions is the characteristic value A. (when relevant) and .

~~): generally correspond to a specified unique nominal value beyond which there is. no longer an
.
~~': assurance of a probability of survival of the structure.

(2) Their service, combination and frequent values are considered negligible or zero.

I 3.4.6 Design Values of Actions

,
I (1) The design value F d of an action is expressed in general terms as
I
I Fd = "fFF. (3.1)
I Specific examples are:
I Gd = "fGG.
~f,.;",' , Qd = "fa Q. or "fa 1/1/
Q.
;.,;, Ad = "fAA. (if Ad is not directly specified) (3.2)
Pd = "fp P.

where "fF' "fG, "fa' "fA and "fp are the partial safety factors for the action considered taking
account of, for exaIr!ple, the possibility of unfavorable deviations of the actions, the .
possibility of inaccurate modelling of the actions, uncertainties in the assessmentof effects
of actions, and uncertainties in the assessmentof the limit state considered. -

20 EBCS 2 -7995

-
 ---c, , -"~'" "';""'-",',

..
CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN
.t
(2) The upper and lower designvaluesof permanentactionsare expressedasfollows: ..f
~ (a) Where only a single characteristicvalue Gkis used, then i

G" = "Ya Gk
G".ir(= "Ya..;-Gk

(b) Where upper and lower characteristicvalues of permanentactionsare used, then

G"
G".ir( == "Ya.ir(
"Ya Gk,ir(
Gk

where Gk,ir( is the lower characteristicvalue of the permanentaction

Gk, is the upper characteristicvalue of the permanentaction
"Y
a. ir( is the lower value of the partial safety factor for the permanentaction
"Y
a. is the uppervalue of the partial safety factor for the permanentaction

3.4. 7 ~ign valu~ of the Effects of Actions

(1) The effects of actionsare responses(e.g. internal forces and moments,stresses,strains) of the
structure to the actions. Designvalues of the effectsof actionsare determinedfrom the designvalues
of the actions, geometricaldata and material properties when relevant.

(2) In some cases,in particular for nonlinear analysis,the effect of the randomnessof the inten,sity
of the actionsand the uncertaintyassociatedwith the analytical procedures,e.g. the modelsused i~
the calculations, shall be consideredseparately. This may be achieved by the application of a
coefficient of model uncertainty, either appliedto the actionsor to the internal forces and moments.

3.5 MATERlAI..S

3.5.1 Characteristic Strength

(1) A material property is representedby a characteristicvalue which in general correspondsto a

fractile in the assumedstatistical distribution of the particular property of the material, specified by
relevantstandardsand testedunder specified conditions.

(2) In certain cases,a nominal value is used as the characteristicvalue.

(3) The characteristicstrengthof concreteand steel is defined in Sections2.3 and 2.6, respectively,

3.5.2 Design Strength

i (1) The design strength for a given material property and limit state is obtained, in principle, by
j divi~ing the characteristicstrengthh by the appropriatepartial safetyfactor for the material property
I "Y~, I.e.,
'.
j J;
:; 1:" .-.!:-"Y.. (3.3)

t (2) However, in the caseof concreteunder compression,a further correctionfactor is introducedin

this Code for convenience(seeEq. 3.4).
.
. EBCS 2 -7995 21
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
..
3.5.3 Partial Safety Factors for Materials
3.5.3.1 Ultimate Umit State A

(1) Partial safetyfactor for materialsappropri~teto various designsituations,ordinary and accidental,

are given in Tables 3.1 and 3.2 for the two classesof concrete works, Class I and Class II,
re~pectively.
\

Table 3.1 Partial Safety Factor for Materials -CI3SS I Wor~

Design Situations Concrete, "t'o Reinforcing Steel, 'YI
Persistentand Transient 1.50 1.15

Accidental 1.30 1.00

Table 3.2 Partial Safety Factor for Materials -Class II Wor~

Design Situations Concrete, 'Yo Reinforcing Steel, 'YI

Persistentand Transient 1.65 1.20

Accidental 1.45 1.10

3.5.3.2 ServiceabilityUmit States .

(1) The value of 'YIftin the serviceability limit statesmaybe takenas 1.0 for both steel and concrete. .

3.5.4 Design Strength for Concrete

(1) The designstrengthof concreteis defined by:

(a) In compression
Iod = 0.85101
--:;:- (3.4)

(b) In tension
f old = f.tk
-;:y-: (3.5)

3.5.5 Design Strength for Steel

(1) The designstrengthof steel in tensionand compressionis defined by:

f .
fyd = { (3.6)

22 EBCS 2 -1995
 ,
CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN
~

3.6 COMBINATION OF ACTIONS

.~ 3.6:1 Ultimate Limit States

(1) The combination of actions for the ultimate limit states for persIstent and transient design situation
~hall be in accordance with Eq, 3,7:

Sd =S{ E'YG,jGt,j+ 'YQ,lQt,1 + L 'YQ,/If'O,/Qt'i} (3.7)

/ >1

I (2) The combination for accidental design situation shall be

.1 Sd = { E'YG4,j+ Ad + If'J,lQt,1 + L 1f'2,JQt,1} (3,8)

/ >1

wher~ Gtj is the characteristic value of permanent actions

Qt,l is the characteristic value of one of the variable actions
I Qt, / is the characteristic value of the other variable actions
Ad is the design value (specified value) of the accidental action
i 'YGj is the partial safety factor for permanent action j
'YG4,j is as 'YGj' but for accidental design situations
'YQ,/ is the partial safety factor for variable action i
If'o, If'l, 1f'2 are partial safety factors defined in Section 3.4.4 (3).

: (3) Combinations for accidental design situations either involve an explicit accidental action A (e.g.
:- shock) or refer to a situation after an accidental event (A = 0). Unless specified otherwise, 'YG4= 1
I may be used.
'.
I (4) Partial safety factors for various design situations are given in Table 3,3.

Table 3.3 Partial Safety Factors for Actions in Building Structures

Design Factor
Situation Action 'Y Favorable Unfavorable

Persistent Permanent 'YG 1.00 1,30

and
Transient Variable 'YQ 0 1.60

Accidental Permanent 'YG 1.00 1.00

(5) For building structures, Eq, 3.9 may be used in lieu of Eqs, 3.7 and 3.8:

Sd = S(1.30G + 1.60QvJ (3.9a)

I Sd = S(1.0G + 1.60QM) " (3.9b)

.Sd = S(1.20(G + Qvt + QM) (3.9c)

.
I
.Sd = S(A" + G + Qvi) (3.9d)

(),Ii (1'5~ -r I""~) f.J..s,)-'

EBCS 2 -1995 23
 .., ,

ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARDFORSTRUCTURALUSE OF CONCRETE

(6) The combinationfor static equilibrium may be taken as

S" = S(0.9G1-1.IG2 -1.6QJ (3.10)

where G1is the permanentstabilizing action

G2is the permanentnon-stabilizingaction
QI is the variable non-stabilizingaction r'
, -
3.7 ANALYSIS OF LINE ELEMENTS

3.7;1 Methods of Analysis

(1) For analysis in the Ultimate Limit State, plastic, non-linear and linear elastic theory may be
applied.
(2) Elastic methodsof analysismay be applied for analysisin the Serviceability Limit Stateand for
the Alternate Designmethod.

3.7.2 Load Arrangements and Load Cases

(1) A load arrangementidentifies the position, magnitudeand direction of a free action.

(2) A load case identifies compatible load arrangements,sets of deformations and imperfections
consideredfor a particular verification.

(3) Detailed rules on load arrangementsand load casesare given in EBCS1 -"Basis of Design and'
Actions on Structures"

(4) The following simplifying assumptionsmaybe madefor computing load-effectsin framesdue to

gravity loading:

(a) The live load may be consideredto be applied only to the floor or roof under consideration,
and the far ends of the columnsmay be assumedas fixed.
(b) Considerationmay be limited to the following load cases:

(i) Designdeadload on all spanswith full designlive load on two adjacentspans.

(ii) Designdeadload on all spanswith full designlive load on alternatespans.

3.7.3 Imperfections

(1) In the Ultimate Limit State, considerationshall be given to the effects of possible imperfections
in the geometryof the unloadedstructure.Where significant, any possibleunfavorable effect of such
imperfections shall be taken into account.

(2) Individual sections shall be designedfor the internal forces and moments arising from global
analysis, combiningeffects of actionsand imperfectionsof the structure as a whole. .

(3) In the absenceof other provisions, the effectsof imperfectionsmay be assessedby assumingthat
the structure is inclined to the vertical at an angle ct>
defined by: .

24 EBCS2 -::J"
 ",.",,-

CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN "

.;'
(a) For single storey frames or for structures loaded mainly at the top '..'

r'" ..1 tan,l. -

~;f~;:j -:---150 (3. 11)

(b) For other types of frames

1
tan<tl = 200 (3.12)

(4) Where the effects of imperfections are smaller than the effects of design horizontal actions, their
influence may be ignored. Imperfections need not be considered in accidental combinations of actions.

3.7.4 Time Dependent Effects

(1) Time dependent effects shall be taken into account where significant.

(2) Creep and shrinkage normally need only be considered for the Serviceability Limit State except
where their influence on second-order effects are likely to be significant.

3.7.S Idealization of the Structure

(1) The elements of a structure are normally classified, by consideration of their nature and function,
as beams, columns, slabs, walls, plates, arches, shells, etc. Rules are provided for the analysis of the
commoner of these elements and of structures consisting of combinations of these elements.

(2) To be considered as a beam or a column, the span or length of the member shall not be less than
twice the overall section depth. A beam whose span is less than twice its depth is considered as a deep
.beam.

(3) To be considered as a slab, the minimum span shall not be less than four times the overall slab
thickness.

(4) A slab subjected to predominantly uniformly distributed loads may be considered to be one-way
spanning if either:

(a) it possess two free (unsupported) and sensibly parallel edges, or

(b) if it is the central part of a sensibly rectangular slab supported on four edges with a ratio of
the longer to shorter span greater than 2.

(5) Ribbed or waffle slabs may be treated as solid slabs for the purposes of analysis, provided that
the flange of structural topping and transverse ribs have sufficient torsional stiff'ness. This may be
assumed provided:

(a) The rib spacing does not exceed 1.5 m.

(b) The depth of the rib below the flange does not exceed four times its width.
(c) The depth of the flange is at least 1/10 of the clear distance between ribs or 50 mm,
whichever is greater.
(d) Transverse ribs are provided at a clear spacing not exceeding 10 times the overall depth of
the slab.

The minimum flange thickness of 50 mm may he redul:ed to 40 mm where permanent hlol:ks

!. are incorporated between the ribs.

. EBCS 2 -1995 25
~---'~!J
jr--l I
;

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(6) A wall shall have a horizontal length of at least four times its thickness. Otherwise it shall be
treated as a column.

3.7.6 Stiffness

(1) Any reasonable assumptions may be adopted for computing the relative flexural. and torsional
stiffness of members. The assumptions made shall be consistent throughout the analysis.

,
3.7.7 Effective Span Length

(1) The effective span of a simply supported member shall be taken as the lower of the following two
values:

(a) The distance between the center lines of the supports.

(b) The clear distance between the faces of the supports plus the effective depth.

(2) The effective span of a continuous element shall normally be taken as the distance between the
center lines of the supports.

(3) For a cantilever, the effective span is taken to be its length, measured from:

(a) The face of the supports, for an isolated, fixed-ended cantilever.

(b) The center line of the support for a cantilever which forms the end of a continuous beam.

3.7.8 Effective Flange Width for T- Beams and L-Beams

(1) In the absence of a more accurate determination, the effective width to be used to obtain the load-
effects for a given span of a symmetrical T -beam shall not exceed the lesser of:

(a) The thickness of the web plus one-fifth of the effective span, or
(b) The actual width of the top slab (extending between the centers of the adjacent spans).

(2) The effective width shall be taken as constant over the entire span, including the parts near
intermediate supports for continuous beams.

(3) For edge beams (L-beams), the effective width shall not exceed the lesser of:

(a) The thickness of the web plus one-tenth of the effective span
(b) The thickness of the web plus half the clear distance to the adjacent beam.

3.7.9 Redistribution of Moments

(1) Moments obtained from a linear analysis may be reduced by multiplying by the following
reduction coefficient c5provided that the moments are increased in other sections in order to maintain

equilibrium.

26 EBCS 2 -1995 .._1'-

;~~II
 1
"

CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN r'

-
-i

(2) For continuousbeamsand for beamsin rigid jointed bracedframes with span/effective-depth
ratio )
not greater than 20, ,}
x !
0 .0.44 + 1.25(d) (3.13)

The neutral axis height, x, is calculatedat the ultimate limit stateand the term x/d refers to
the sectionwhere the momentis reduced.

(3) For other continuousbeamsand rigid jointed bracedframes

0 ~ 0.75 (3.14)

(4) For sway frames with slendernessratio).. of columnsless than 25

0 ~ 0.90 (3.15)

3.7.10 Second-Qrder Effects

(1) Second-ordereffects shall be taken into accountwhere they may significantly affect the overall
stability of a structure or the attainmentof the ultimate limit state at critical sections.

(2) For normal buildings, second-ordereffects may be neglectedwhere they increasethe moments,
calculated ignoring displacements,by not more than 10%.

3.8 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF PLANE ELEMENTS

3.8.1 Slabs

3.8.1.1 Methods of Analysis

(1) Moments and internal shear forces may be determined on the basis of the following types of
analysis:
(a) Linear analysis, optionally followed by redistribution
(b) Plastic analysis
(c) Non-linear analysis

3.8.1.2 Linear Alwlysis, with or without Redistribution

(1) The linear analysis shall be basedgenerally on the gross cross-sectionsby adoptingfor Poisson's
ratio a value ~etween0 and 0.2.

(2) Linear analysis is valid for the Serviceability Limit Statesand for the Ultimate Limit States.

(3) If required, the support momentsin continuousslabs. resulting from a linear analysis may be
-reduced by not more than 25%, for an appropriatewidth, provided that the correspondingaverage
momentsfor the s:}Inewidth at midspan,are adjustedto satisfy equilibrium, provided further that the
provisionsof Section3.7.9 (1) and (2) are complied with.

.
(4) Appendix A, which is basedon linear analysis with redistribution, may be usedfor the analysis
of two-way slabs. No further redistribution is, however, allowed.

~~;i~ EBCS 2 -1995 27

.c,$-,
"t..00.- -
~
":'Cc

.' c

:;; j
,

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE !

: .
3.8.1.3 Plastic Analysis
(1) In general, plastic analysisis only applicableto the ultimate limit states. Both static (e.g., the ~
strip method)and dynamic (e.g., yield line theory) methodsmay be used.

(2) The following conditionsshall be satisfied:

, (a) When using plastic analysis,the area of tensile reinforcementshall not exceed,at any point
or in any direction a value correspondingto x/d = 0.25.
(b) If a static methodis used,the momentdistributionselectedshall not differ substantiallyfrom
the elastic momentdistribution.
(c) If a dynamicmethodis used,the ratio of the supportmomentsto the mid-spanmomentsshall
normally be not less than 0.5, nor more than 2.

3.8.2 Flat Slabs

3.8.2.1 Definition

(1) The term flat slabsor plate meansa reinforcedconcreteslab with or without drops and supported,
generally without beams,by columnswith or without flared column heads.

3.8.2.2 Method of Analysis

(1) The forces acting in the middle plane of a plate can be determined on the basis of any of the
following types of analysis: .

(a) Linear Analysis

(b) Plastic Analysis .
(c) Non-linear Analysis

(2) The empirical methodor the equivalentframe methodgiven in Appendix A may be used for the
analysisof flat slabsand two-way slab systems.

28 EBCS 2 -1995 -
r- ..,--

.CHAPTER 4
, ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES

4.1 SCOPE
(1) Th~~c?aptergives.methodsof analysisan~ desi~ o~ linear elementsthat in general ensure.that r~;
the objectives set out m Chapter3 for the Ultimate LImit Stateare met. ':'l,i
" c,;':',

(2) Other meth~s maybe usedprovidedthey canbe shownto be satisfactorytor the type of structure \~
or memberconsidered. ttIt)\t

(3) It is assumedthat the ultimate limit state is the critical limit state. t'

4.2 BASIS OF DF$IGN I'

4.2.1 Analysis of Sections .I

.j"

(1) The calc~ation of the.ulti~ate r~i.stanceof me~bers.for fl~xure and axial loads shall be based :
on the followmg assumptions,to additionto those gIven to SectiOns3.7 and 3.8. ,

(a) Plane sectionsremainplane iJ

.(d)
(b) The reinforcememis subjectedto the samevariations in strain as the adjacentconcrete
(c) The tensile strengthof the concreteis neglected
The maximum
0.0035 compressive
in bending (simplestrain in the concreteis taken to be:
or compound)
I :!f

,
t

'~"

.0.002 in axial compression ,..

(e) The maximum tensile strain in the reinforcementis takento be 0.01. :
.,.,
4.2.2 Strain Distribution :;

(1) Referring to Fig. 4.1, the straindiagram shaiibe assumedto passthroughone of the three points

A, B or C.

4.2.3 Idealized Stress-Strain Diagram for Concrete

4.2.3.1 Parabolic-RectangularDiagram
(1) The parabolic-rectanglarstress distribution shown in Fig. 4.2 may be used for calculation of

sectioncapacity.

4.2.3.2 Rectanglar Diagram

(1) For sectionswhich are partly in tension(beamsor columns with large eccentricity), the simplified
rectangularstressblock shown in Fig. 4.3 may be used.

4.2.4 Stress-Strain Diagram for Steel

(1) The elasto-plasticdiagram shown in Fig. 4.4 may be used for oroinary steel.

, EBCS2 -1995 29

I.
.\
 ':It !
""
'"
..,
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

0.01

T T .~
h d

.£,
8 8 8
£C
0 -0.002

Figure 4.1 Strain Diagram in the Ultimate Limit State

fc

Ideallz8d Olagram-,--
.., fCk
1 ,
,-- I I
..'" I I
".J I
'"
",'" _O811~n
I
DIagram II
,," I I
I I I
I I 0.67f.k I
I I fcd = -I
I I Y. I
I I
I I
I I
I, I .
/ '_fc .1000 Ec (12eo Ec-l) fCd far Ec' 0.002
I I
I I, E .
c
-0.001 -0.002 -o.oo!e

Figure 4.2 Parabolic-Rectanglar Stress-Strain Diagram for Concrete in Compression

E fCd = O.85fck/ Yc

T I'
o.ex Fc

-L

1
I d
h

.~.--
ic
I

F
E '
s

Figure 4.3 Rectangular Stress Diagram

..&.

30 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994

--~

.
W"
 CHAPTER 4: Ui TIMA TE LIMIT STATES
- f.
,

0.01 . E

Figure 4.4 Stress-Strain Diagram for Reinforcing Steel

4.3 FLEXURAL MEMBERS

.4.3.1 General

(1) Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension reinforcement may be used to
increase the strength of flexural members.

(2) In the analysis of a cross-section of a beam which has to resist a small axial load, the effect of the
ultimate axial load may be ignored if the axial load does not exceed 0.1!cktimes the cross-sectional
area.
. (3) Design of deep beams shall be in accordance with Section 6.3.

.4.3.2 Distance Between Lateral Supports of Flexural Members

(1) The spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width of the
compression flange or face. Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken in determining the
spacing of lateral supports.

4.4 COMPRESSION MEMBERS

4.4.1 Scope and Definition

(I) This section refers to slender structures or slender members mainly subjected to compression
whose load carrying capacity is significantly influenced by their deformations (second-order effects).

(2) The principles given in this section apply to linear reinforced concrete members subjected to axial
compression, with or without bending, for which the effects of torsion can be neglected.

(3) These principles may also be applied to other types of structural member, such as walls, shells,
slender beams in which lateral buckling of the compre,.~sionzone may occur, deep beams or other
-exceptil)nal ~tructures or members in which significant local deformations may arise.

(4) In compre~~ion members, the influence of second-()rder eft"ectsshall be considered if the increase
-ahl)'..e th~ tir~t-order bending moments due to deflections exceeds 10%.

EBCS 2. 7995 31
v-

,
i

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

4.4.2. Analysis and ~ign Procedures ~

(1) The internal forces and momentsmay generallybe determinedby elastic global analysis using
either: -

(a) First-order theory, using the initial geometryof the structure,or

(b) Second-ordertheory~taking into.accountthe influence of the deformationof the stfl'cture.

(2) First-order theory may be us.edfor the global analysisin the following cases:

(a) Non-swayframes (Section.4.4.4.2)

(b) Braced frames (Section4;4.4.3)
(c) Design methodswhich make indirect allow?ncesfor second-ordereffects.

(3) Second-ordertheory may be used for the global analysisin all cases.

(4) Design for structural stability taking accountof second-ordereffectsshall ensurethat, for the most
unfavorable combinationsof actions at the ultimate limit state, loss of static equilibrium (locally or
for the structure as a whole) does not occur or the resistanceof individual cross-sectionssubjected
to bendingand longitudinal force is not exceeded.

(5) The structural behavior shall be consideredin any direction in which failure due to second-order
effects may occur.

4.4.3 Allowance for Imperfections

(1) Allowance shall be made for the uncertaintiesassociatedwith the prediction of second-order -
effectsand, in particular, dimensionalinaccuraciesanduncertaintiesin the positionand line of action
of the axial loads. .
(2) Suitable equivalentgeometric imperfections maybe used, with values which reflect the possible
effectsof all types of imperfection.

(3) For frame structuresthe effects of imperfectionsmay be allowed for in frame analysisby means
of an equivalentgeometric imperfection in the form of an initial sway imperfection <Pdeterminedin
accordancewith Section3.7.3.

I (4) For isolated elements,the equivalentgeometricimperfectionsmay be introduced by increasingI

the eccentricity of the longitudinal force by an additional eccentricity ea, acting in the mostI
unfavorable direction:

j L
ea = --.:.-
300
~ 20 mm (4.1)

where Le denotesthe effective length of the isolatedelement(see Section4.4.7).

32 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994

';
,
,
 ;

CHAP-TER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STATES

4.4.4 Classification of Structur~ and Structural Elements

..4.4.4.1 General

(I) For the purpose of design calculations,structuresor structural membersmay be classified as

bracedor unbraceddependingon the provision or not of bracing elementsand as sway or non-sway
dependingon their sensitivity to second-ordereffectsdue to lateral displacements. :
I

(2) Similarly, isolated columnsare classifiedas slenderor non-slender.

4.4.4.2 Swayor Non-Sway Structures

(1) A frame may be classifiedas non-swayif its responseto in-planehorizontalforces is sufficiently j

stiff for it to be acceptablyaccurateto neglectany additionalinternal forcesor momentsarisingfrom ;
horizontal displacementsof its nodes.

(2) Any other frame shall be classifiedas a swayframe andthe effectsof the horizontal displacements
of its nodesshall be taken into accountin its design(see Section4.4.2).

(3) A frame may be classified as non-swayfor a given load caseif the critical load ratio NSd/Ncr
for
that load casesatisfiesthe criterion:

NSd~Ncr~ 0.1 (4.2)

where Nsdis the designvalue of the total vertical load

..Ncr is its critical value for failure in a sway mode (seeSection4.4.12).

.(4) Beam-and-columntype plane frames in building structureswith beamsconnectingeach column

at each story level may be classified as non-swayfor a given load case, when first-order theory is
used,the horizontal displacementsin eachstory due to the designloads (bothhorizontal andvertical),
plus the initial sway imperfection(see Section4.4.3) satisfythe criterion of Eq. 4.3.
No
"HI ~ C.1 (4.3)

,.c;

I
,Ii)j..

where
0 is the(5)
(see horizontal
below) displacementat the top of the story,
- relative to the bottom of the story

L is the story height

H is the total horizontal reaction at the bottom of the story
N is the total vertical reaction at the bottom of the story.

(5) The displacement0 in (4) aboveshall be determinedusingstiffnessvaluesfor beamsand columns

correspondingto the ultimate limit state.As anapproximation,displacements calculatedusingmoment
of inertia of the gross section may be multiplied by the ratio of the gross column stiffness to the
effective column stiffness in Section4.4.12 to obtain o.
-.
(6) For sway frames, the requirementsfor frame stability given in Section 4.4.8 shall also be
satisfied.

EBCS 2 -1995 33
 I
I

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONC,qETE .

4.4.4.3 Bracedor Unbraced

StrudureS' .
(1) A frame may be classified as braced if its sway'resistanceis supplied by a bracing systemwith,
a responseto in-plane horizontal loads which is ,sufficientlystiff for it,to be acceptablyaccurateto
assumethat all horizontal loads are resistedby the bracing system.This may be assumedto be the
case,if the frame attracts not more than 10%of the horizontalloads.
,
(2) A bracedframe may be treated as fully supportedlaterally.

(3) The effects of the initial sway imperfections(see Section4.4.3(3)) in the bracedframe shall be
taken into accountin the designof the bracing system.

(4) The initiallway imperfections(or the equivalenthorizontal forces), plus any horizontal loads
applied to a bracedfr~e, may be treated as affecting only the bracing system.

(5) The bracing systemshall be designedto resist:

(a) Any horizontal loads applied to the frameswhich it braceS.
(b) Any horizontal or vertical loads applied directly to the bracingsystem.
(c) The effects of the initial sway imperfections(or the equivalenthorizontal forces) from the
bracing systemitself and from all the frameswhich it braces.

,(6)Wherethe bracing systemis a frame or sub-frame, it may itself be either sway or non-sway(see
Section4.4.4.2.)
(7) When applying the criterion given in Section4.4.4.2(3) to a frame or sub-ftame acting as a ..
bracing system,the total vertical load actingan all the frameswhi~h it bracesshall also be included.

(8) When applying the \:riterion given in Section 4:4.4.2(4) to a frame or sub-frame acting as a
.
bracingsystem,the total horizo,ntalandvertical load acting on all the frameswhich it bracesshallalso
be included, plus the initial sway imperfectionapp~iedin the form of the equivalenthorizontalforces
from the bracing systemitself and from all the frames which it braces.

4.4.4.4 IsolatedColumns

(1) Columns may be consideredas isolated columnswhen they are isolated compr~sion members
(such as individual isolated columns and columns with articulations in a non-swaystructure), or
CQ~pression memberswhich are integral partsof a structurebut which are consideredto be 'isolated
for designpurposes(such as slenderbracing elementsconsideredas isolatedcolumns, and columns
with restrainedends in a non-swaystructure).

4.4.5 Dennition of Slenderness

Ratio

'(1) For isolatedcolumns. the slendernessratio is definedby:

L
). .T (4.4) .

.where L. is the effective buckling length

i is the p'1nimumradius of gyration of the concretesectiononly.

l4 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994 -

 , ,'"',

-CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES

-Used (2) For

to multistory sway
calculatethe frames comprising
slendernessratio of therectangular
columns insubframes,the following expressionmay be
the samestory: ,
,!
y{
' ('.
c,

~'" ."
f* XL
12A .(4.5)
'1
:,'11
,j
,;"

, "
'tti
where A is the sumof the cross-sectionalareasof all the columnsof the stot>: ~,I
K, is
of the total lateral
elasticity taken stiffnas
as unity of the columnaof the story (story riJidity), with nmulus i't:,[I.

L is the story height ',;

.i
~,,:\
.
4.4.6 Limits of Slendern~ ,'~

(1) The slendernessratio of concretecolumnsshall not exceed 140 'I

(2) Second-ordereffects in compressivemembersneed not be taken into accountin the following

cases:
(a) For sway frames, the greaterof Eq. 4.6a or 4.6b
). ~ 25 (4.6a)

15
). ~ -(4.6b)
..r;:
.
(b) For non-swayframes

). ~' 50 -25~ (4.7)

(MJ ~
.!

whereM1 and M2 are the first-order (calculated)momentsat the ends,M2 being alwayspositive t
and greaterin magnitudethanMl' and M] beingpositive if memberis bent in f
single curvature and negativeif bent in doublecurvature k
JId = N ../f..,;.tc ~

4.4.7 Effective Buckling Length of Compression Members ,

j
(1) The effective buckling length L, of a column in a givenplane maybe obtainedfrom the following !
approximateequa:tions provided the restriction in (3) below is compliedwith:

(a) Non-swaymode ~
~ .~~~ ~ 0.7 (4.8) j
-L a . + 0.8

EBCS 2 -1996 3S

.
 ;..,--

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

~ (b) Sway mode .

j L. 7.5 + 4(aJ + az) + 1.6aJaz

-.~ 1.15 (49
. )
.L 7.5 + aJ + az
.
i or conservatively
r;:!, L
~~:,~', -!. ./i-:-O~- ~ 1.15 (4.10)
~~~ cry L
"
, (2) For the theoreticalmodel shownin Fig. 4.5, the stiffnesscoefficientsal and a2 are obtainedfrom
.
,~ a
K I + Kc
I .K + K (4.11)
II 12

~ + Kc
: a2 .~I +~ (4.12)

a +a
aWl--~--r (4.13)

where KI and K2 are column stiffness coefficients(EI/L)

Kc is the stiffness coefficient (EIIL) of the column being designed
Kij is the effective beamstiffnesscoefficient (EIIL)
= 1.0 oppositeend elasticallyor rigidly restrained
= 0.5 oppositeend free to rotate
= 0 for a cantileverbeam .

Ib I EXAMPLE

Lb.
Calculation of aA in A

I.JIL.J + IcJlLcJ
a =
A IbIILbI + O.5IblIL.1

Ib3 ~4 for E- = constant

~gure 4.5 Model for Computation of Stiffness Coefficient

(3) The aboveapproximateequationsfor effective length calculationare applicablefor values of al

or a2 not exceeding10. For higher valuesmore accuratemethodsmustbe used.

36 EBCS2: Part 1 -1994

 " '""::\~-"-"-'"-"~-"-~~--~ -t. ;'

, ,

~
CHAPTER4: uL TIMATELIMIT STATES

(4) When calculatinga, only membersproperly framed into the end of the column in the appropriate;'
!
': c,:~
,
!."
\

plane of bendingshallbe considered.The stiffneSsof eachmembershallbe obtainedby dividing-the 1(['.

-second momentof area of its concretesectionby its actual length. ;!i
1\fl,

moment athe
(5) When at such positions
connection shall be
between takenasand
a column 10.its
If base
a base
is is
notdesignedtotoresist
designed the
resist column
other thanmoment,
nominal i~~
"..~

a maybe taken as 1.0. i

c,i
",,
'if '1
(6) For flats sla~ construction,an ,eQuivalent
beam shall be takenas having the width and thickness ~
of the 5labformmg the columnstrip. 'tl
It
48
4..Frame stabl .
1Ity
.9/ i'.
',I'
1
4.4.8.1 General -:

(1) All frames shall have adequateresistanceto failure in a sway mode, (see Section4.4.11).
However, where the frame is showntq be a non-swayframe (see Section4.4.4.2), no further sway
modeverification is required.
(2) All frames mcluding swayframes shall also be checkedfor adequateresistanceto failure in non-
swaymodes(see Section4.4.9).

~
4.4.8.2 An.alysis of SwayFrames
(1) Whenglobal analysisis used,the second-ordereffects in the swaymode shallbe included, either
directly by using second-orderelastic analysis, or indirectly by using first-order analysis with
I "
'
i
amplified sway moments(seeSection4.4.11). "
...

-(2) When second-orderelasticglobal analysisis used,the resultingforces and momentsmay directly i

be usedfor memberdesign ., ,:
Ii
(3) Whenfirst-order elasticanalysis,with second-ordermomentsis usedfor columndesign,the sway i
momentsin the ?eaInsand the bearn-to-columnco~ections shall be amplified by at least 1.2 unless I
a smallervalue ISshown to be adequateby analysIs. ~
~
~
4.4.9 Design of Non-Sway Fram~ i
'"t\
(1) .Individual n?n-sway compression members shall be considered to be isolated elements and be 1
designed accordmgly. ~
,I
P
t
(2) Bracing elements,or in non-swayframes without bracing elements,the individual compression I!
membersshallbe designedfor the relevanthorizontal forces andvertical loads taking accountof the I !

equivalentgeometric imperfectionsdefined in Section3.7.3 and 4.4.3, respectively.

i
(3) For individual compressionmembers,the designrules for isolatedcolumns(Section4.4.10)apply.
The effective buckling length L, may generallybe determinedaccordingto Section4.4.7.

.;
,, EBCS 2 -1995 37

.j
!0-

I
I-
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE -

~.4.10 Delip or Isolated Columl18

4.4.10.1 GtMrul

(1) For buildings, a designmethod may be used which assum~ die compressionmembeR to be
isolated and adopts a simplified shape for the deformed axis of die column. The additional
eccentricity induced in the column by its deflection is then calculatedas a function of Ilei1d~
ratio.
,
4.4.10.2 TotGleccentricity

(1) The total eccentricityto be usedfor the desianof columnsof constantcross-aectionat the critical
sectionis given by:
e. = e. + eG+e2 (4.14)

w,hecee, is equivalentconstantfirst-order eccentricity of the desi&naxial load, see (2) and (3)
below
eG is the additional eccentricityaccordingto Eq 4.1
e2 is the second-ordereccentricity(Section4.4.10.3).

(2) For first-order eccentricityeoequal at both endsof a column,

e. = eo (4.15)

(3) For first-order momentsvarying linearly alongthe lenith, the equivalenteccentricityis the higher
of the fo"owin~ two values:
e, ~ 0.6t112+ O.4eOI (4.16a)

e. = 0.4e112 (4.16b)

where eol and el12are the first-order eccentricitiesat the ends, el12being positive and greater in
magnitudethan eol.

(4) For different eccentricitiesat the ends, (3) above, the critical end section shall be checkedfor
first-order moments:
e~ = el12+ eQ (4.17'\

4.4.10.3 Second-OrderEccentricity

(1) For non-swayframes, the second-ordereccentricitye2of an isolated column may be obtainedas

k L2
e2 z ~ 10 ( 1/,) (4.18)

1 where L, is the effective buckling length of the column

kl = X/20 -0.75 for 15 ~ A ~ 35
kl = 1.0 for A > 35
~ 1/, is the curvature at the critical section, see (2) below.

.
38 EBCS 2: Part 7 -7994

.
1
l~
 CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlMff STA TES
,I

(2) The curvature is generally a non-linear function of the axial load and bending moment in the
critical section, but the following approximatevalue may be used in the absenceof more accurate
methods:

! -~(~) 10-3 (4.19)

r d

whered is the column dimension in the buckling plane less the cover to the center of the
longitudinal reinforcement
kz = MjM...,
M" is the designmoment at the critical section including second-ordereffects
M..., is the balancedmomentcapacityof the column.

(3) The appropriatevalue of kz may be found iteratively taking an initial value correspondingto first-
order actions.

'4.4.11 Amplified SwayMoments,Method/or Sway Frames

(1) In the amplified sway momentsmethod,the sway momentsfound by a first-order analysis shall
be increasedby multiplying them by the momentmagnificationfactor:

01 -(4.20)
1
1 -No.. IN
..cr

where NS4is the designvalue of the total vertical load

.Nor is its critical value for failure in a swaymode.

(2) The amplified sway momentsmethodshall not be usedwhen the critical load ratio NsJNc,is more
.than 0.25.
(3) Sway momentsare those associatedwith the horizontal translation of the top of a story relative
to the bottom of that story. They arise from horizontal loading and may also arise from vertical
loading if either the structureor the loading is asymmetrical.

(4) As an alternativeto determiningNS4INc,direct, the following approximationmaybe used in beam-

and-columntyPe frames as describedin 4.4.4.2(4):

~ -~ (4.21)
Nc' HL

where 0, L, H and N are as defined 4.4.4.2(4).

(5) In the presenceof torsional eccentricityin any floor of a structure,unlessmore accuratemethods

are used, the sway momentsdue to torsion should be increasedby multiplying them by the larger
momentmagnification factor 01obtainedfor the two orthogonal directionsof the lateral loads acting
on the structure.
.
-
EBCS 2. 7995 39
.ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
..
..4.U Dlt41'i11iMdon
01StOl)'BucklingLoadN.
(1) Unlessmore accuratemethodsare used,the bucklingload of a story may be assumedto be equal
to that of the substituteb~-column frame defined in Fig 4.6 and may be determinedas:

rEI,
N., .U (4.22)
,
,
where EI, is the effective stiffness of the substitutecolumn designed in accordancewith (4)
below
L, is the effective length

(2) In lieu of a more accuratedetermination,the effectivestiffness of a column EI, in Eq 4.22 may

be taken as:
EI, = 0.2E). + EI, (4.23)

where
E. = 1100/..1
E, is the modulus of elasticity of steel
I., I, are the momentsof inertia of the concreteand reinforcementsections,respectively,
of the substitutecolumn, with respectto the centroid of the concrete section (see
Fig 4.6(c».

or alternatively
M
EI., (l/r...)
...~ 0.4E...
I (4.24)

where M... is the balancedmomentcapacityof the substitutecolumn

(l/r..,,) is the curvature at balancedload and may be taken as

~ .(~) 10-3 (4.25)

r... d

(3) In Eq 4.22 L, may be determinedin accordancewith Section4.4.7 using the stiffnessproperties

of the gross concretesectionfor both beamsand columnsof the substituteframe (Fig. 4.6(b».

(4) The equivalentreinforcementareas,A,%l' in the substitutecolumn(seeFig. 4.6(c» to be used for

calculatingI, and M... in (2) above may be obtainedby designingthe substitutecolumn at eachfloor
level to carry the story design axial load and amplified sway moment at the critical section (see
Section4.4.11). The equivalentcolumn dimensionsof the substitutecolumn may be taken as shown
in Fig. 4.6(c), in the case of rectangularcolumns. Circular columns may be replaced by square
columns of the samecross-sectionalarea. In the above,concretecover and bar arrar.gementin the
substitute columns shall be takento be the sameas thoseof the actual columns.

(5) The amplified sway moment, to be usedfor the designof the substitutecolumn (see (4) above),
may be found iteratively taking the first-order designmomentin the substitute column as an initial
value. .

40 EBCS 2: Part 7 -7994 .

-

~ .2 I kb

kb and kc are baled 0

tkc Groll Concrete Settlor

tkc

EQuivalent Ground Bet

la) Actual f'rame (b) SUbltltutl Ilam-Column Framl fc

CalculatinG Efflc11VI LenO1hl.
~ h "
~
b \ \EJ
" A.,tat

-l.. d
~-.!--\
'
"
(C) Crall -SIc110n of Substitute !,;

Column for CalculatinG Elc

and Mbal.

Figure 4.6 Substitute Multi~Story Beam-Column Frame

.(6) In lieu of more accurate determination, the first-order design moment, Mdl' at the critical section
of the substitute column may be determined using Eq. 4.26.

!:X2+ 3
-Mdl .HL (4.26) 1.
!:Xl + !:X2 + 6 i~
~

where !:XIand a" are defined in Section 4.4.7 and shall not exceed 10. ~
j'
4.4.13 Effect or Creep :;
:);
J,
(1) Cree~ effects ma~ b~ ignored if the increase in the first-order bending moments due to creep i
deformation and longitudinal force does not exceed 10%. ..

(2) In non-sway buildings, creep deformation of slender compression members connected ~

monolithically to slabs or beams at their two ends may normally be disregarded because their effects :
are
the generally
restraints compensated by ends
at the column other reduce
influences
the which
creep are neglected insignificantly
deformations the design. so
In interior columns,
that they can be i."

neglected. In edge columns with different eccentricities at each end, creep increases the deformations
but it does
critical not deflections
column decrease thein bearing capacity
the relevant because
failure state. these deformations are not additional.to
' the

-(3) For isolated columns in non-sway structures, creep may be allowed for by multj~y!ng the
curvature for short-term loads (Eq. 4.19) by (1 + ~.J, where ~d is the ratio of dead loaiJ ae.~ign
moment to total design moment, always taken as positive.

EBCS2. 1995 41

.
 .

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE -

(4) For sway frames, the effective columnstiffness(Eq. 4.23 or 4.24) may be divided by (1 + .aJ, .
where .adis as in (3) above.

4.4.14 Slender Columns Bent About the Major Axis .

(1) A slender column bent about its major axis may be treated as biaxially loaded with initial
eccentricitye" acting aboutthe minor axis.

4,4.15 Biaxial Bending of Columns

4.4.15.1 Smoll Ratios of RelativeEccentricity

(1) Columns of rectangular cross-sectionwhich are subjectedto biaxial bending may be checked
separatelyfor uniaxial bendingin eachrespectivedircctionprovidedthe relative eccentricitiesare~uch
that k S 0.2; where k denotesthe ratio of the smaller relative eccentricity to the larger relative
eccentricity.

(2) The relative eccentricity, for a given direction, is defined as the ratio of the total eccentricity,
allowing for initial eccentricity and second-ordereffects in that direction, to the column width in the
samedirection.

4.4.15.2 Overlapping Buckling Curves

(1) Separatechecksas in Section4.4.15.1 is equallyapplicableto biaxial bending in general,provided

the central one-third parts of the effective lengthsof the buckled column in the principal directions
do not overlap (seeFig. 4.7).

I
I
I
/
I ,
'
\\
\--~ -;-
T
L
.

..

I I -.or.

LOI IT :JL ' ,)--1-

~
\~
\
\
\
\
\
,\
,
\.
F1lUre 4.7 Buckling Curv~ for Bending in each of the Two Principal Directions

4.4.15.3 Approximate Method

(1) If neither of the conditions in Sections4.4.15.1 and 4.4.15.2 is satisfied, then the approximate
methodof calculation given in this section maybe adopted,in the absenceof more accuratemethods.

42 EBCS2: p." 1 -1994

.
" "

CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlMIT,STA TES

,

.('2) For'this approximate method, one-fourth of the total reinforcementmust either be distributed
Ilona"eacht:aceof the ~lumn or at eachcorner. The column shallbe d~igned for uniaxial bending
with the followina equivalentuniaxial eccentricityof load, eo,' along the axis parallel to the larger
A relative eccentricity:

e0' .e (1 + ka)
kJt
(4.27)

where t. denotesthe total eccentricity in the direction of the larger relative eccentricity
k
a
denotesthe relative eccentricityratio defined in Section4.4.15.1(2)
maybe obtainedfrom Table4.1 as a function of the relative normal force JI= N./(f..,..ot)

Table 4.1 Values or Factor a

I
f\;;,

t~
~

II! 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 ~ 1.0!~ ,!I

, ...it

a 0.6 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.5 I~

')
4.5 SHEAR r"
"..,~
,
4.5.1 General ~
!c
;
(1) This Sectionapplies to beamsand slabsdesignedfor flexure in accordancewith Section4.3. It j
also appliesto columnssubjectedto significantshearforcesdesignedin accordancewith Sections4.3 f
and4.4. I
'i
(2) Provisions for minimum shearreinforcementare given in Chapter7. j

.(3) The ultimate limit state in shear is characterisedby either diagonal compressionfailure of the f,
concreteor failure of the web reinforcementdue to diagonaltension. 't:
..

.(4) Resistanceto diagonal tensionis obtainedas the sum of the resistancesof the web reinforcement :,}
and of the concretesection. !:
.t
..
.I
(5) Critical sectionfor shearis at a distanced from the face of supports. Sectionscloserthan d shall ~
be designedfor the shear at d. I
~
,
(6) Two-way action (punching)shall be consideredaccordingto Section4.10. i
I
:{

4.5.2 Limiting Value or Ultimate Shear Force .4

,
\
I
(1) In order to prevent diagonal compressionfailure in the concrete,the shearresistanceVRdof a i
sectiongiven by Eq. 4.28 shall not be less than the appliedshearforce V.. i
;;
,\
VRd= 0.25!clJ,.d (4.28) I;
!!

whereb", is the minimum width of the web. r

11
"
')

EBCS 2 -1995 43
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.
4.5.3 Shear Resistanceof Concrete in Beams and Slabs
~
4.5.3.1 Members Without Significant Axial Forces

(1) The shear force Vccarried by the concrete in memberswithout significant axial forces shall be
taken as:

, Vc -0.25fcld klk2bwd (4.29)

where
k1 = (1 + 50p) ~ 2.0
~ = 1.6 -d ~ 1.0 (d in meters). For memberswhere more than 50% of the bottom
reinforcementis curtailed, ~ = 1
p = A/b..d
A. is the area of the tensile reinforcementanchoredbeyondthe intersectionof the steel
and the line of a possible450crack starting from the edge of the section (seeFig.
4.8)

Ib t
r'=!!.:, Ib,net
Vsd r=~ Vsd As / section considered

j
d[ ~::~1~~:::;;;~;~i;;~15
~~ 45/ ~ .'] d

As As ~ -
.-.
.
Figure 4.8 A, to be introduced in Eq. 4.29

4.5.3.2 Members Subjectedto Significant Axial CompressionI

(1) For memberssubjectedto axial compression,Eq. 4.30 may be used to computethe additionalI
shearforce Vc"carried by the concrete.I

4 V .O.IO~N (4.30)
CPO A S,t
c

where NS,tis the design axial force

4.5.3.3 Members Subjectedto Axial Tension

(1) For memberssubjectedto axial tension, shearreinforcementshall be designedto carry total shear.

(2) In the caseof fatigue loading, the shear reinforcementshall carry the total shear. . ....

j 44 EBCS 2: Part 7 .7994 ...

 CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlM" S1 A rES

-4.5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement

(1) In beams, bent-upbars shall not be used u shear reinforcementsexcept in combination with
stirrups. At least50% of the designshearforce ~S4shall be resistedby vertiCalstirrups.

(2) WJlere inclined shear reinforcement is used, the angle betweenthe reinforcement and the
longitudinal axis of the beam shall not be lessthan 45°.

(3) Where the load is not acting at the top of the beam or when.the supportis not at the bottom of
the beam suspensionreinforcementshall be provided to transferthe load to the top of the beam.

(4) Whenshear reinforcementperpendicularto the longitudinal axis is used, its shearresistanceV,

may be calculatedas:

V = ~ (4.31)
.s

whereA. is the area of shearreinforcementwithin distances.

(5) When inclined stirrups are used,the shearresistanceof the stirrups may be calculatedas:
V = A.dfyd(sina + cosa) (4.32)
.s
..
where a is the angle of inclination from the horizontal.

(6) Whenshearreinforcementconsistsof a single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up
at the samedistancefrom the support, the shearresistanceof the reinforcementmaybe calculatedas:
V. = A.fyd sina (4.33)

4.5.5 Web-Flange Connections

4.5.5.1 General

(1) The shear strength of the flange may be calculated consideringth~ flange as a system of
compressivestruts combinedwith ties in the form of tensile reinforcement.

(2) The junction of the flanges with the web shall be checkedfor longitudinal shear.

(3) The ultimate limit state in longitudinal shear is governedeither by the effect of inclined flange
compression(acting parallel to its middle plane) or by tension in the transversereinforcement.

(4) The longitudinal shear per unit length v..t, which may be obtainedas a function of the applied
transverseshear VSdfrom Eqs. 4.32 and 4.33, shall not exceedthe limits of resistancegiven by
Eqs. 4.34 and 4.35.

",'i

!~

EBCS 2 -1995 45
 -
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(5) Calculation of longitudinal shear per unit length: -

(a) For flange in compression

b -b V '. .
V.oi = (' W)~ \4.34)

,
2b . z

(P) for flange in tension

A -A V
V.oi = (' JW)~ (4.35)
2A, z

I where b. is the effective width of aT-section

I .bw is the width of the web
.~::~",'~:'\""; Z is the internal lever arm
A, is the area of the longitudinal steel in the effective flanges outside the projection of
the web into the slab
AJWis the area of the longitudinal steel inside the slab within the projection of the web
into the slab.

4.5.52 Resistance to Inclined Compression

(1) The resistance to inclined compression per unit length VRdl shall be computed as
..
VRdI = O.25tdhl (4.36)'-

where hI is the total thickness of the flange. -

4.5.5.3 Resistance to Diagonal Tension

(1) The resistance to diagonal tension per unit length VRd2shall be computed as

VRd2 = O.5°fctdhI + ¥ (4.37)

1

where As! is the area of transverse reinforcement per unit length, perpendicular to the web.
flange interface (see Fig. 4.9)

(2) If, at the section with M = Mmax(see Fig 4.9), the flange is subjected to a tensile force, the
concrete contribution O.50tldhl in Eq. 4.37 should be neglected.

(3) The cross sectional area of the transverse flexural reinforcement which crosses the interface
between web and flange can be taken into account in calculating As!. If this reinforcement is not
sufficient as determined from Eq. 4.37, then additional reinforcement shall be provided.

I.
46 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
 I

CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES '~

;,
"
.'~
1
\
i
f
(
! .1

~
.:
.
..

,--

figure 4.9 Notations for Web-Flange Connections

(4) The reinforcement crossing the plane of the junction shall be:

.1. (a) Placed ~n the part of the flange subjected to tension by transverse bending if the latter is
,,' predommant.
t .(b) Evenly distributed between the upper and lower parts if the transverse bending is slight.

...~. 4.6 TORSION

;"

'J'f 4.6.1 Definitions

i

(I) Campa/ibiliry torsion. Torques which are due solely to the restraint of the angular rotatif1r.
induced by adjacent members.

(2) Equilibrium torsion. Torques which are necessary for equilihrium.

4.6.2 General

(I) Torques due to compatibility torsion are not necessary for equilihrium and may he negle<.:tedin
ultimate limit state calculations. However, the resulting secondary effe<.:tsshall he <.:()nsideredin the
serviceability limit states and in detailing.

(2) The torsional resistance of any section may be calculated on the ha.'iis of an equivalent h()ll()w
section with thin walls (see Fig 4.10).

(3) For T -sections and other sections which can be subdivided into rectangles, the torsi()nal resistan<.:e
may be taken as the sum of the capacities of the individual rectangular se<.:tions.The suhdivish)n ()f
the section may be chosen so as to maximize the calculate{! resistance (see Se<.:th)ns4.6.3 and 4.6.4).

.EBCS 2 199~~7
 .
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OE CONCRETE

(4) For hollow sections, the equivalent wall thickness shall not exceed the actual wall thickness. .
Actual wall thickness fQr hollow sections that is less than twice the concrete cover to longitudinal bars
is not allowed.

(5) The equivalent hollow section has the same outer boundary as the actual section and an equivalent
thic~ess h., obtained as h.1 ~ A/u ~ the actual wall thickness (where u is the outer perimeter and
A is the total area of the cross-section enclosoo by the outer perimeter, including inner hollow areas).

(6) The critical section for torque is at the face of supports.

/", Centre Line

Perimeter u

h., .'
Figure 4.10 Equivalent Hollow Section
~

4.6.3 Limiting Value of Ultimate Torque

.
(1) In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in the concrete, the torsional resistance TRJof
a section given by Eq. 4.38 shall not be less than the applied torque T sct.

TRJ= O.80/cdA'lh'l (4.38)

where A'I is the area enclosed within the centerline of the thin-wall cross-section including
inner hollow areas (see Section 4.6.2).

4.6.4 Torsional Resistance of Concrete '

,i
(1) The torque Tc carried by the concrete shal.l be taken as:

Tc = 1.2/ctdA'lh'l (4.39)

4.6.5 Design of Torsional Reinforcement

(1) Torsional reinforcement in the torm of closed links and longitudinal reinforcement is required to
carry the excess torque whenever the applied torque ~xceeds the concrete resistance given by .

Eq.4.39.
(2) The volume of longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be chosen to be equal to the volume of .

the links (closed stirrups).

48 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994

.
 . CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STATES

(3) Minimum torsional reinforcement in the form of stirrups shall be provided as required in
.Chapter 7.

(4) The torsionalresistance'ofthe reinforcementT~is given by Eqs. 4.40 and 4.41.

U.,/ AI
Tq --~~- (4.40)

or 2A~/yJA,
T.. ..u (4.41)
q

where AI is the cross-sectionalareaof the stirrups in the effective wall

A, is the cross-sectionalareaof the lon9itudinal reinforcement
u./ is the mean perimeterenclosingthe areaA" (seeFig.4.9).

(2) The longitudinal reinforcementmay'be distributedevenlyaroundthe inside perimeterof the links

or concentratedin the cornerswhere there shall alwaysbe at leastone bar.

(3) Additional -requirementsare given in Chapter7.

4.6.6 Combined Action.Errects

4.6.6.1 Torsion and Bending and/or Longitudinal Stresses.

{1) The longitudinal reinforcementshall be determinedseparatelyfor torsion acCGrdingto Section

4.6.5 and for flexure and axial loads accordingto Chapter4.
.
(2) The areaof reinforcementfurnished shall be the sum of the areasthus determined.

4.6.6.2 Torsion and Shear

(1) The limiting valuesof torsional and shearresistanceshallbe takenasthe basic values from Eqs.
4.38 and 4.28, respectivelymultiplied by the following reductionfactors .8,and .8..

(a) torsion
.8,- 1
F!,?i
1 + (TIT
54tV U 2
) (4.42)
U 54

.V54/VU
(b) shear .8. =

~
1 + (~ /T
1

)2 (4.43)

" '(~
.,
','~

ii:
, i;~ EBCS2 -1995 49
"
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE "

",,:..,!S~ (2) The torsional and shear resistance of the concrete shall be taken as the basic values fromEqs.4.~9
":,~~l1 and 4.29, respectively, multiplied by the reduction factors fJlcand fJ"c' .
"""~'::
c i 1
"".. ? (a) torsion fJlc =
,j,"Co,
L ,
I,,; 1;" ";1.);,",
"" {",:-:"l.,
,'w
"""
;,,'!,~c!'::';~f\
p:;;;jil
1 '+ ".. V
-c

(T IT )
2
(4.44)
~'"'~~r"""', sa c

~.;.,:~,f;~ ' 1
I
I
I
(b) shear fJvc =
r;g; 1T
1 + (VIii-)2
sa c
(4.45)

I 4.7 PUNCHING
I 4.7.1 General

(1) This section applies to the punching of slabs and footings that are provided with the necessary
flexural reinforcement.

(2) The following requirements supplement those of Section 4.5 which must be checked to ensure
adequate resistance for one-way action.

(3) The ultimate limit state in punching is characterised by the formation of a truncated punching cone
or pyramid around concentrated loads or reactions. -

4.7.2 Loaded Area

~

(1) The provisions of this section are appli~able to the following types of loaded area:

(a) Shape (d denotes the average effective depth of the slab or footing):
-rectangular, with perimeter not exceeding 11d and the ratio of length to breadth not
exceeding2
-circular, with diameter not exceeding 3.5d
-any shape, with perimeter not exceeding 11d.
(b) The loaded area is not so close to other concentrated forces that their critical perimeters
intersect, nor in a zone subjected to significant shear forces of a different origin. .

(2) If the conditions in l(a) above are not satisfied for wall or rectangular column supports, the
critical redu~ed perimeters according to Fig. 4.11 shall be taken into account, since the shear forces
in wall-shaped supports are concentrated in the corners.

4.7.3 Critical Section

(1) The critical section is perpendicular to the middle plane of the slab. It extends along the effective
depth d and its outline is defined below. .

SO EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994 .

~,
,"
. .
 r

-CHAPTER 4: (lL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES f

,",

-,b1i
-I .-'~ '-'-. \ 2 {8 .~
.i. 1 8, ~ 2b t
1.5d1 W/////A Tn b 5.6d-b, :
.\ ~~~/////d i b,S { b .

~";,\
5!/;"!i"~
!J.
2
t:
'-. -.f _.~.
-!~~-.!.t
8 >b
b1
2
2
2.8d
punchingshear

! F1gure 4.11 Applicitron- oTPuncltrng Provisions In Non-Standard Cas~

.
: ,4.7.3.1 Loaded Area Remotefrom an Opening or a Free -Edge
,
,J (1) The outline of the critical sectionis the closedoutline of the minimum perimetersurroundingthe
': .! loadedarea. However, it neednot approachcloserto the loadedareathan lines located at a distance
" ,I 1.5d from that areaand parallel to its boundaries(seeFig. 4.12).

1.5d 1.5d

.,.
,,
"
,t
I

~ ..'" , ~ Remote.
"""-~4.12 Critical Section
F1gure . from a Free Edge

I 4.7.3.2 LoadedArea Qose to an Opening

(1) When openingsin slabsand footings (seeFig. 4.13) are located at a distanceless than 6d from
the edge of the concentratedload, then that part of .the perimeter which is enclosed by radial
projectionsfrom the centroid of the loadedarea to the openingsis consideredineffective.

(2) Where a single hole is adjacentto the column and its greatestwidth is lessthan one quarterof the
column side or one half of the slab depth, whichever1sthe lesSer,its presencemay be ignored.

4.7.3.3 Loaded Area Q'Oseto Free Edge

(1) In the vicinity of a free edge certainparts of the o\ltline defined for the caseof remote opening
or free edge shall be repla~edby perpendicularlines to thoseedgesif the resulting lengthdeveloped
.in this way, excl~dingthe free edges,is smallerthanthe length of the closedoutline wholly enclosing
the loaded area (seeFig. 4.14).

EBCS 2 -1995 51",i

.
i~:
 .
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.

n
t_- s 6d 'I.LI~L! I .

C ' t' I I
rllCO ~ I
section

Loaded:
~ r J--,
1 .5d
,
:
I

~ ~~ff8Ctive
,Op~in9

.Area I 1 I
I I
L J L L
For! > %

Replace l2 by '4~
Figure 4.13 Critical Section in the Vicinity of an Opening

_..:-_.1=~::~ Free Edge

8 ~
I I I
i I I
I I I
1 'I I
I I
1.5d--i ~ 1.5d
\ I '- ,L-- 1.5d
\ I , I
,/, " '" "
-
-/"- ...
"
/---
1.5d
Figure 4.14 Critical Sections Near Free Edges -

4.7.4 Applied Load Effect ~

(1) In the case of a centric load or reaction, the punching shear force V~ shall not exl::c;;d the
punching shear resistance VRdIor VRtIlgiven by Eqs. 4.36 or 4.37 as appropriate.

(2) In the case of an eccentric load or reaction, the applied load effect of tile puol;hing shear forl;e
V.tdwith eccentricity e shall be taken to be equal to that of an equivalent centric load V.q given by
Eq. 4.46.

V.q = ,BVSd (4.46)

where ,B = 1 + l1eudlZ
e is the eccentricity of the load or reaction with respect to the centroid of the critil.:al
section, always positive
Z is the section modulus of the critical section, corresponding to tile direction of the
eccentricity
11denotes fraction of moment which is considered transferred by eccentricity of the shear
about the centroid of the critical section
= 1/(1 + .J(b2IbJ
bl and b2 are sides of the rectangle of outline u, bl being parallel to the direction of the.
eccentricity e.

52 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994

,

,i .~

{
-CHAPTER 4: VL TIMA TE LIMIT STATES
---"
.~.. ~_\

(3) Conservatively, tite following values of fJ in (2) above may be used for flat slabs witit
-approximately equal spar.s and for footings:

(a) Interior column: fJ == 1.15

(b) Edge column: .6 = 1.40
(c) Corner column: .6 == i.SO

~. 7.5 Moment Transfer Between Slabs and Columns

(1) A fraction "7of the moment is assumed to be transferred by eccentricity of tite shear about the
centroid of the with
in accordance critical section. A.
Appendix The remaining
- moment shall be considered to be transferred by flexure

4.7.6 Resistance of Slabs or Footings Without Punching Shear Reinforcement

(1) The punching re.sistanceVRdlshall he given by Eq. 4.47.

VRoiI = 0.25/cldk1k2ud (4.47)

where k. = (\ + SOp) ~ 2.0

k; = 1.6 -d ~ 1.0 (d in mete,..- For members where more titan 50% oftite bottom
feinforcement is curtailed, k1 = 1
d -= (dx + d,)/2
P, = (p,-, + pry)li2 ~ 0.015
-{I,x anj J."ry correspond to tite g~)metric ratios longitudinal reinforcement parallel to x
and y, respectively
..d is th~ averag~ eff~ctive height in the x and y directions

4.7.7 Resistance of Slabs or Footings ~.ith Punching Shear Reinforcement

(I) The punching resistancc witit punching shear reinforcement VRd2shall be given by Eq. 4.48.

VRd2 = 1.6VRJI (4.48)

(2) The shear resistance of tite reinforcement may be calculated using Eq.4.33, where A~ is the sum
r of the areas of web reinforcement within tite I.:ritical perimeter.
i
4.7.8 Flat Siab~

(1) Flat slahs containing shear reint,)rl.:ement .'ihall have a minimum thickn~ss of 200 mm.

EBCS 2 -1995 53
,

"

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK] ..

...~.-"-.-

;~'
c

54
i

.CHAPTER 5
SERVICEABiliTY liMIT STATES
5.1 SCOPE

(1) This Chaptercoversthe commonserviceabilitylimit states.Theseare deflectioncontrol and crack

control.

Other limit states(suchas stressor vibration) maybe of importancein particular structuresbut these
are not coveredin this Code.

5.2 LIMIT STATE OF DEFLECTION

5.2.1 General

(1) The deflection of a structure or any part of the structure shall not adverselyaffect the proper
functioningor appearanceof the structure.

(2) This maybe ensuredeither by keepingcalculateddeflectionsbelow the limiting values in Section

5.2.2 or by compliancewith the requirementsfor minimum effective depthgiven in Section5.2.3.

5.2.2 Limits on Deflection

(1) The final deflection(including the effects of temperature,creepand shrinkage)of all horizontal
membersshall not, in general, exceedthe value.
L
() = ~ (5.1)

where, L. = the effective span

(2) For roof or floor constructionsupportingor attachedto nonstructurale1ements (e.g partitionsand

finishes) likely to be da.'11aged
by large deflections, that part of the deflectionwhich occurs after the
attachmentof the non-structuralelementsshall not exceedthe value.

() = -~L 20 mm (5.2)
350

(3) In any calculatiqnof deflections,the designpropertiesof the materialsand the designloads shall
be thosedefined in Sections3.4 and 3.5 as appropriatefor a serviceabilitylimit state.

5.2.3 Requirements for Effective Depth

(1) The minimum effective depthobtained from Eq. 5.3 shall be provided unless computationof
deflection indicates that smaller thickness may be used without exceedingthe limits stipulated in
-Section 5.2.2.

EBCS 2 -1995 55
 ETHIOPIANBlJlLDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE --- .

d = (0.4 + 0.6~)~ (5.3) .

400 .Ba

where /yt is the characteristic strength of the reinforcement (MPA).

L. is the effective span; and, for two-way slabs, the shorter span.
. .Ba is the appropriate constant from Table 5.1, and for slabs carrying partition walls
likely to crack, shall be taken as.Ba ~ 150lLo
La is the distance in meter between points of zero moments; and for a cantilever, twice
the length to the face of the support.

Table 5.1 Values of .Ba(Eq. 5.3)

Simply End Interior Cantilevers

Member Supported Spans Spans
Beams 20 24 28 10
Slabs
(a) Sp.anratio = 2: 1 25 30 35 12
(b) Span ratio = 1: 1 35 40 45 10

Flat slabs (based on longer span) 24 -

Note: For s a s With intermediate span ratios Interpolate mearly.

5.2.4 Calculation of Deflections .

(1) When calculating deflections, the effect of creep and shrinkage strains on the curvature,' and
thereby on the deflection, shall be considered. ~

5.2.4.1 ImmediateDeflections

(1) Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, deflections which occur
immediately on application of load shall be computed by the usual elastic methods as the sum of the
two parts 0; and OJ;given by Eqs. 5.4 and 5.5, but not more than Omaxgiven by Eq. 5.6.

M
OJ = .BL2ri (5.4)
cm I

0 = {JL2 M t -M cr
jj O.75E,A,z(d-x) (5.51

0 = {JL2 M tI
max E,A,z (d -x) (5.6)I

(2) Unless the theoretical moment which causes cracking is obtained by a more comprehensiveI
method, it shall be computed by .I
Mcr = 1. 70htk Z (5.7), I
.I

56 EBCS2 -1995 .
1
\

:
\
.
 -CHAPTER 5: SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES
-
where OJ is the deflection due to the theoretical cracking moment M", acting on the uncracked
transformed section.
Ojj is the deflection due to the balance of the applied moment over and above the cracking
value and acting on a section with an equivalent stiffness of 75 % of the cracked value.
0 is the deflection of fully cracked section
As is the area of the tension reinforcement
E"WI is the short term elastic modulus (tangent modulus) of the concrete (Table 2.5).
Es is the modulus of elasticity of steel
Ii is the moment of inertia of the uncracked transformed concrete section
Mi is the maximum applied moment at mid-span due to sustained characteristic loads; for
cantilevers Mi is the moment at the face of the support
Z is the section modulus
d is the effective depth of the section
x is the neutral axis depth at the section of maximum moment
z is the internal lever arm at the section of maximum moment
.8 is the deflection coefficient depending on the loading and support conditions
(e.g. .8 = 5/48 for simply supported span subjected to uniformly distributed load).
Note: The value of x and z may be determined for the service load condition using a modular ratio
of 10, or for the ultimate load condition.

5.2.4.2 Long Tenn Deflections

(I) Unless values are obtained by more comprehensive analysis, the additional long-term deflection
of flexural members shall be obtained by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by the sustained
load considered, computed in accordance with Section 5.2.4.1, by the factor

12 -1.2As'/As] ~ 0.6 (5.8)

-where As' is the area of compression reinforcement
As is the area of tension reinforcement

5.3 LI~IIT STATES Of CRACKING Y

5.3.1 General

(I) For reinforced concrete, tW() limit states of cracking: the limit state of crack formation and the
I imit state of crack widths are of interest.

(2) The particular limit state to be checked is chosen on the basis of the requirements t()r durahility
and appearance. Th~ requirements for durahility dep~nd ()n the conditions of ~xposur~ and th~
s~nsitivity of th~ r~inforc~ment t(1corrosion-

5.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement Arell.'i

(I);" assessing the minimum ar~a of reint()rc~ment r~quired to ~nsur~ c(lntr()lloo cracking in a
.memher or part (If a m~mh~r whi\.'h may be suhjected to tensile stress due to the restraint of imposoo
deformations, it is nec~ssaryt(" distinguish h~tween two possible mechanisms hy which such stress
may arise. The tW(1mechanisms are:

.EBCS 2 -7995 57
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(a) Restraintof intrinsic imposeddeformations-where stressesare generatedin a memberdue

to dimensional changes of the member consideredbeing restrained (for example stress
induced in a memberdue to restraintto shrinkageof the member).
(b) Restraintof extrinsic imposeddeformations-where the stressesare generatedin the member
consideredby its resistanceto externallyapplieddeformations(for ex~mplewhere a member
is stresseddue to settlementof a support).

(~) It is also necessaryto d.istinguishbetweentwo basictypes of stressdistribution within the member

at the onsetof cracking. Theseare:

'(a) Bending -where

of the section the tensile
remains stressdistributionwithin the sectionis triangular (i.e. somepart -
in compression).
(b) Tension -where the whole of the sectionis subjectto tensile stress.

(3) Unlessmore rigorous I;alculationshowsa lesserareato be adequate,the required minimum areas

of reinforcementmay be calculatedfrom the relation givenbe Eq. 5.9.

As = kcktcto.fAct
las (5.9)
where As is the area of reinforcement
Act is the area of concretewithin tensilezone. The tensile zone is that part of the section
which is calculatedto be in tensionjust before formation of the first crack.
as is.the maximum stresspermitted in the reinforcementimmediatelyafter formation of
the crack. This may be takenas 100%of the yield strengthof the reinforcement,/yt.
A lower value may, however, be neededto satisfythe crack with limits
!clot! is the tensile strengthof the concreteeffective at the time whenthe cracksmay first be
expectedto occur. In many cases,suchas where the dominantimposed defonnation
arises from dissipation of the heat of hydration, this may be within 3-5 days from
casting dependingon the environmentalconditions,the shapeof the memberand the
nature of the formwork. When the time of cracking cannot be established with
confidenceas being lessthan 28 days, it is suggestedthat a minimum tensile strength
of 3 MPa be adopted.
kc is a coefficient which takes accountof the nature of the stressdistribution within the
sectionimmediatelyprior to cracking. The stressdistribution is that resulting from the
combinationof effects of loading and restrainedimposeddeformation.
= 1.0 for pure tension
= 0.4 for bending without normal compressiveforce
k is a coefficient which allows for the effect of non-uniform self-equilibratingstresses

Values of k for various situationsare given below:

(a) tensile stressesdue to restraint of intrinsic deformationsgenerallyk = 0.8

for rectangularsectionswhen h ~ 300 mm, k = 0.8
h ~ 800 mm k = 0.5
(b) tensile stressesdue to restraint of extrinsic deformationsk = 1.0.

Parts of sectionsdistant from the main tensionreinforcement,suchas outstandingparts of a section

or the webs of deep sections, may be consideredto be subjectedto imposeddeformations by the
tension chord of the member. For such cases,a value in the range 0.5 < k < 1.0 will be
appropriate.

58 EBCS2 -1995 .

!'
 --CHAPTER 5: SERVICEABILITY
LIMIT STA~
(4) The minimum reinforcementmaybe reducedor evenbe dispensedwith altogetherif the imposed
deformation is sufficiently small that it is unlikely to cause cracking. In such casesminimum
reinforcementneedonly be provided to resistthe tensionsdue to the restraint.

5..3.3 Limit State of Crack Formation

(1) The maximum tensile stressesin the concrete.are calculatedunder the action of design loads
appropriate to a serviceability limit state and on the basis of the geometrical properties of the
transformeduncrackedconcretecrosssection.

(2) .Thecalculatedstressesshall not exceedthe following values:

(a) Flexure
U", = 1.70/"tk
(b) Direct tension
U", = J;tk (5.11)

(3) In addition to the above, minimum reinforcement in accordance with Chapter 7 shall be provided
for the control of cracking.

5.3.4 Limit St~te of Crack Widths

5.3.4.1 General

(1) Adequateprotection againstcorrosionmaybe assumedprovidedthatthe minimum concretecovers

in Section7.1.3 are complied with and provided further that the characteristiccrackwidths Wido not
.exceed the limiting values given in Table 5.2 appropriateto the different conditionsof exposure.

Table 5.2 Characteristic Crack Width for Concrete Members

Dry environment: Humid environment: Seawaterand/or aggressive
Interior of buildings Interior components chemicalenvironment: Compo-
Type of of normal habitation (e.g. laundries); exterior nents completelyor partially
exposure or offices components;componentsin submergedin seawater;com-
non-aggressivesoil and/or ponentsin saturatedsalt air;
water aggressive"industrialatmo-
(Mild) (Moderate) spheres (Severe)
Characteristic
crack width, Wk 0.4 0.2 0.1
(rom)

5.3.4.2 Cracks due to Flexure

(1) Checking of the limit state of flexural crack widths is generally not necessaryfor reinforced
concretewhere

(a) at leastthe minimum reinforcementgiven by Section5.3.2 is provided

(b) the reinforcementconsistsof deformedbars, and
.(c) their diameterdoes not exceedthe maximum values in Table 5.3.

.EBCS 2 -1995 59
EJ'H«)IIIAN BtaDlNO CODE STANDARD FqR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE --

Table 5.3 Maximum Bar Diameter for which Checking flexural Crack Width may be
~Ued
Wt = 0.4 mm w., = 0.2 mm

0'1~) ~ ,(mm) 0'1(MPa) <P(nlm)

I
1.6() 40 lro 25
,200 32 200 16
240 25 240 12
280 20 320 6
320 16 400 4
ere necessary meat mterpo .

In Table 5.2
0'1.istbe IteeI str~ Underservice condition
Wi is the pennitted characteristiccrack width

(2) If crack widths have to be calculat~. the following approximateequationsmay he used in the
aence of more accuratemethods
Wt = 1.7w. (5.12)

w.. == S_E- (5.13)

where Wi is the characteristiccrack width

w. is the meaDcrack width
s.. is the averagedistancebetweencracks
E- is the mean strain of the reinforcementconsideringth~ contribution of concrete in
tension. .

(3) The averagedistancebetweencracksmay be obtain~ from

s.. = 50 + 0.25K;jK;Zi (5.14)

Pr

where ~ is the bar diameter

":1 is a coefficient which characterizesthe bond propertiesof the bars
«I = 0.8 fordeform~ bars
«I = 1.6 for plain bars
«2is a coefficient representingthe influenceof the forD}of the stressdiagram
«2 = 0.50 for bending
«2 = 1.00 for pure tension
«2 = (fl + EJ/2El for bendingwith tension
EI. E2 are the larger andthe smallerconcretestrain.~,r.espectively.belowthe neutral axis
of the crack~ sectiongiven in Fig. 5.1.

60 EBCS 2 -1995
 .-CHAPTER 5: SERVICEASIUTY11MITSTATES

In Eq. 5.14, the coefficient Pr is defined as

AJ
Pr =- A
c.if

where AI is the area of ~e reinforcement contained in Ac..!

Ac..! is the section of the zone of the concrete (effective embedment zone) where the
reinforcing bars can eft.ectively influence the crac~ widths shown by the shaded area
in Fig. 5.1.
(al Beam

II d

(bl Slab

"7? 1'..-r"""",,"7".rrr.rrr~"...f
~~ ...11~".",.",.,.LesserOf25(C'./2) or (h-..i/3

.(cl Member in tension

.
.
.
Lesser Of 2.5 (c. -P/2)or t;'l

Figure 5.1 Definition of At..!

(4) The meall strain of the reinforcement may be obtained as

0' 0' 2 0'

E
""
= ~[1
E
-.B .B (~
I 2 0' ) ] ~ 0.4~
E (5.16)
J J J

where O'J is the service stress in the steel and may be obtained by elastic theory using modular
ratio equal to 10
O'rr is the steel stress at rupture of concrete section; i.e., stress for the cracked section
I under the action of the theoretical moment Mtr defined in Section 5.2.4.1
I. .Bj is a coefficient which characterizes the bond properties of the bars and is equal to
.Bj = 1.0 for high bond bars
.Bz= 0.5 for plain bars
.Bz is a coefticient representing the influence of the duration of the application or
.repetition of the loads.
.Bz = 1.0 at the first loading
.Bz ':= 0.5 tor sustained loads or for a large number of load cycles
.

EBCS 2 -1995 61
.,

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

5.3.4.3 Cracking due to Shear

(1) Checking of shear crack widths is not necessary in slabs and in the web of beams if the spacing
I of the stirrups does not exceed the values given in Table 5.4.
~
j Table 5.4 Maximum Spacing (mm) of Vertical Stirrups for which Checking of Shear Crack
I ,Width is Omitted
j
Wk(mm) 0.4 0.2
~

~ fyd (MPa) 220 400 360 500 220 400 360 500
i Bond Properties (1) (2) (1) (2) (I) (2) (I) (2)

300 250 200 ISO

250 200 ISO 100
200 ISO 100 75

In Table 5.4,
Wi is the permitted characteristic crack width
V.. is the shear acting during the combination under consideration
Vc is the shear resistance of concrete; Eqs. 4.29 and 4.30.

(2) If more precise data are available, then the widths of the shear cracks in the webs of beams can
be calculated for sustained loads by means of Eq. 5.13 together with the following equations:

W = 1.7K W (5.17)
i w '"

S.w. = 50 + 0.25KJKi-<p ~ d-x;

.
pr sma (5 . 18)
a V 2 a
f- = i[1 -(V)] ~ 0.4i (5.19)
I.. I

V -V 1
a = ..c. ~ 40 MPa
I b dp (sina + cosa). (5 20)

where w", is the mean crack width (see Eq. 5.12)

a is the angle of inclination of the stirrup from the horizontal
K", is a correction coefficient to take account of the effect of slope of the stirrups on the
spacing of the cracks.
K", = 1.2 for vertical stirrups (a = 90")
K", = 0.8 for inclined stirrups with a = 450 to 6<r
P'" is the geometric percentage of web reinforcement
x; is the height of the compression zone in the cracked sel.'tion

(3) When several adjacent bars in the same layer are bent in the same zone (for example, at the
corners of a frame), the diameter of mandrel shall be chosen with a view to avoiding crushing or .
splitting of the concrete under the effect of the pressure that occurs inside the bend (see Eq. 7.7).

--62 EBCS 2 -1995--

 J~
:~ 1,

6 .,f,

CHAPfER [!
I;
iJ

I SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS :1

I:
I. 6.1 SCOPE

(1) This chapter gives methods of analysis and design of special structural elements that in general
ensure that the objectives set out in Chapter 3 are met.
j

j
i (2) Other methods may be used provided they can be shown to be satisfactory for the types of
; structure or member considered.

(3) It is assumed that the ultimate limit state is the critical limit state.

I 6.2 WALLS

6.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Walls j

(1) A reinforced concrete wall is a vertical load-bearing member whose greatest lateral dimension is
more than four times its leaSt lateral dimension, and in which the reinforcement is taken into account
when considering its strength. For walls subjected predominantly to out-of-plane bending, the rules
for slabs apply.

(2) The requirements on minimum areas of reinforcement given in Chapter 7 shall be complied with.
.
(3) A reinforced wall shall be considered as either short or slender and as either braced or unbraced
as follows:

Short or Slender Walls: A wall may be considered short when the ratio of its effective height
to its thickness does not exceed 7. It shall otherwise be considered slender. ;
;
i Braced or Unbraced Walls: A wall may be considered as braced if, at right angles to the plane :\'
i of the wall, lateral stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or other suitable ,
i bracing designed to resist all lateral forces in that direction. It shall otherwise be considered as !'~

unbraced. J
"
(4) The overall stability of a multi-story building shall not, in any direction, depend on unbraced walls ,~f
alone. ~
f
f
6.2.1.1 Design of Reinforced Concrete Wails for Flexure and Axial Loads I

(1) Walls subject to combined flexure and axial load shall be designed under the provisions of Chapter I
4, unless designed in accordance with Section 6.2.2.

(2) The length of the wall to be considered effective for each concentrated load sh~ll not exceed the
.; center-to-center distance between loads, nor shall it exceed the width of the bearing olus four times
! the wall thickness. t

., ,
!
: EBCS 2 -1995 63 i
,~
i
I
I

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

--.
(3) Effective Height: The effective height Le of reinforced concrete walls in the non-sway mode shall
be determined from Eq. 6.1. .
L. = fJL (6.1)
where L is the story height of the wall
fJ is the coefficient defined in Eqs. 6.2 to 6.5

The
, following values shall be adopted for the coefficient fJ:
(1) Walls with two edges restrained :
fJ = 1.00 ~ (6.2)

(2) Walls with three edges restrained

fJ = 1 ~ 0.3
1 + (L/3b)' (6. 3)
;,-

(3) Walls with four edges restrained

fJ = 1 for L ~ b (6 4)
1 + (L/b)2 .

fJ = '- 1 for L > b (6.5)

2 (L/b)

where b is the width of the wall measured center-to-center of the bracing walls, or width
measured from the center of a bracing wall to the free edge.
...
6.2.1.2 Shear Resi5tance of Reinforced Walls

(1) Design for horizontal shear forces in the plane of the wall shall be in accordance with provisions
for beam in Section 4.5.3, with the following modifications:

(a) The effective depth d shall be taken as 0.8b

(b) Sections located closer to the base than a distance b/2 or L/2, whichever is less, be designed
for the shear at b/2 or L/2
(c) When the applied shear V.-l is less than V" /2, the minimum shear reinforcement required by
the provisions of Chapter 7 shall be provided.

(2) Design for shear forces perpendicular to the face of the wall shall be in accordance with
provisions for slabs in Section 4.5.3.

6.2.2 Plain Concrete Walls

(1) A plain concrete wall is a vertical load bearing concrete member whose greatest lateral dimension
is more than four times its least lateral dimension and which is assumed to be without reinforcement -
when considering its strength, irrespective of whether it is actually reinforced or not. The definitions
for a short or slender, or braced or unbraced wall given in Section 6.2.1 for a reinforced concrete.
wall shall apply also to a plain concrete wall.

64 EBCS 2 -1995 .
I
.6.2..2.1
CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL
Design of Plain Concrete Walls for Flexure and Axial Loads
ELEMENTS
I
'
I

(1) The simplified design -procedure given below may be used for plain concrete walls with I
.eccentricities of load in the plane of the wall of up to one-third the length of the wall and at right "J
angles to the wall of up to half the thickness of the wall. 1\,
"
1i
(2) The slenderness ratio A shall not exceed 100. t.,

(3) Effective Height: The effective height of plain concrete walls shall be determined from Eq. 6.1 I)
as for reinforced concrete walls. 11.

(4) Axial Load Capacity: Design axial load strength of plain concrete wall shall be computed from: t '
(a) Braced Walls: for short braced walls, the axial load resistance NRdis given by: !
:I~J..
i F
NRd = (1 -2e/h)Actd (6.6);! 1
'I." "

! !

where e is the resultant eccentricity of load at right angles to the plane of the wall (minimum I
value of O.OSh) 'I
h is the thickness of the wall J..
Ac is the cross-sectional area of the wall. 11 .{
u
~I
For slender braced walls, the axial load resistance is given by Eq.6.6 with the eccentricity e ,\
redefined and calculated as given below: )'
,...
!
c
e = 0'&0 + e2 (6.7)'"

where eo is the resultant eccentricity of load at right angles to the plane of the wall (minimum
.value of O.OSh).
~ e2 is the second order eccentricity is given by 0.4h(L./10h)2

(b) Unbraced Walls: The axial load resistance NRdis calculated at the top and at the bottom of
the wall using Eq. 6.7 but with e redefined and calculat~ as given below:

at the top:
1 e = eo! (6.8)
I :'
; ';
I at the bottom: ;~
e = e02+ e2 (6.9) i

i
where eo! is the first order eccentricity at the top of the Wall
e02 the first order eccentricity at the bottom of the wall
e2 is the second order eccentricity given by 0.4h(L./10h)2
! I
, i
, 6.2.2.2 Shear Resistance of Plain Walls !

I Design for shear resistance of plain walls shall be in accordance with the provisions for reinforced ~
., walls given in Section 6.2.1.2. 1

EBCS2 -1995 65
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

6.3 DEEP BEAMS

6.3.1 General

(1) Flexural members with span-to-depth ratios less than 2 for simple spans, or 2.5 for continuous .-
spans are defined as deep beams.

(2) Deep beams under a concentrated load may be designed using a simple strut and tie model.

(3) In some cases, e.g. lower depth/span ratios, distributed loads, more than one concentrated load,
, etc., models combining strut and tie action with truss action may be used.

(4) Continuous deep beams are sensitive to differential settlement. A range of support reactions,
corresponding to possible settlements, should therefore be considered.

(5) Design for shear effects shall be in accordance with Section 6.3.2.

(6) The detailing requirements of Chapter 7 generally, and Section 7.2.6 in particular, shall be met.

6.3.2 Dt'Sign for Shear

(1) These provisions apply to:

(a) Shear spans supporting a principal load as defined in Section 6.3.2.1 located at a distance Q"
not greater than twice the effective depth d.

I' (b) Shear spans not supporting a principal load or portions of beams supporting uniform loads
in which the distance IJ between the points of zero shear and the support is less than three
times the effective depth.

I (2) In each case, the beams shall be loaded on the top face and supported on the hottom face. For
I beams loaded by members framing into the sides, the load may he assumed to he applied at the U)p
of the supported member provided that reinforcement satisfying the requirements fi)r indirect supp()rts
given in Section 6.6.3 is provided.

(3) Beams supported on members framing into the sides may he a.~sumedU) he supported at the level
of the bottom of the supporting memher.

6.3.2.1 Definitions and Limitation

(I) For a given shear span, a principal load is a concentrated l()ad which causes 50 percent or more
of the shear at the support of that shear span.

(2) The shear span Q" shall be taken equal to the distance from the center of the principal IlIad U) the
center of the support. This span shall ru)t he more than 1.15 times the clear distanc:e fr()m the fac:e
of the load to the face of the support. The distance IJ shall he taken equal U) the distance t'r()m the
point of zero shear to the center of the support hut not more than 1.15 times the clear distance t'r()m
the point of zero shear to the face of the support.

66 EBCS 2 .1995
 ..,. -' .,"'"

CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS '[

.[I'
6.3.2.2 ShearStrength of Deep Shear Spans !

(1) The shear resistance of deep shear spans SRJshall be obtained as the sum of the resistances of the
coQcrete Vcdand the vertical and horizontal stirrups V, and V~, respectively. .

(2) The applied shear V sashall not exceed the'limit imposed by Eq.4.28.

6.3.2.3 Shear Carried by Deep Shear Spans

(1) For deep shear spans supporting a principal load,

(a) The shear resistance VRJshall be computed at aj2. The shear reinforcement required at this
section shall be used throughout the entire shear span.
(b) The shear force Vc carried by the concrete shall be taken as the value obtained from
Eq. 4.28 multiplied with
.B = a2d '2: 1.0 (6.10)
y

(c) The shear force V, transferred by vertical stirrups shall be given by

d
AJyd (ay -2) Aydfyd
V, = .)' ~ s- (6.11)
y y

(d) The shear force Vii transferred by horizontal stirrups shall be given by
3d
Avilfyd(T -ay) A viidfyd
Vii = ~ (6.12)
Sil Sil

where Ay is the area of vertical stirrl:lps

Aviois the area of horizontal stirrups
Sy is the spacing of the vertical stirrups (Sy ~ d/4)
Sil is the spacing of the horizontal stirrups Sil ~ d/3)

(2) Ay and Avil shall satisfy the minimum requirement given in Section 7.2.1.2

(3) For deep shear spans not supporting a principal load, the above provisions apply with ay /2
replaced by 1../3.

6.4 CORBELS

6.4.1 Definitionsand Limitations

(1) These provisions apply to corbels having a shear span to depth ratio avid of unity or less.

(2) The distance d shall be measured at a section adjacent to the face of the support, but shall not be
-taken greater than twice the depth of the corbel at the outside edge of the bearing area.

.-EBCS 2 -7995 67
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
6.4.2 Design .

(1) Corbels with 0.4d ~ ay ~ d may be designedusing a simple strut and tie model. .

(2) For deepercorbels (ay > d), other adequatestrut and tie models may be considered.

(3) Corbels for which ay > d may be designedas cantileverbeams.

, (4) Unless special provision is madeto limit horizontal forces on the support, or other justification
is given, the corbel shall be designedfor the vertical force Fy, and a horizontal force Hc ~ 0.2 Fy
.acting at the bearingarea.

(5) The effective depth d of the corbel shall be determinedfrom considerationsof shear (see
Section4.5).

(6) The local effects due to the assumedstrut and tie systemshould be consideredon the overall
design of the supportingmember.

-tle-
u
(7) The detailing requirementsof Chapter7 generally,and Section7.2.7 in particular, shall be met.
av

,;S"/

/~
l
Fy

-- Hc

hc

Figure 6.1 Example of a Corbel with a Strut and Tie Model

6.5 FOOTINGS

6.5.1 Moment in Footings

(1) The external momenton any sectionof a footing shall be determinedby passinga vertical plane
through the footing, and computingthe momentof the forces acting over the entire areaof the footing
on one side of that vertical plane.

(2) The critical sectionfor momentshall be taken as follows:

(a) At the face of column, pedestal,or wall, for footings supportinga concretecolumn pedestal
or wall
(b) Halfway betweenmiddle and edgeof wall, for footings supportinga masonrywall.
(c) Halfway betweenface of column andedgeof steelbasefor footings supportinga column with .
steel baseplates.

68 EBCS 2 -1995
 I',
.' r

CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

6.5.2 Flexural Reinforcement

(1)Distribution: In one-wayfootingsand two-way squarefootings, reinforcementshallbe distributed

uniformly acrossthe entire width of footing.

(2) In two.;wayrectangularfootings, reinforcementshall be distributed as follows:

(a) Reinforcementin long direction shall be distributed uniformly acrossthe entire width of
footing.
(b) For reinforcementin the short direction, a portion of the total reinforcementgiven by Eq.
6.13 shall be distributed uniformly over a band width (centeredon centerline of columnor
pedestal)equal to the length of the short side of footing. The remainderof the reinforce-
ment required in the short direction shall be distributed uniformly outside the centerband
widm of the footing.
Reinforcementi~ b~d w~~th. = -..?:.- (6.13)
Total reinforcement in ~hort direction {3 + 1

where {3is the ratio of long side to short side of footing.

(3) Anchorage: If the projection of the footing from the critical section for moment defined in
Section6.5.1 does not exceedthe effective depthd at that section,the bottom reinforcementshall be
provided with full anchoragelength measuredfrom the end of the straight portion of the bars.

(4),If the projection exceedsd, the anchoragelength may be measuredfrom a sectionsituated at a

distanced from the abovedefined critical sectionfor moment.

6.5.3 Shear in Footings

(1) Design of footings for shearshall be in accordancewith provisionsfor slabs in Section4.5.

(2) The location of the critical sectionfor shear in accordancewith Section4.5 shall be measured
from face of column, pedestalor wall for footings supportinga column, pedestal,or wall.

(3) For footings supportinga column or pedestalwith steelbaseplates, the critical section shall be
measuredfrom the location defined in Section6.5.1.

6.5.4 Bearing
(1) All forces and momentsapplied at the baseof a columnor pedestalshallbe transferredto the top
of the supporting pedestalor footing by bearing on concreteand by reinforcement.

(2) The design bearing strength on concrete shall not exceedthe designcompressivestrength!cd'
exceptas follows:
(a) When the supportingsurface is wider on all sidesthan the loaded area, the design bearing
strength on the load area may be multiplied by v(A;iA;)but not more than 2.

.EBCS 2 -1995 69
 --~,

ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARDFOR STRUCTURALUSEOF CONCRETE .

(b) When the supportingsurfaceis slopedor stepped,A2 may be takenas the area of the lower
baseof the largest frustrum of a right pyramid or cone containedwholly within the support
and having for its upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of 2 vertical to 1
~ horizontal.

In the aboveA1 is the loaded area, and Az is the maximumarea of the portion of the supporting
'surface that is geometricallysimilar to and concentricwith the loadedarea.

6.5.5 Minimum Footing Depth

(1) The depth of footing above bottom reinforcementshall not be lessthan 150 rom for footings on
soil, nor 300 rom for footings on piles.

6.5.6 Plain Concrete Pedestalsand Footings

(1) The maximumcompressivestressin plain concretepedestalsshall not exceedthe concretebearing

strength given in Section6.5.4.

(2) Plain concretefooting may be usedprovided thatthe projection of the footing beyondthe critical
sectiondefined in Section6.5.1 does not exceedhalf the thicknessof the footing at that section.

(3) Flexural designstressesin plain concreteshall not exceed1.70fc/d' .

(4) Shearand punching shall be checkedin accordancewith Sections4.8 and 4.10. -

(5) Plain concrete shall not be usedfor pile caps.

(6) The depthof plain concretefootings shall not be less than 200 mm.

6.6 PILE CAPS

6.6.1 Moment in Pile Caps

(1) Section6.6.1 shall apply to pile capsalso.

6.6.2 li1exural Reinforcement

(1) Distribution: The bottom reinforcementmay consistpartly of bars placed in strips betweenthe
piles.

(2) Anchorage: The reinforcementshall alwaysbe arranged,n such a way that adequateanchorage
is provided beyond the axial plane of the piles. .

(3) This may be deemedto be satisfied if the tensileforce in the reinforcementcrossinga pile, within
a width of 3 pile diameters, is not less than the pile reaction, assumingthe reinforcementis fully.
stressed
.

..
'70 E~ -' ~ 1-9-95
 .

CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

6.6.3 Shear

(1) Computationof shearon any sectionthrough a pile cap shallbe in accordancewith the following: ;

(a) The total reaction

the section shall befrom any pileaswhose
considered ~en~er
producing is located
shear on thathalf pile diameteror more out-side
section. t ~~
"
(b) Reactionfrom any pile whose centeris loc~ed half pile diameteror more inside the section
shall be consideredas producingno shearon that section.
(c) Eorintermediate positionsof pile center, linear interpolationbetween(a) and (b) above may
be assumed.

6.6.4 Footings on Two Piles

(1) Secondary reinforcement distributed horizontally and vertically is required only for footings
resting on only two piles, in considerationof one-waydeepbeam action of suchfootings.

(2) The amount of the secondary reinforcementto be provided shall be as for deep beams (see
Section6.6:2):

6.6.5 Minimum Thickness

(1) The thickness'of pile abovethe bottom reinforcementshall not be lessthan 300 mIn.

6.7 PARTICULAR CAS~

6.7.1 Local Forces

(1) When a local compressivestressis applied at the end of a structural memberor the intersection
of two structural members, transversereinforcementcapableof resisting the resulting transverse
tensile stressesshall, in general, be provided. However, this requirementmay be waived provided
the dispersion of the pressure is not steeperthan 2 vertical to 1 horizontal as stipulated in
Section6.7.4.

(2) Whentransversereinforcementis provided, it shallbe evenlydistributedover a distancemeasured

perpendicularto area Ai betweenO.1~ and~; ~ being the side length of are.aA2 measuredin the
direction of the d;spersionof the local force (seeFig. 6.2).

(3) The transversetensile force may be obtainedfor two-()rthogonaldirectionsas:

Ntd = O.3F,,(1 --) ai (6.14)
a2

where F" is the local force

.ai is the side length of area Al measuredparallel to ~ (seeFig. 6.2).

-6.7.2 Concentrated Forces

(1) Where one or more concentratedforces act at the end of a memberor at the intersectionof two
structural members, local supplementaryreinforcementshould be provided capableof resistingthe
.transverse tensile forces causedby theseforces.

EBCS2 -1995 71
c ~
..III.I.i,!.?"
;
C
!;~~
-
c ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

, °2 .1

1- 02,
Figure 6.2 Distribution of the Transverse Force

6.7.2 Concentrated Forces

(1) Where one or more concentrated forces act at the end of a member or at the intersection of two
structural members, local supplementary reinforcement should be provided capable of resisting the
transverse
,
tensile forces caused by these forces.

(2) This supplementary reinforcement may consist of links or of layers of reinforcement bent in the
shape of hair pins.

(3) For a uniform distribution of load on area AcD' (Fig. 6.3), the concentrated resistance force can
be determined as follows:

F Rdu= --~~- ~ 3.3tdAcD (6.15)

v/A:JA:

where AcDdenotes the loaded area

Acl denotes the maximum area corresponding geometrically to AcD' having the same
center of gravity, which it is possible to inscribe in the total area AcI situated in the
same plane as the loaded area.

If Ac and Acocorrespond geometrically and have the same center of gravity: Acl = Ac.

The value of FRduobtained from Eq. B.20 should be reduced if the load is not uniformly
distributed on area ACDor if it is accompanied by large shear forces.

This method applies to post-tensioned members and does not apply to the anchorages of
prestressing tenqons (Section B.4.2.1).
6.7.3 Bursting Forces .

(1) Concentrated bursting forces which occur when there are major changes in the direction in which -
internal forces act as in frame joints, for example, shall be resisted by additional suitably anchored
reinforcement (see Fig. 6.4).

72 EBCS 2 -1995 .
 ,'..'

.: ,
'
I

~ CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

"
..;I;~ Ac,

Ac

AcO

plan view
figure 6.3 Definition or the Areas to be intr~duced in Eq.B.l

6.7.4 Indirect: Supports

(1) The junction betweena bearing beam or girder and supportedbeam is defined as an indirect
support.

(2) The reinforcementneededfor the transmissionof the load from the beam to the girder may be
determinedby truss analogy.

(3) The hanging or transmissionreinforcement shall normally be calculatedfor the total reaction
acting at the support but may be reduced in the ratio of hl/~ if the heighthI of the supportedbeam
is smaller than the height ~ of the girder provided that the top surfacesof the two beamsar6 at the
same level (seeFig. 6.5). No reduction shall be made when loads are suspendedat the lower part
':,' of a member. Fe
..c', R ..c:::~::J R
'-0;;;::= c
~

(0)

R-t{rF:C F:

1-;-';- ) ~

~
.( b)

figure 6.4 Examples or Bursting Forces

EBCS 2 -1995 73
r: !

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(4) Transmission reinforcement shall be composed preferably of stirrups surrounding the main
.
reinforcement of the girder. The stirrups shall be distributed in tIle girder within a distance O.5h1on
~ either side of the beams.
~
t (5) The ma~n reinforcement in the supported beam shall be placed above that of the girder.
f \

I I

~ i!,! i,

)I,

I,

I ,,

(b)
Mutual
R taction

h I. (c)

Fi~ure 6.5 Exampl~ of an Indirect Support

""-
74 EBCS 2 -1995
.
 ~,.".,.';"Tc"""'--,

\
i
!
:'
\

1 CHAPTEi:t 7 i\

DETAILING PROVISIONS
7.1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT

7.1.1 General

(1) The mechanical and bonding properties of the reinforcement shall meet the requirements of the
specified standard.

7.1.2 Bending of Bars

(1) The t:ninimum diameter to which' a bar is bent shall be such as to avoid crushing or splitting of
the concrete inside the bend of the bar, and to avoid bending cracks in the bar.

(2) The minimum diameter of the mandrel used shall be at least equal to the minimum specified for
the bend-rebend test of the reinforcement.

(3) For bars or'.'-;fires, the minimum diameter of the mandrel used should be not less than the values
given in Table 7.1.

TabLe 7.1 -Minimum Diameter of Bend

Bar size Main Reinforcement Stirrups and Ties

c;i>~ 16 5c;i> 4c;i>

16 < c;i> ~ 25 6c;i> 6c;i>

25 < c;i> 32 8c;i> -

c;i>> 32 lOc;i> -

(4) When several adjacent bars in the same layer are bent in the same zone (for example, at the
corners of a frame), the diameter of mandrel shall be chosen with a view to avoiding crushing or
splitting of the concrete under the effect of the pressure that occurs inside the bend (see Eq. 7.7)

7.1.3 Concrete Cover to Reinforcement

(1) The concrete cover is the distance between the outer surface of the reinforcement (including links
and stirrups) and the nearest concrete surface.

(2) A minimum concrete cover shall be provided in order to ensure:

(a) the safe transmission of bond forces;

-(b) that spalling will not occur;
(c) an adequate fire resistance;
(d) the protection of the steel against corrosion.

EBCS 2 -1995 75
 t

.
(3) The protection of reinforcement against corrosion depends upon the continuing presence of a .
surrounding alkaline environment provided by an adequate thickness of good quality, well-cured
concrete. The thickness of cover required depends both upon the exposure conditions and on the
concrete quality.

(4) The minimum concrete cover required for the criterion in (3) above shal\first be determined; This
shall be increased by an allowable (Ah) for tolerances, which is dependent.on the type and size of
\
structural element, the type of construction, standards of workmanship and quality control, ~d
detailing practice. The result is the required nominal cover which shall be specified on the drawings.

(5) To transmit bond forces safely, and to ensure adequatecompaction, the concrete cover, to the b~
or tendon being considered, should never be less than: .

(a) <Por <Po

(~ 40 mm), or
(b) «p + 5 mm) or «Po + 5 mm) if dB > 32 mm

where <Pis the diameter of the bar

<Pois the equivalent diameter for a bundle
dBis the largest nominal maximum aggregate size.

~ (6) The minimum concrete cover to all reinforcement including links and stirrups should not be less
j than the appropriate values given in Table 7.2.

J Table 7.2 l"\l1inimum Cover Requirements for Concrete Members -

I Dry environment: Humid environment: Seawaterand/or aggressive

I Interior of buildings Interior components chemicalenvironment: Compo-
t
Type of of normal habitation (e.g. laundries); exterior nents completely or partially sub- .
exposure or offices components;componentsin merged in seawater;components
.non-aggressive soil and/or in saturatedsalt air; aggressive
water industrial atmospheres
(Mild) (Moderate) (Severe)
..Minimum
.cover 15 25 50
4 (mm)
4

.(7) Where surface reinforcement is used, the cover should either comply with (6) above, or protective
measures should be taken (e.g. protective coatings); in any case, the minimum cover shall not be less
than 20 mm.

(8) The allowance (Ah) for tolerance will usually be in the range of 0 mm < Ah < 5 mm, for
precast elements, if production control can guarantee these values and if this is verified by quality
control. The allowance will be in the range of 5 mm < &z < 10 mm for insitu reinforced concrete
construction.

(9) For concrete cast against uneven surfaces, the minimum covers given in Table 7.1 should -
generally be increased by larger allowances for tolerances. For example, for concrete cast directly
against the earth, the minimum cover should be greater than 75 mm; for concrete cast against -
prepared ground (including blinding) the minimum cover should be greater than 40 mm. Surfaces
having design features, such as ribbed finishes or exposed aggregate, also require increased cover.

76 EBCS2 -1995 .
~
 "" -1
-" CHAPTER 6: DETAILING PROVI51 1 ,~
(10) The nominal cover shall alwaysbe at leastequal to the diameterof the bar cpand in the caseof I
.bundles to the size of a single bar of equivalentarea given by Eq. 7.1. :.
cp .cp .{ri" (7.1)
1 .~ .,r
where cp. is the effective diameterof the bundle I:

cp. is the diameterof bars forming the bundle

.I n is the numberof bars in the bundle
.:
,;;~ .(11) The required minimum coversgiven in Table 7.1, as Inodified to allow for tolerances,may be
insufficient for fire protection. Particular requirementsfor fire resistanceare given in the National
Building Code.

7.1.4 Spacing of R,einCorcement

(1) The spacingof bars shall be suitablefor the proper compactionof concreteand when an internal
vibrator is likely to be used,sufficientspaceshallbe left betweenreinforcementto enablethe vibrator
to be inserted.
(2) The maximumaggregatesize d, shouldbe chosento permit adequatecompactionof the concrete
round the bars.
f;~ (3) The clear horizontal andvertical distancebetweenbars shallbe at leastequal to the largestof the
'".J .
,~ followmg values:
',,;
(a) 20 mm
(b) The diameterof the largestbar or effective diameterof the bundle
(c) The maximumsize of the aggregated, plus 5 mm

(4) Where bars are positionedin separatehorizontal layers, the bars in eachlayer should be located
vertically above eachother and the spacebetweenthe resulting columnsof bars should permit the
.passage of an internalvibrator.

(5) Lappedbars may touchone anotherwithin the lap length.

(6) Maximum distancebetweenbars shall comply with the requirementsof Section7.2.

7.1.5 Bond

7.1.5.1 Design Bond Strength

(1) The designbond strengthfwdependson the type of reinforcement,the concretestrengthand the

position of the bar during concreting.

(2) The bond conditionsare consideredto be good for:

(a) All bars which are in the lower half of an element

(b) All bars in, elementswhosedepthdoes not exceed300 mm
-(c) All b2IS which are at least300 mm from the top of an elementin which they are placed
(d) All bars with an.inclination of 450to 90" to the horizont.alduring concreting.

EBC5 2 -1995 77

.
 ETHIOPIAN
(3) For goodBUILDING CODE STANDARD
bond conditions, FO~strength
the design bond STRUCTUR-;-;~~~
~ of plain bars OF
mayCONCRETE~
be obtained from Eq. 7.2

fiNi = fctd (7.2)

(4) For deformed bars twice the value for I:>lainbars may be used.

(5) For other bond conditions, the design bond strength may be taken as 0.7 times the value for good
bond conditions.

7.1.6 Anchorage of Reinforcement

0) All reinforcement shall be properly anchored at each end with due consideration for the effect of
arch action and shear cracks.

(2) To prevent bond failure, the tension or compression in any bar at any section due to ultimate loads
shall be developed. on each side of the section by an appropriate embedment length or end anchorage
or a combination thereof. Hooks may be used in developing bars in tension.

7.1.6.1 Basic Anchorage Length I

(1) The basic anchorage length is the embedment length required to develop the full design strength
of a straight reinforcing bar.

~ (2) The basic anchorage length lb for a bar of diameter <I>is:

j
I -<I> ~d
i b -4. ~ (7.3)II

7.1.6.2 Required Anchorage Length .

I (1) The required anchorage length lb,"" depends on the type of anchorage and on the stress in tile

reinforcement and can be calculated as: .

A
lb,ner = albT ~ lb.min (7.4)
s...!

where As.caJis the the<Jretil;alarea of reinf(Jrl;ement required oy the dt.:sign

As...! is the area of reint(Jrl;em~nt actually provided'
a = 1.0 for straight bar anl;h(Jrag~in t~nsion or I;(Jmpr~ssi(m
= 0.7 for anl;horag~ in t~nsitJn with th~ standard h()()ks (JfFig. 7.2
lb.""" is the minimum anl;h()rage length

(2) F(Jr oars in tensi()n,

lh""", = 0.31b ~ 10<1>
()r ~200mm (7.))

(3) F()r oars in 1;()mpressi(Jn,

lh""", = O.(J/h ~ 101>

()r ~ 200 mm (7.(,) -

78 EBCS 2 -1995

~
 '/""""',c ""c.c"C~""""'.i'.C'
." -..CHAPTER 6:DETAILlNQ PROVISIONS. !

i ~ :I
I i
j

"'- -F:
t ~
\- /,b,net~_~ ~

iT.
AI
W,) .(b)

a~~_~
I.
!
},b,net I ~

Figure 7.1 Standard Hooks

7.1.6.3 Additional Requirementsfor Loops

(1) In order to prevent concretefailure in the plane of a loop anchorage,the diameterof the mandrel
used must satisfy Eq. 7.7.
cp C1sd
d ~ (0.7 + 1.4-)-cp (7.7)
s 1.51c"

where C1
sd is the stressin the bar at the start of the bend
s is the smallerof:
-the spacingbetweenthe loops
-the cover c increasedby half the diametercp

7.1.6.4 Ties and Stirrups

(1) The type of anchorageused shall not induce splitting or spalling of the concretecover.

(2) Anchorageby hooks (1350to 1800)is required for plain bars.

(3) Anchorageby bends (900to 1350)is only allowed for deformedbars.

(4) The required anchorageIb,MIshall be measuredfrom the mid-depthof the member.

.
EBCS 2 -1995 79

.
,

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

-

7.1.6.5 Laps and Joints .

(1) The length of lap 10shall be at least equal to: .

10 ~ aJb,Ml ~ lo,m (7.8)

where lo,m = 0.3aaJb ~ 15~

or ~ 200 mrn
~ Ib'Mland a are given in Section 7.1.6.2.
al is a function of the percentage of the reinforcement lapped at anyone section as given
in Table 7.3. Lapped joints are considered to be at the same section if the distance
between their centers does not exceed the required lap length.

Table 7.3 Values of al for Eq. 7.8 and 7.9

Distance Between Two Distance to Nearest Percentage of Reinforcement Lapped

Adjacent Laps Surface Within Required Lap Length

a b 20% 25% 33% 50% 100%

I a ~ 10~ and/or b ~ 5~ 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
a > 10~ and b > 5~ 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

, (2) The lap length 10shall be at least equal to the basic anchorage length lb'

(3) The percentage of lapped bars in compression in anyone section may be 100% of the total steel
cross section.

(4) The separation of the bars at the joint shall be as small as possible and shall not exceed 4~ except
in slabs and walls. The distance between two adjacent laps shall be equal to: .

(a) In the transverse direction: 2~ ~ 20 mm (clear distance).

(b) In the longitudinal direction: 1.510 (center-to-center distance)

(5) Transverse forces in lapped joints shall be checked where

(a) ~ ~ 16 mm, or
(b) the joint affects more than one-half of the total area of the bars.

7.1.6.6 Additional Rules for Defonned Bars of Large Diameter (cp > 32 mm)

(1) Bars of Diameter ~ > 32 mm shall be used only in elements of thickness at least equal to 15 <p.

(2) When large bars are used at relatively wide spacings, skin reinforcement is requiroo for adequate
crack control.

(3) The design bond strengthfw from Section 7.5.1 shall be reducoo by the factor:
.132 -cp
(7
9) -

'7 100 .

where ~ is in mm.

80 EBCS 2 -1995
 .CHAPTER -- 6: DETAILING PROVISIONS

(4) As a generalrule only straight anchorageor mechanicalanchorageis allowed. ,; i;

."
I~ ,I
(5) Lap joints are not allowed at-joints. !! tt
ii,.
7.1.6.7 Additional RIdesfor BundledBars f

(1) For design. bundles of bars containingn bars having the samediameterare replacedby a single ~.
notional bar having the samecenterof gravity. and an equivalentdiameter: {
cPft .<Pfii ~ 55 mm (7.10)

where n is the number of bars in a bundle. which mustbe limited to

n ~ 4 for vertical bars in compressionand for bars of a lappedjoint
n ~ 3 for all other cases.

(2) The equivalentdiameter cPft

is takeninto accountin evaluatingthe minimum cover. However. the
cover provided shall be measuredfrom the actual outside contour of the bundle.

(3) The anchora~esof the bars of a bundle can only be straightanchorages.

(4) The anchorageof a bundle is dependentupon the anchorageof the individual bars.

(5) The anchoragesshall be staggered; for bundles of 2. 3. or 4 bars the staggering shall be
respectively. 1.2, 1.3 or 1.4 times the anchoragelength of the individual bars.

(6) Joints can be made on only one bar at a time but at any sectionthere shall be no more than four
bars in a bundle. The laps of the individual bars shall be staggeredin accordancewith Section
7.6.7.3

7.1.7 Curtailment of Longitudinal Flexural Reinforcement

7.1.7.1 StaggeringRule

(1) The tensile force diagram or M/z diagram for a flexural membershall be obtained by dividing
the momentdiagram by the appropriatelever arm z and displacingthe resultingcurves horizontally
by the amountsa, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
;

I.
(2) The displacementa, dependson the spacingof potential shearcracksand maybe taken asfollows.
in the absenceof more accuratedetermination:

(a) Members without shear reinforcement(e.g slabs) a, = 1.Od

(b) memberswith V.J < 2V. a, = O.75d
(c) memberswith V.J ~ 2V. a, = O.5Od

where V.Jis the applied designshearforce.

-(3) Near points of zero moment, a, ~ d shall be takenfor both positive and negativemoments.

EBCS2 -~1
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

: i ir=:::::=1:
I .
==
,
I
I
I I
I
I
L,.."...,c.., , I
~,f~~j'" '" I I
e

,
p line

envelop of the
~'L ' acting tensile
'I;. -' force

~
: diagram of the
I ! : I r..lttlng tensile
.I force

Figure 7.2 Tensile Force Diagram

7.1.7.2 Anchorage Length of Reinforcement

(1) Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required to resist tension
for a length given by:

(a) Ib according to Eq. 7.3, or

(b) Ib".., ~ d according to Eq. 7.4 provided that in this case, the continuing bars are capable
of resisting twice the applied moment at the section.

(2) The anchorage length of bars that are bent up as shear reinforcem~nt shall be at least equal to
I.3/b".., in zones subjected to tension and to 0.7/b.,..,in zones subjected to compression.

7.1.7.3 Anchorage of Bottom Reinforcement at Supports

(3) At least one-quarter of the positive moment reinforcement in simple beams and one-half of the
positive moment reinforcement in slabs shall extend along the same face of the member into the
support.

(4) The anchorage of this reinforcement shall be capable of developing the following tensile force F,.
at
F, .VJd- ~ 0.5VJd (7.11)
d

(5) The anchorage length is measured from:

(a) The face of the support, for a direct support

(b) A plane inside the support located at a distance of 1/3 the width of the support from the face
of the support, for an indirect support.

(6) The anchorage length of the bottom reinforcement at intermediate supports shall be at lea.'it 10</>.

82 EBCS 2 -1995
.CHAPTER 6: DETAILING PROVISIONS J
;i
7.2 DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ,~
.I. :
7.2.1 Beams I i
(
!'
7.2.1.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement 1;i~
:;
(1) The geometrical ratio of reinforcement p at any section of a beam where positive reinforcement if
is required by analysis sha11not be less than that given by \:
06 "l
Plnin-.j;~(
-_
.I: (7 .12) !"I:'~i;';
,L
VA
t,! ...
!It Ii
" C
c,~
v.
..'
where hk is in MPa. :i
!;"
(2) In T -beams and joists where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed for this purpose , It
using width of web. ,~i
t,!
(3) The maximum reinforcement ratio P..- for either tensile or compressive reinforcement shall be }; Ii
0 04 ' "t
..: :.;:
~f$
7.2.1.2 Shear Reinforcement :j}r!
kj;
(1) All beams, except joists of ribbed slabs, shall be provided with at least the minimum web ~t(
reinforcement given by: I~
-04 P = ~ (7 .13)
,;~'I
",,1nIn
fyk "1'
. ~"
where /yk is in MPa. ~

(2) The maximum spacing Sw=betweenstirrups, in the longitudinal direction, shall be as given below: "
.2 ~
Smax= 0.5d ~ 300 mm If V.oct~ "3VRD (7.14) f
,
"
:
2 l
Smax = 0.3d ~ 200 mm if V.oct> -V Rd [[
3 (7.15) !lor'
"

(3) The transverse spacing of legs of stirrups shall not exceed d, or 800 mm, whichever is the :
smaller. ,
j

7.2.1.3 Torsional Reinforcement f

(1) The minimum web reinforcement given by Eq. 7.2 shall be provided in the form of closoo stirrups
for the case of torsional reinforcement.
c,
t!
J
i ,
(2) The spacing of the stirrups shall not exceed Utl/S" i
-(3) The longitudinal bars required for torsion shr...!be distributed uniformly around the perimeter of ~i
the closed stirrups at a spacing not exceeding 350 mIn. r;
i
-(4) At least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each corner of the closed stirrups. !i
{i
"'I
EBCS 2 -1995 83 r
 :;:.-
",
-,~ '.
,'"
, !: '.
I .1
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
4
7.2.2 Slabs
,
I 7.2.2.1 Thickness

:~:,
(1) The following minimum thicknesses shall be adopted in design:

(a) 60 rom for ~labs not exposed to concentrated loads (e.g inaccessible roofs)
, (b) 80 rom for slabs exposed mainly to distributed loads.
(c) 100 mm for slabs exposed to light moving concentrated loads (e.g slabs accessible to light
motor vehicles)
.(d) 120 rom for slabs exposed to heavy dynamic moving loads (eg. slabs accessible to heavy
vehicles)
(e) 150 rom for slabs on point supports (e.g flat slabs)

7.2.2.2 Flexural Reinforcement

(1) The ratio of the secondary reinforcement to the main reinforcement shall be at least equal to 0.2.

(2) The geometrical ratio of main reinforcement in a slab shall not be less tha-'!.:
0.5
P",;,. = -;:- (7.16)
Jyt

where ht is in MPa.

(3) The spacing between main bars for slabs shall not exceed the smaller of 2h or' 350 rnm.

(4) The spacing between secondary bars shall not exceed 400 mm.

7.2.3 Hollow or Ribbed Slabs

7.2.3.1 Sizes

(I) Ribs shall not be less than 70 mm in width; and shall have a depth, excluding any topping, of not
more than 4 times the minimum width of the rib. The rib spacing shall not exceed 1.0 m.

(2) Thickness of topping shall not be less than 40 mm, nor less than 1/10 the cleat. distance between
ribs.

7.2.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement

(3) The topping shall be provided with a reintl)rcement me-~hproviding in each direction a cross-
sectional area not less than 0.001 of the section of the slab.

(4) If the rib spacing exceeds 1.0 m, the topping shall be designed as a slab resting on ribs,
considering load conceritrations, if any.

(5) The web-flange connections shall be checked in accordance with Section 4.5.5. -

84 EBCS 2 -1995
. 1t,~Z
.CHAPTER 6: DET A/LING PRO \,'/S/ONS

"1.2.3,] Tramvers~ Ribs

,.
.:
(1) Transverse ribs shall be piavided if the span of the ribbed slab exceeds 6.0 m. J'\
ii !
I i
(2) When transverse ribs are provided, the center-to-center distance shall not exceed 20 times the .II,
,)verall depth of the ribbed slCib. ; :ji
i.,
(3) The transverse ribs shall be designed for at least half the values of maximum moments and shear !
force in the longitudinal ribs. ;

..
7.2.4 Columns :

1.2.4.1 Size

(1) The minimum lateral dimension of a column shall be at least 150 mrn.

7,2.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement

(1) The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 0.008Ac nor more than 0.08Ac' The
upper limit shall be observed even where bars fJverlap.

(2) For columns with a larger cross-section than rcquired by considerations of loading, a reduced
effective area not less than one-half the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement
:md design strength.

(3) The minimum numb~r of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be 6 for bars in a circular arrangement
and 4 for bars in a rectangular arrangement.

(4) The diameter of longitudinal bars shall not be less than 12 mrn.

'; .2.4.3 Lateral Reinforcement

(I) The diameter of ties or spirals 5hall not be less than 6 mrn or one quarter of the diameter of the
longitudinal bars.

(2) '!be center-to~center spacing of lateral reinforcement shall not exceed:

(a) 12 times the minimum diameter of longitudinal bars.
(b) least dimension of column
(c) 300 mrn

(3) Ties shall be arranged such that every bar or group of bars placed in a corner and alternate
longitudinal bar shall have laterai support provided by the corner of a tie with an included angle of
not more than 1350and no bar shall be further than 150 mm clear on each side along the tie from
such a laterally supported bar (see Fig. 7.3).
". I.

.(4) Up to five longitudinal bars in each corner may be secured against lateral buckling by means of
the main ties. The center.to--center distance between the oute!"most of these bars and the corner bar
shall not exceed 15 times the diameter of the tie (sf'~ Fig. 7.4).

-
-'

: S = 350 mm
t (5) Spirals or circular ties may be used for longitudinal bars located around the perimeter of a circle.
1 The pitch of spirals shall not exceed 100 mm.

i." -EBCS 2. 1995 8S

 /, -~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL

-~~--~ USE OF CONCRETE
~ .
Equal or less than 150 mm

Equal or .
an 150 :nm

May be ~reater than 150 mm

No intermediate tie required

Figure 7.3 Measurements Between Laterally SUDDorted Cnhlmn Bars

~I. Longitudinal bars
ctlt. Main ties

Intermediate
E tIe
E
0
0
~
"
..4: -
C
VI

~18~\~ ~ 500 mm oo!

Figure 7.4 Requirements for Main and Intermediate Ties

7.2.5 WALLS

7.2.5.1 Sizes

(1) The thickness of load bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 of the unsupported height or width,
whichever is shorter, nor less than 150 mm.

(2) The overall thIckness of panel and partition walls shall not be less than 1/30 of the distance
between supporting or enclosing members, nor less than 100 mm.

7.2.5.2 Veltical Reinforcement

(1) The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than O.OO4A,nor more than O.04Ac. The .
upper limit shall be observed even where bars overlap.

(2) For walls with a larger cross-section than required by considerations of loading, a reduced
effective area not less than one-half the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement
aOOdesign strength.

86 EBCS2 -1995 -
r 1

(3) The diamd;erof vertical bars shall not be lessthan 8 mm. !..
,,'

..-(4) The s~ing of vertical bars shall not exceedtwice the wall thicknessnor 300 mm. \,

7.2.5.3 Horlr.olltal Reiiiforctmellt ~\j

~ 1-
(1) The area of horizontal reinforcement shall not be less than one-half of that of the vertical illJ':r
reinforcement. I, :!'

-(2)The spacingof horizontal bars shall not exceed300 mIn. The diameterof horizontal bars shall
00t be lessthan one quarter of that of the vertical bars. ..f\,

(3) Horizontal reinforcementshall;enclosethe vertical reinforcement. The horizontal bars shall be

tied to the vertical bars so as to form a rigid mat. '
~:
til'I
1

7.2.5.4 TransJ'erse Reinforctmen! .~j R

(1) The matsat the two facesof a wall shall be connectedto eachother by at least 4 transverseS-ties ~
per m2. when the diameterof the vertical reinforcementis 16 rom or greater. it'

(2) If the area of required reinforcementexceedsO.OU.. then ties as required for columns (see

Section7.2.4.3) shall be provided.

7.2.6 Deep Beams ;

.7.2.6.1 11aidness tI

j.c:
.(1) The thicknessof deep beamsshall not be lessthan 100 rom. ' :!

i 7.2.6.2 Supplementary Reinforcement

i
;
,
(1) To supplementthe main reinforcement,one layer of meshreinforcementshall be provided near
eachface of deepbeams. The minimum percentageof reinforcementof eachmeshin eachdirection -

shall be givenby:
0.3
P- = 7; (7.17)

wherefyt is in MFa.
(1) The spacingbetween adjacentbars shall not exceedtwice the thickness of the deep beam or

300 mIn.

EBCS 2 -1995 87
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

7.2.7Corbels
(1) The reinforcement, correspondingto the ties consideredin the designmodel (Section6.4), should
be fully anchoredbeyond the node under the bearingplate by using V-hoops or anchoragedevices
unlessa length Ib./It,is available betweenthe node and the front of the corbel. The length Ib./It,should
be measuredfrom the point where the compressionstresseschangetheir direction.

(2) In corbel with hc ~ 300 mm, when the area of the Qrimaryhorizontal tie AJis such that
O.4A Iii
, AJ ~ f (7.18)

(where Ac is the sectional area of the concrete in the corbel at the column), then closed stirrups,
having a total area not less than O.4AJ'should be distributed over the effective depthd in order to
cater for splitting stressesin the concretestrut. They can be placed either horizontally (Fig. 7.5(a)
or inclined (Fig. 7.5(b)).

Fy Fy
As looped

stirrups
~ Q.4As

stirrups
! 0.4 As

Fi~ure 7.5 Reinforcement of a Corbel

88 EBCS 2. 1995
,.-- -, ,\

.CHAPTER 8 I'
.MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP \
:~

IIi'
I'
8.1 SCOPE If;
,.
'1
(1) This Chapterprovides minimum specificationrequirementsfor materialsand for the .standardof
workmanshipthat must be achievedon site in order to ensurethatthe designassumptionsin this Code
Ii
ii:,.~!
are valid and hencethat the intendedlevels of safetyand of durability will be attained. Th'1 .
"It '
(2) This Chapter is neither intended as, nor extensive enough for, a contract document. II: ;.
!.~'.!
8.2 SPECIF1CATION OF CONCRETE i~.i:
if: \
8.2.1 Methods of Specifying Concrete j,!
l~j
(1) Concretemay be specified in one of three ways: "i ~!'
~I,
I-C

, (a) ~igned mix~: limits

with any other Withthat
thismay
method the required
be required, compressive
such strength
as maximum is specified,
aggregate together
size, minimum ).:,;!
cementcontent, and workability, ~f
(b) Pr~cribed mixes: With this method,the designerassumesresponsibilityfor designingthe f
mix and stipulates to the producer the mix proportions and the materials which shall be '
\
\
employed. ~
.(c) Standard (or Nominal) mixes: The mix proportionswhich are appropriatefor gradesC5 to l
C30 may be takenfrom Table 8,1. Thesestandardmixes which are rich in cement,and are I
intendedfor use where the cost of trial mixes or of acceptancecure te.stingis not justified,
.may be used without verification of compressivestrengthby testing.

(2) The limitation on constituentmaterialsgiven in Section8,2.2 shall be compliedwith.

8.2.2 Constituent Materials or Concrete

8.2.2.1 Cement
(1) The cementusedshallbe Portlandor Portland-Pozzolana
cementcomplyingwith the requirements
of the latestEthiopian Standards'onsuchcements.

(2) Where cementsother than thosecomplying with thesestandardsare used, accountshall be taken
of their propertiesand any particular conditionsof use.

8.2.2.2Aggregates
(1) In general agireiates shall comply with the requirementsof the latestEthiopian Standard~for
aggregates.

8.2.2.3 Water
-(1) M!xing water shall be clean and free from harmful matter.

EBCS 2 -1995 89

--'"
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
! 0 -
,d II') 11')- 11')0 1I')t"--
OJ) OIl')N 11')11')- 011')0\
.-.9 I I 0 1 -t"-- I -II') 1 0
:I: Nil')' -II') .-II') .
~ ~O ~O ~O
-
0
e II') 0 0 0
3 N Oll')t"-- Oll')~ 01l')8i
' :a.9 I I ~I~_'~(XJI-
4) NO .NO .-0 .
~ ~ ~O ~O ~O
.w
C
e
OJ
OJ ~
0
10
000
Oll')g II')II')~ Oll');g
U .-.9 I I N 1 -0\ 1 -t"-- I -
:I: NO .-0 .-0 .
0 ~O ~O ~O
= r.-,
=~ -
Ot) 'ot"
Ot) e g II') II') II')
~.= II') ~ ~ 0 ~ g II') ~ ~
= -0.9 I I II') 1 -N I -0\ 1 -.
IrJ 4) Nil')' Nil')' -II')
~ ~ ~~. r.-,0 r.-,° r.-,0
C x.
~ OJ
~ ~ <::>
C ~ 0 0 0 II') II') II')
C,J ~
= ~,- -Oll')~
0 (XJ 1 N Oll')~1 -II')
(XJ O~~1 --1 1I')~r;:-.
-0\ O~~1 -
).. U :I: -~II')O NII')O NII')O NII')O -11')0
0 r.-, r.-, r.-, r.-, r.-,
II')
~ =
~ ~ 0
~ = N .
0 "g
'. ~ e o
II') 0 t"-- 0 (XJ 0 10 0 t"-- 0 ~
O).w .= 0 II') t"-- 0 II') t"-- 0 ~ II') 0 ~ r.-, 0 ~ N
...r-'J -0.9 ~IN NI- (XJI- ~I- -1-
~ 4) 11')11') .r.-,1I') .NO .NO .NO ..
~ t' ~ RI r.-,° r.-,° r.-,° r.-,o r.-,o
Q. =
~ ..g .
(J ~ 0
O ,d -N II') II') 0 0 0
O ~II') O ~r.-, O ~II') ~t"-- ~t"--
~ .-0
OJ)
II') 1 N
t"--
r.-, 1 (XJ
-t"-- 1 II')-~ 0
1 r.-,--I II')
-N
.E :I: -11')0 .r.-,o .NO .NO .NO .
0 r.-,° r.-,0 r.-,° r.-,0 r.-,0
~ 10
.~ ~
~ ~ 0
10 II')N II') 11')11') 1I')t"-- II')~
'0 .-0 ~ -0 ~ 8 II') r.-, 10 II') r.-, ~ II') r.-, r.-,
~ -0.9 ~ ,~ t"-- 1 N 0 ,- 10 ,- r.-,1-
= 4) 100 r.-,o. r.-,o .NO .NO .
] ~ ~ r.-,0 r.-,° r.-,0 r.-,° r.-,°
.w
=
r-'J
-..,..,..,..,~, " " "
~ " e e e e e
OJ ~--- ..'U § 'U 'U 'U 'U
:0 .~ ~ oS -.-~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~
r- i ~ ~
Co &-0
.-E:
=-
1)
---u
OJ),,
~~o
C
---u
OJ),,
~~o
C
---u
~~o
~ ---c
---u
~~o
OJ)---C
---u
041---C
~~o
..&J -~ -.-u -.-u -.-u -.-u -.-u
~ .'" ~ 'U 'U 'U 'U 'U
1 ~ ~ ...~ ..~] ..~~ ..~~ "iG~~ -~~
~ 0 °'U OJ)~,d ~~,d ~~,d ~~~ ~~,d
, ~ cI\ OJ) '" 041 '" ~ '" OJ) '"
OJ) ~ .~.! ~ ~'a ~ ~ 'a ~ ~'a ~ ~'a ~ ~ 'a
0':: 8 ~Oj)~ ~~~ ~Oj)~ ~04I1o.: ~04I1o.: .
Zo ;::Ii «'0 «'0 «'0 «'0 «'0
3'U~ 3'U~ '3'U~ 3'U~ 3'U~
0 .9 0 0.9 0 0.5 0 0.9 0 0.9 0
f-u..> f-u..> f-u..> f-u..> f-u..>
u
-u
~ ~ II') II') 0 II') 0
u ~ -N N r.-,
8 0 u u u u u .
u
90 EBCS2. 1995 .
 .,,'

CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALSAND WORKMANSHIP

.
8.2.2.4 Admixtures
..
(1) Suitable admixtures may be used in concrete mixes, in special cases, with the prior approval of
the engineer. i"
il;

(2) Many admixtures are highly active chemicals and may impart undesirable as well as desirable
pro~erties
particular, to th~Increase
may concrete;
theth:ir
risk suitability. shall generally be verified by trial mixes. Chlorides, in
of corrosion.
lli.
\r:~~~
111
t';: !
I
8.2.3 Composition or the Concrete m,l
1" II
I f'

1, i.:\

(1) The choice of the constituents and of their mix proportions shall be such as to satisfy requirements 1~:
"j
concerning: j~li'
~"
(a) The properties of the fresh concrete (see Section 8.2.4 to 8.2.6) ~
(b) The specified properties of the, hardened concrete (strength or other limit requirements, see
Section 8.2.1)
(c) The durability, taking account of the conditions of exposure. In particular, the total content ~,~
of deleterious substances shall be restricted. I:
f'.'

8.2.4 Requirements or Fresh Concrete t.

fj.
2 4 1 1~' '-ahiltty
8 ..."orA .r r.
,~
;..

(1) The workability of the fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the conditions
.of handling and placing so that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills
the formwork.

8.2.4.2 Temperature
..

(1) Where the minimum dimension of concrete to be placed at a single time is greater than 600 mm !
and especially where the cement content is likely to be 400 kg/m3 or more, measures to reduce the
temperature, such as the selection of a cement type with a slower release of heat of hydration shall
be considered. In exceptional cases other measures to reduce the temperature or to remove evolved ;1
heat may be necessary. f
f
8.2.5 Hot Weather Concreting I
(
8.2.5.1 General ~

(1) Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and
wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in
abnormal properties. The effects of hot weather are most critical during periods of rising
temperature, falling relative humidity, or both.

(2) Hot weather introduces problems in preparation, placing, and curing cement concrete that can

l
'
adversely affect tl1~ properties and serviceability of the hardened concrete.

8.2.5.2 Placing of Concrete

(1) If concrete temperatures as placed are expected to be abnormally. high, preparation shall be made
to place, consolidate and finish the concrete at the fastest possible rate. :

.EBCS 2 -1995 91
,
"',
1"':' :;,
",(
 , ,-'"
I

-'

(2) For best assurance of good results with concrete placing in hot weather, the initial concrete
.
placement should be limited between 25°C and 40°C. Every effort shall be made to keep the concrete
temperature uniform. ..

(3) Under extreme conditions of high ambient temperature, exposure to direct rays of t.~e sun, low
relative humidity, and wind, it is suggestedto restrict concrete placement to late afternoon or evening.

8,2.5.3 Curing of Concrete

,
(1) In hot weather there is great need for continuous curing, preferably by water. The need is
gr,eatestduring the first few hours, and throughout the first day after the concrete is placoo.

(2) In hot weather, forms shall be covered and kept moist. The forms shall be loosened, as soon as
this can be done without damage to concrete, and provisions made for the curing water to rtJDdown
inside them. During form removal, care shall be taken to provide wet cover to newly exposed
surfaces to avoid exposure to hot sun and wind. At the end of the prescribed curing period (10 days
is recommended), the covering shall be left in place without wetting for at least four days, so that the
concrete surface will dry slowly and be less subject to surface shrinkage cracking.

8.2.6 Minimum Cement Content

(1) One of the main characteristics influencing the durability of any concrete is its permeability,

(2) With strong, dense aggregates, a suitably low permeability is achieved by having a sufticil;ntly
low water/cement ratio, by ensuring complete compaction of the concrete, and by ensuring suftl'::.ient
hydration of the cement through proper curing methods. .

(3) The cement content shall be sufficient to provide adequat~ workability with low water/cement ratio.
so that the concrete can be completely compacted with the means available.

(4) Tahle 8.2 gives the minimum cement ~l)ntent required and maximum nt:t water/l.:em~nt ratio
re~l)mmended, when u5ing a partil:ular size of aggregate in Pl)rtland I:emt:nt I:l)nl:rete, to pro...ide
a~~eptahle durahility under the apprl)priate ~l)nditions l)f eXpl)$Ure.

(5) ~rh~ cement I.:llntent~in Table 8.2 may be redu~~d by 20kg/m:l when trial mixes have verifi~ that
a Cl)nl.:retewith a maximum net wat~r/~ement ratil) nl)t greater than that given for the particular
conditil)n. can he I.:l)n~i~tt:ntly prl)duct:d and that it i~ ~uitahle fl)r the cl)nditil)ns l)f plai:ing and
i:ompactil)n.

8.2.7 Muximum Cement Cuntl'nt

(I) Cem~nt I.:ontl.:nt~in t:XI.:~~~ l)f 550 kg/m:l ~hall ",It be u~ed unle~s ~pel.:ialconsid~ratil)n has b~en
givt:n in d~~ign tll th~ ini:rt:iI~l.:dri~k l)f I:ral:king du~ tl) drying shrinkage in thin ~~I;til)n~l)r to thermal
~trt:~!\I.:!\in thii:kl.:r !\I.:i:tilln~.

92 EBCS2. 7995
 ~ 1!
CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP !i
,
,
!'f; r Table 8.2 Minimum Cement Content per mJ or Concrete to Ensure Durability under
.' .-Specifi~ Conditions or Exposure
Reinforced Concrete Plain Concrete

Nominal Maximum Size Nominal Maximum Size

Exp<)su~ of Aggt'Cgate Max of Aggregate Max
w/c w/c
40 30 20 10 40 30 20

Mild: E.g. Completely pro-

tectedagainstweather, or
aggressiveconditions, except
for a brief period of exposure
to nonnal weather conditions
during construction 230 260 280 300 0.65 220 230 260 280 0.70

Moderate: E.g. Sheltered

from severrain. Buried
concreteand concrete contin- .
uous under water 270 300 330 350 0.55 230 260 290 310 0.60

Sever: E.g. Exposedto sea

water, driving main alternate
wetting and drying. Subject
to heavy condensationor
comJsive fumes
330 420 0.45 0.50

~'!J 8.3 SPECIFICATION OF REINFORCEMENT

8.3.1 Basic requirements

(1) Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.6 to 2.10 of this Code,
Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of the latest Ethiopian Standards for
reinforcement.

(2) Only steel specified in the design documents may be used as reinforcements.

8.4 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION RULES

8.4,1 General

(1) The supervision employed shall be such as to ensure the required standard of control over
materials and workmanship. The engineer shall be afforded all reasonable opportunity and facility
to inspect the materials and the manufacture of concrete and to take any samples or to make any
tests. All such inspection, sampling and testiIlg shall be carried out with the process of manufacture
and delivery.

8.4,2 Handling and Storage or the Materials used Cor Making Concrete
iJ~
8.4.2.1 Cement

-(1) Cement shall be transported and stored in clean containers and protected from moisture both in
transit and during storage.

; (2) Provision shall be made to prevent accidental mixing of different types.

-

. EBCS 2 -1995
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

8.4.2.2 Aggregates
(1) Aggregatesshall be handled and stored so as to minimize segregationand contaminationwith
undesirableconstituents. Separatestoragefacilities with adequateprovision for drainage shall be
provided for eachdifferent nominal size of aggregateused.

8.4.3 Batching and Mixing

,
(1) The mixing shall be carried out in such a way that the constituentmaterials are uniformly
distributed and the mixture has uniform workability.

(2) The quantity of cement,the quantity of fine aggregateand the quantitiesof the various sizes of
coarseaggregatesshall be measuredby weight exceptthat aggregatesmay be measuredby volume
for Class II Concreteor for standardmixes.

(3) The batch weights of aggregatesshall be adjustedto allow for a moisture contenttypical of the
aggregatesbeing used.

8.4.4 Transporting, Placing and Compacting

(1) Concreteshallbe transportedfrom the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicableby methods
which will prevent the segregationor loss of any of the ingredients, and maintain the required
workability. It shall be depositedas nearly as practicablein its final position to avoid rehandling.

(2) All placing and compactingshall be carried out under the direct supervisionof a competent
memberof the contractor's (or manufacturer's)staff. Class I concreteof gradesC20 and aboveshall
be compactedby using vibrators.

(3) Concrete shall be placed soon after mixing and thoroughly compactedduring the operation of
placing. It shall be thoroughly worked aroundthe reinforcement,tendonsor duct formers, around
embeddedfixtures and into corners of formwork to form a solid massfree from voids.

(4) Care shall be taken to avoid the displacementof re~nforcementor movementof formwork and
damageto faces of formwork.

(5) The depth of lift to be concretedshall be determinedby the contractoror the manufacturerin
consultationwith the engineer.

(6) In order to avoid segregation,the free fall of concretemassshall be restrictedto a maximum of

three metersunlessthe systemof placing concreteis approvedby the designer.
(7) When vibrators are usedto compactthe concrete,vibration shall be applied continuouslyduring
the placing of eachbatchof concreteuntil the expulsionof air has practically ceasedand in a manner
which does not promote segregationof the ingredients.

(8) The mix shall be such that there will not be excesswater on the top surface on completion of
compaction.

8.4.5 Construction Joints

(1) The number of constructionjoints shall be kept as few as possible consistentwith reasonable
precauti(;t..,againstshrinkage. Concretingshallbe carried out continuouslyup to constructionjoints.

94 EBCS 2 -1995
 .-CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANS~

(2) Where it is necessaryto introduceconstructionjoints, careful considerationshall be given to their

. :
:
exactlocation, which shall be indicatedon the drawings. Alternatively, the location and details of
joints shall be subject to the agreementbetweenthe engineerand the contractorbefore any work
commences. Constructionjoints shallbe at right anglesto the generaldirection of the member.and
shall take due accountof shearand other stresses.
I (3) Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concreteclose to the joint. The surface
of concreteconstructionjoints shallbe thoronghlycleanedandlaitanceremoved. Immediatelybefore
new concreteis placed, all constructionjoints shall be wetted and standingwater removed.

! 8.4.6 Formwork

':!."iI:&~ 8.4.6.1 Basic RequiremenJs

1~".
",. c'
,'i~~ \ (1) Formwork and falsework shall be designedand constructedso that they are capableof resisting
,,:; i all actionswhich may occur during the constructionprocess.They shall remainundisturbeduntil the
..1 concretehas achieved sufficient strengthto withstand the stressesto which it will be subjectedon
;} , stripping or release, with an acceptablemargin of safety.

(2) The.formwork and falsework shall be sufficiently stiff and tight to ensurethat the tolerancesfor
the structure are satisfiedand that its loadbearingcapacityis not affectedandto preventloss of grout
or mortar from the concreteat all stagesand for the appropriatemethodof placing and compacting.

(3) The gene1:allay-outof the formwork shallbe suchthatthe correctplacingof reinforcementas well
as correct compactionof the concreteis possible.

(4) The formwork and the falsework shall be designedand erected by suitably trained persons.
Supervisionand control shall be suchas to ensurethat the erectionis completedin accordancewith
the drawings and specifications.
(5) The formwork shall be capableof being removedfrom the concretewithout causingshock or

damage.
(6) Where necessary,the camperbuilt into the formwork shouldbe that required by the designerof
the structureand falsework.
(7) Ground support for the falsework should also be constructedby suitably trained personnelin
accordancewith the drawings and specifications. Deformations and displaceIilentsimposed by
prestressingshould be taken into accountin the designof the falsework.

(8) Joints betweenthe panelsof the formwork shouldbe adequatelytight.

(9) The internal surface of the formwork must be clean. Approved mould-releaseagentsshould be
applied in continuous and uniform layers on the internal surface and the concreteshould then be
placedwhile these agentsare still effective. Any possibledetrimentalinfluence of theseagentson the
concretesurfacehas to be takeninto consideration.

(10) Formwork spacersleft in the concreteshould not impair its durability or appearance.

~.
'c EBCS 2 -1995 95

I .~
'r~
 (1) The fonnwork shall be designed and constructed so that there is no loss of fines, or blemish of
the concrete surface.

(2) Where a particular grade or ty-pe of finish is required for practical or aesthetic reasons, the
requirements shall be specified directly or by reference to appropriate national or international
, documents or by sample surfaces.

8.4.6.3 Temporary Work Inserts

(1) Temporary works inserts may be necessary to assist in maintaining formwork,

reinforcement or ducts or other similar items, in place until the concrete has hardened.

(2) Such inserts shall not introduce unacceptable loading on the structure, shall not react harmfully
with the constituents of the concrete or reinforcement, and shall not produce unacceptable surface
blemishes.

8.4.6.4 Removal of Fonnwork and Falsework

(1) The formwork shall be removed slowly, as the sudden removal of wedges is equivalent to a shock
load on the partly hardened concrete.

(2) Thf- time at which forrnwork and falsework is removed shall be determined by consideration of.
the following criteria:

(a) The stresses that will be induced in the concrete when the formwork/falsework has been'
removed;
(b) The concrete strength at the time of removal;
(c) The ambient climatic conditions and the measures available to protect the concrete once the
formwork is removed;
(d) The presence, or otherwise, of re-entrant angle formwork, which should be removed as soon
as possible, while complying with other iemoval criteria.

(3) The formwork shall not be removed before the structure has gained enough strength to safely
carryall the possible loads. The time at which formwork is struck will be influenced by the
following factors:

(a) concrete strength

(b) stresses in the concrete at any stage in the construction period
(c) curing (Section 8.4.7)
(d) subsequent surface treatment requirements
(e) presence of re-entrant angles requiring formwork to be removed as soon as possible after
concrete has set to avoid shrinkage cracks.

(4) Provided the concrete strength is confirmed by tests on cubes stored as far as possible under the
same conditions, formwork supporting cast-in-situ concrete may be removed when the cube strength
is 50% if the nominal strength or twice the stress to which it will th;en be subjected whichever is
greater, provided that such earlier removal will not result in unacceptable deflections such as due to
shrinkage and creep.

96 EBCS 2 -1995
 CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP :

(5) The time between casting and removal of the formwork de r

developmentof the concreteand on the function of the formwork. In the absenceof more accurate :
data, the following minimum periods are recommended:
(a) For non-load bearingparts of formwork
(e.g. vertical formwork of b~; formwork for columnsand walls) 18 hours
(b) For soffit fo~work to slabs 7 days
(c) For props to slabs 14 days
(d) For soffit formwork to beams 14 days
(e) For props to beams 21 days

(5) Where sliding or climbing formwork is used, shorterperiodsthan thoserecommendedabovemay

be permitted.

8.4.7 Curing

(1) The methods of curing and their'duration shall be such that the concretewill have s~tisfactory
durability anq strength and the member will suffer a minimum of distortion, be free of excessive
efflorescenceand will not cause,by its shrinkage,undue cracking in the structure.

8.S REINFORCING STEEL CONSTRUCTIONRULES

8.S.1 Transport, Storage and Fabrication of the Reinforcement

(1) Steelreinforcing bars, welded meshreinforcementand prefabricatedreinforcementcagesshall be

transported,stored, bent and placed in position so that they do not suffer anydamage.

(2) The surface condition of the reinforcementshallbe examinedprior to use, to ensurethat it is free
from deleterioussubstanceswhich may adverselyaffect the steel or concreteor the bond petween
them.

(3) Reinforcing steel shall be cut and bent in accordancewith appropriateinternationalor national
standards.

(4) The following should be avoided:

(a) Mechanicaldamage(e.g. notchesof dents);
(b) Rupture of welds in prefabricatedreinforcementcagesand in welded fabrics;
(c) Surface depositsdamagingbond properties;
(d) Lack of identification of reinforcement;
(e) Reductionof the sectionthrough corrosion, beyond certainpermissiblelimiting values.

8.S.2 Surface Condition

Reinforcementshall not be surroundedby concreteunless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders,
looserust, loose mill scale,greaseor any other substancewhich canbe shownto affect adverselythe
steel or concretechemically, or reducebond.

8.5.3 Welding

(1) Welding must only be carried out on reinforcing steel that is suitable for welding.

(2) Welding connections must be made and checked by persons suitably trained in welding of
reinforcement.

EBCS 2 -1995 97
",~

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(3) Welding shallbe used in accordancewith internationalor national standards.

(4) Where a risk of fatigue exists,the weldingof reinforcementmustconform to special~equirements

as given in relevantstandards.
",/
'"
(5) The production and checking of the welded connections shall comply with the relevant
requiremen~ in internationalor nationalstandards.

(6) Welding methodspermittedinclude:

(a) electric flash welding;
(b) electric resistancewelding
(c) electric arc welding (with coatedelectrodesor under a protective gas envelope);
(d) high pressuregas welding.

8.5.4 Joints
(1) The lengili and position of lappedjoints ~hallbe in accordancewith the designand the drawings.
If the bar lengthsdeliveredto the site do not conform with the drawings, thenmodificationsshall only
be introducedwith the apPi'OVal of the designeror of the supervisoryauthority.

(2) -In general, reinforcing bars shall not be welded at or near bends in a bar.

j 8.5.5 Fabrication, &sembly and Placing or the Steel

, (1) The assemblyof the reinforcementshallbe robust enoughto ensurethat the bars do not shift their
I prescribed position during transportation, placing and concreting. The specified cover to the
reinforcementshall be maintainedby the use of approvedchairs and spacers.
-'~

(2) The tolerances required for the fiXing of reinforcement shall be as given in Section 8.2.
Alternatively, they shall be statedin the contraCtdocuments.

(3) Bendingshouldbe carried out by mechanicalmethods,at constantspeedwithoutjerking, with the

aid of mandrelsso that the bentpart hasa constantcurvature. If the ambienttemperatureis .towerth_an
a specifiedvalue, additional precautionsmay b:eneeded.

{4) The reinforcementshallbe securedagainstany displacementandthe position of the reinforcement

shall be checkedbefore concreting.

(5) In areasof conge$tedreinforcement, sufficient spacingof the bars shall be provided to allow
proper compaCtionof the concrete.

8.6 TOLERANC~

8~6.1 General

(1) In order to ensurethe requiroopropertiesof the structure,the tolerancesmust be clearly defined

before constructionwork starts.

(2) For durability reasons,independentlyfrom the defined tolerances,the cover to reinforcements

shall Dotbe less than the minimum values given in Section7.1.

(3) The dimensionsgiven on the working drawingsshall be observedwith the appropriatetolerance.

EBCS 2 -1995
 .. CHAPTER
8: MATERIALS
ANDWORKMANSHIP
8.6.2 Tolerances with regard to Structural Safety
~
(1) The following permitteddeviations~ with respectto the nominal cross sectionaldimenSionl' can
.(except for concretecover, see Section8.6.3 below) be regardedas admissibleon the basis of the
partial safety coefficients'rF and 'rAias given in Sections3.5.3.1 and 3.6.1, respectively.

(2) In relation to the dimensionsof the concretesection(total depthof a beam or of a slab, widtli of
a beam or web, lateral dimensionsof a column) and in relation to the effectivedepth:

for 1 ~ 150 mm
~ = :I: 5 mm (8.1).

for 1 ~ 400 mm
..~ = :I: 15 mm (8.2)
:.
h'
1":
~ for 1 ~ 2500 mm
~ = :I: 30 mm (8.3)

with lin~ interpolationfor other values of I.

(3) Tolerancesother than those defined in (1) above can also be specifiedprovided that it can be
demonstratedthat they do not reducethe required level fo safety.

8.6.3 Tolerances for Concrete Cover

(1) For the tolerancesof concretecovetto reinforcement,e.g. the differencebetweenthe nominal and
the minimum cover, Section7.1 (8) applies. No positive permitted deviation is specified.

8.6.4 Tolerances for Construction Purpos~

(1) For other purposes,e.g. constructionor dimensionaltolerancesin buildings as a whole, stricter

tolerancesthan defined is Section8.6.2 may required. Thesevalues should be specified separately
from this Code. For the maximum sag of slabs, however Section5.2.2 (1) and (2) apply.

EBCS2 -1995 ~
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

..

.
.
,
100 EBCS 2 -1995
 "~"-"c:c

.CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL

,
J QUALITY
CHAPTER
CONTROL
9

9.1 DEFINITIONS

(1) Quality Control: Comprises a combination of actions and decisions taken in compliance with
! specifications and checks to ensure that these are satisfied. Quality control consists of two distinct,
I but intercoriDected parts, namely production control and compliance control.

(2) Production Control: Comprises a combination of actions and decisions taken during production
, to check the operation and to obtain a reasonable assurance that the specifications will be satisfied.
'I
' (3) Compliance Control: Comprises a combiLation of actions and decisions, in accordance with

;; compliance rules adopted in advance, to check the compliance of the product with the specifications.

9.2 PRODUCTIONCONTROL

9.2.1 Inspection of Materials

-(1) Inspection of materials on site shall be made at delivery to check compliance with the
specifications and the requirements of this Code (Chapter 8).

.9.2.2 Inspection Prior to Concreting

(1) This inspection shall be made to check:

, (a) the rigidity of the scaffolding and shuttering

i (b) the leak-tightness of joints between formwork elements
r (c) conformity of the dimensions of the formwork with the drawings
; (d) the cleanliness of the formwork
: (e) the surface condition of the reinforcement

!i
i
(f) the position and size of reinforcement
(g) the rigidity of the reinforcement securing systems, and the quality of the joints between bars.

9.2.3 Control of Mixing, Transportation and Placement of Concrete

(1) The accuracy of the mix proportions shall be checked regularly. The consistency of the fresh
concrete shall be checked periodically with the slump test.

(2) During concreting, checks shall be made on the deformations of the formwork and its supporting
.structure and on any leakage of water.

-9.2.4 Control for Curing the Concrete

(1) It must be checked that curing complies with approved method curing depending on the
environment and on any special requirements.
.

.EBCS 2 -1995 101

 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

9.2.5 Information of Construction Procedures

(1) A site book shall be kept and for large structures, it shall contain the following information:

(a) dates on which concreting and stripping of formwork has taken place
(b) acceptance of materials and components
(c) results of tests and measurements
, (d) concrete mix used (type and origin of cement and aggregates)
(e) inspection and measurement reports of the positioning of reinforcement
(t) important instructions received
(g) description of any incidents.

9.3 COMPLIANCE CONTRO~

9.3.1 Compliance Controls for Concrete

(1) Compliance with specified properties of concrete shall be judged by tests made on proper
specimens at an age of 28 days unless there is evidence, satisfactory to the authority having
jurisdiction, that a particular testing regime is capable of predicting the strength at 28 days of concrete
tested at an earlier age, in which case compliance may be based on the results of such tests alone.

(2) The concrete for the specimen shall normally be taken when the concrete is actually being poured.

(3) Compliance of prescribed and standard mixes (Section 8.2) shall be based on checks made on the
mix properties (such as aggregate gradation, cement content, mix proportions, and workability); but,
because strength tests provide an implicit check on the quality of the mix, they may, alternatively,
be used for the acceptance of concretes made with prescribed and standard mixes.

9.3.1.1 Sampling and TestingMethods

(1) In general, it is sufficient to make only one test specimen from a single representative sample for
each mix of concrete. If more than one specimen is taken, the mix shall be considered as being
represented by the mean value of the test results obtained from the various specimens.

(2) Each mix from which a sample is taken shall be chosen at random from among the possible mixes.

(3) The samples shall, where practicable, be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer or, in the
case of ready-mix concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle.

1 9.3.1.2 Site of Lot and Frequency of Sampling

!
.(1) The lot is defined as the quantity of concrete produced in the same essential conditions and
subjected to individual assessment.

(2) The lots shall be defined before the commencement of construction, hy taking into account the
I number
testing toofbe
tests required for a decision (see Section 9.3.1.3) as well as the frequency of sampling and
adopted.
,
I (3) The minimum rate of sampling shall be decided by the engineer taking into account the nature of
I the work. Higher rates would be appropriate at the start of the work, to establish quickly the level
I ' of quality, or during periods of production when quality is in doubt, or for highly-stressed structural.
I elements. i
,
("'
:"],;;", 102 EBCS2. 1995
Y;,'""IJ;J:'j,,",~
!

.CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL

(4) In general, the following may be adopted as the minimum requirement on size of lot and i
.frequency of sampling, exceptfor the specialcasesgivenhereunder: '1,

(a) No individual sampling can,represent,on the average,more than 100 mixes or 100 m',
whichever is the smallervolume of Concrete.
(b) For eachgrade of concrete, at leastone sampleshall be takenevery week
(c) For eachgrad~ of concrete,at leasttWo lots shall be made.

(4) Exception: For smallbuildings (e.g., havinga total volume of lessthan)OOm3of concrete)usinj,
concretegrade C30 or lower, Condition (3) neednot be compliedwith.

9.3.1.3 Compliance Criteria

(1) Two compliancecriteria are envisaged:

(2) Criterion 1: This criterion may'be applied in all casesbut is lesssuited to large-scalesampling.
Eachlot. is representedby three samples,the strengthof which are XI < Xz < ~.

(3) The lot is acceptedautomaticallyif the following conditionsare satisfiedsimultaneously:

~ ~ fck + k1 (9.1)

1.1~ fck -k2 (9.2)

-where,
~ is the meanvalue
..f.k is the specifiedcharacteristicstrength
kl, ~ are the margins of strengthgiven in Table 9.1
1.1 is the averagestrengthof the minimum strengthsfor the severallots.

Table 9.1 Margins or Strength in MPa

Margin of First Third and Fifth lot
Strength two lots fourth lot and above
kl 5 4 3
~ 1 2 3

(4) Criterion 2: This criterion is suitablefor large lots.

1 (5) Each lot representedby not lessthan 15 test specimens(n ~ 15)

(6) The lot is acceptedautomaticallyif the following conditionsare satisfiedsimultaneously:

-m" -As" ~ fck (9.3)

1.1 ~ f.k -k2 (9.4)

-where,
1ft" is the meanvalue
s" is the standarddeviationof the set of sampleresults
.f.k is the characteristicstrength

. EBCS 2 -1995 .103

 .ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

A is the coefficient (may be takenas 1.4)

~ is the margin of strength(maybe takenas 4 MPa)
n is the numberof specimen

(7) If the test resultsdo not satisfy the requirementsof the selectedacceptancecriterion, measures
specified in Section9.4 shall be taken.
,
9.3.2 Compliance Controls for the CompletedStructure

(1) The acceptanceof a completedstructureinvolvesa decisionon each portion of the work subject
to acceptance(correspondingto the concretelots) and a decisionon the behaviorof the .structureas
a whole.

9.4 MEASl~ TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE

9.4.1 General

(1) If the quality of the structure is found to be in doubt after an inspectionor from the test results,-
then a special examinationshall be madeto verify the soundnessof the information receivedand to
assessthe actual strength of the structure as constructedwith possible recourseto more accurate
methodsof calculation.

9.4.2 Sequenceof Measures

(1) The following sequentialmeasuresshallbe takenwherethe resultsof compliancecontrol testsor

inspectionare unsatisfactory:
(a) The position of concretewhich does not fulfil the oompliancecriterion shall be identified.
(b) The structural safety shall be checkedby appropriatecalculationson the basis of the actual
test results which did not comply. If safetyis assured,the concretecan be accepted.
(c) If suchstructural safety or durability are not assured,thenthe strengthof the concreteshall
I be examinedby taking drilled coresor by non-destructivemethods(see Section9.4.3). The
results of such tests shall be assessedon the basis of the prescribedacceptancecriterion,
taking into accountany differencesin age.
(e) If this new informationshowsthat structuralsafetyis assured,the concretemay be accepted
after it has beendecided whetherrepairs are necessaryto ensuredurability.
(t) If the resultsof check testsby non-destructivemethods(3) show that the quality of concrete
is inadequateor showother defects,the engineermayrequirea loadingtestto be madewhich
shall then be carried out in accordancewith Section9.4.4.
(g) If structural safety and durability are not assured,then the possibility of strength~ningthe
structure must be investigated. If strengtheningis not feasible, then the concrete shall be
rejected, and the structure or memberdemolishedor given a reducedstructural grading by
limiting its service rating, as appropriate.

9.4.3 Check Tests on Structural Concrete

9.4.3.1 General
(1) Check testsby non-destructivemethodsare applicableto hardenedconcretein the finish~ parts -
of a structureor in precastunits. They may be usedin routine inspectionfor quality control. They
are also of usewhen concreteis found defectivefrom visual inspectionand when lcw cubestrengths
are obtained when assessingthe strengthof the concreteused. .

104 EBCS2 .1995 -"'.

 ...

";;~;
"
, ~

. ! !'
!J

"I '
,00
CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL jI
." rt, :
,
9.4.3.2 1)pes of Check Tests :"

(1) The following types of check testsmay be usedfor different types of checks: l'
(a) Drilled Cores
(b) Gamma radiography ,
(c) Ultrasonic test
(d) Electromagneticcover measuringdevices
(e) Reboundhammertest.

(2) The testsmust be conductedby appropriatelytrained personneland the accuracyof eachtype of

testsmust be consideredin interpretingthe resultsobtained.

9.4.4 Lnad Tests or Structure or Parts or Structures

,
9.4.4.1 General

(1) Test loads are to be applied and removedincrementally.

(2) The test should be carried out after th~ expiry of 28 days from the time of placing concrete.
When the test is for a reasonother than the quality of the concretein the structurebeing in doubt,
the test may be carried out earlier, provided that the concretehas already reached its specified
strength.
. 9.4.4.2 Test Loads

.(1) The testloadsto be appliedfor the limit statesof deflectionandlocal damageare the appropriate
designloads, i.e., the characteristicdeadand imposedloads.

(2) When the ultimate limit state is being considered,the test load shall be equalto the sum of the
characteristicdeadload plus 1.25 times the characteristicimposedload and shall be maintainedfor
a period of 24 hours.

(3) If anyof the final deadload is not in positionon the structure,compensating

loads shallbe added
as necessary.

(4) During the test, struts and bracing, strong enoughto supportthe v/hole load, shall be placed in
position leaving a gap under the membersto be tested, and adequateprecautionsshall be taken to
safeguardpersonsin the vicinity of structure.

i 9.4.4.3 MeasurementsDuring the Tests

(1) Measurementsof deflection and crack width shall be taken immediatelyafter the applicationof
load and in the case of 24 hours sustainedload test; at the end of the 24 hours loadedperiod, after
removal of the load and after the 24 hours recoveryperiod. Sufficient measurements shall be taken
-to enableside effectsto be takeninto account. Temperatureandweatherconditionsshallbe recorded
during the test.

.
.
&Qr~ ? -"QQ~ 11\='
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

9.4.4.4 Assessment
of Results

(1) In assessingthe serviceability of a structure or part of a structure following a loading test, the
possible effects of variation in temperatureand humidity during the period of the test shall be
COMidered.

~) The following requirementsshall be met:

,
(a) The maximum width of any crack measuredimmediatelyon applicationof the testload for
local damageshall not be more than two-thirds of the value for the limit staterequirement.
(see Section5.3.4)
(b) For members spanningbetweentwo supports,the deflection measuredimmediately after
applicationof the testload for deflectionis to be not more than 1/500 of the effective span.
Limits shall be agreeduponbefore testingcantileveredportionsof structures.
(c) If the maximum deflection in millimeters observedduring 24 hours under.load is less than
40 L.z/h where L. is ~ffective span in meter and h the overall depth of construction in
millimeters, it is not necessaryfor the recoveryto be measuredandthe requirementsin item
(d) below do not apply.

(d) If, within 24 hours of the removal of the t~t load for the ultimate limit state as calculated
in Section9.4.4.2, a structuredoes not showa recovery of at least 75% of the maximum
deflectionshownduringthe 24 hours underload, the loadingshallbe repeated.The structure
shall be consideredto have failed to passthe test if the recovery after the secondl<radingis
not at least 75% of the maximumdeflectionobservedduring the secondloading.

,,/'

.
.t 106 EBCS2 -1995"
 ~ "e", c.'"

I
,}
1 '

APPENDIX A 1'1t
, i
,
ANALYSIS OF SLABS!~
'It!'\

A.t SCOPE Ii
(1) This appendixprovidesmethodsof analysisfor one-wayslabs,two-wayslabsand flat slabswhich !
are basedon the principles set out on Section3.8.

A.2 ONE-WAY SLABS

A.2.t General

(1) One-wayslabs transmit their load mainly in one direction (i.e. the direction of span). There is
no needto analyzethe actioneffectstransverseto the direction of spanarisingas a result of restrained
lateral stra,in.or the transversedisttibution of concentratedor line loads, or causedby a support
parallel to the direction of span, which has not bean taken into accountin the calculation. These
effectsshall, however, be takeninto accountby making suitable detailingprovisions.

A.2.2 D,is~ributi,O;n
of Concentrated Loads

(1) The width of slab which may be assumedto be effective in carrying a concentratedload may be
taken asfollows:

.(a) For solid slabs,the effective width may be takenasthe sumof the load width and 2.4x(1-x/L)
where x is the distancefrom the nearer supportto the sectionunder considerationand L is
..the span.
(b) For other slabs, exceptwhere speciallyprovided for, the effective width will dependon the
ratio of the transverseand longitudinal flexural rigidities of the slab. When these are
approximatelyequal, the value for the effective width as given for solid slabs may be used,
but as the ratio decreasesa smallervalue shall be taken. The minimumvalue which needbe
taken, however, is the load width plus 4x/L(1 -x/L) meterswhere x and L are as defined in
(a) aboveso that, for a sectionat mid-span,the effective width is equalto 1.0 meterplus the
load width.
(c) Where the concentratedload is near an unsupportededge of a slabthe effect,ivewidth shall
not exceedthe value in (a) or (b) aboveas appropriate,nor half that value plus the distance
of the center of the load from the unsupportededge(seeFig. A-I).

A.3 TWO-WAY SLABS

A.3.t General

I (1) The type of slab dealt with here is one composedof rectangularpanelssupportedat all four edges
by walls or beams stiff enoughto be treated as unyielding. This may be assumedto be the caseif
the requirementsfor the ratio betweenthe depth of a beam and its span are in accordancewith
Fig. A-2.
(2) Thesemethodsare intendedfor slabs with uniformly distributedloads. If a slab is subjectedto
concentratedor line loads, in additionto a uniform load, thesecan generallybe treatedby considering
them as equivalentuniform loads using approximaterules, provided that the'sumof the non-uniform
loads on a panel does not exceed20 percentof the total load.

. EBCS 2 -1995 107

.
 ,
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

Load .
f=~::+~:~
~ T ~
,
Unsupported Effective Width
Edoe

-L
~Load
Width
X
1,2X (1- L

Figure A-I Effective Width of Solid Slab Carrying a ConcentratedLoad near an Unsupported
Edge
~- L, .\

r"'~} .!!.L ~
L,
Z. 5 (..!!..!.
Lx ) t

~ ~~r (II
/l
m
IIi -cz
hZ ~ I Z,5
h.
Z'5(""1:-;)
~ ,.

.1+"f ~'1~ to. -L (,.5LI)

.g~ WALL
t~ BEAM
r L, ~
Figure A-2 Support for Two-Way Slabs

A.3.2 Individual Panel Moments

(1) Moments for individual panels with edges either simply supported or fully fixed are calculated as:

ml = al (gd + Qd)Lz2 (A-I)

" Ilere mj is the design moment per unit width at the point of reference
al is the coefficient given in Table A-I as function of aspect ratio L)' /Lz and
support conditions
gd is the uniformly distributed design permanent load
qd is the uniformly distributed design live load
Lz is the shorter span of the panel
L)' is the longer span of the panel .

,
108 EBCS.2-1995
 .i APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS

.Subscripts for momentsand moment coefficients(aJ have the following meanings:

$ support
f field (span)
x: direction of shorterspan
)' direction of longer span
(2) Notationsfor different critical momentsand edgenumbersare shown in Fig. A-3. Division of ,'

slab into middle and edgestrips is illustrated in Fig. A-4. .

Mxl

::L
jMY1

~ 4~~
Figure A-3 Notations for Critical Moments

(3) The positive momentcoefficientsin Table A-1 may be derived from 'the following equations.The
.negative moment coefficients are taken as 4/3 times the positive moment coefficients for the ~ame
direction.
(24 + 2nd + 1.Snd2)
~ a:tf = 1000 (A.2)

rv
'-4rj --fJ
(/l-~ + Jl--~)2 (A.3)

fJ = ~ {1 -? ~ ({1-~ + Jl--~)} (A.4)

y

where nd is the numberof discontinuousedg~ (0 ~ nd ~ 4)

r l' r 2, r 3' r 4are the ratios of negative moment capacityat edges1 to 4, respectively,
to the span moment capacityin the samedirection and take valuesof 4/3 for
continuousedgesor zero for discontinuousedges.

1 :~
r LY:o1I r Ly .1 ~
! Middle! M~;d~: '-
I I Strip I Strip T
! I I
-, I II f

~ II I L
f I Edge ~ !L.r ~ I- ~ \ Edge I:.!-:
4C Strip T 8 '-Strip 8

Figure .A~-4
Division of Slab into Middle and Edge Strips

.
.EBCS 2 -1995 109
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .

(4) Slabsare consideredas divided in each direction into middle strips and edgestrips as shown in .
Fig. A-4, the middle strip being three quartersof the width and each edge strip one eighth of the
width.
(5) The maximum design momentscalculatedas above apply only to the middle strips and no
redistribution shall be made.

(65 Reinforcementin the middle strips shall be detailed in accordancewith Section7.1.7.

(7) Reinforcementin an edgestrip, parallel to the edge,neednot be lessthan the minimum given in
Section7.2.2.2 (minimum areasof tensionreinforcement).

A.3.3 Moments in Continuous Slabs

A.3.3.1General
(1) The first stageof designis to determinesupportand span momentsfor all panelsindividually by
treating their edgesas either simply supportedor fully fixed (seeSectionA,.3.2). External edgesare
generallyconsideredas simply supportedand continuousedgesare consideredas fully fixed in this
stage.

(2) If the slab is connectedwith an external wall or if any of its edgesis partly fixed and partly
simply supported,the following proceduremay be adopted:
(a) The ratio of the actual supportmomentto the bendingmomentof fully fixed slab, or the ratio
of the width of fixed part to the width of the simply supportedpart of the edgeis evaluated. .
(b) The bending momentsof the slab are then computedby interpolating between different
supportconditions. .

(3) For each $UPportover which the slab is continuousthere will thus generally be two different
supportmoments. The difference may be distributedbetweenthe panelson eitherside of the support
to equalizetheir moments,as in the momentdistributionmethodfor frames.

(4) Two methodsof differing accuracy,are given here for treating the effectsof this redistribution
on momentsaway from the support.

A.3.3.2 MethodI

(1) Method I may be used:

(a) When differences betweeninitial support momentsare less than 20 percentof the' larger .
moment, and
(b) only for internal structureswherethe live load doesnot exceed2.5 times the permanentload
(qk ~ 2.5gk) or 0.8 times the deadload for externalstructures(qk ~ 0.8gk).

In other caseseither Method II or other more accuratemethodsshall be used.

(2) ~I'~n Method I is used, dimensioningis nC!rmallycarriedout either using:

(a) Initial momentsdirectly, or

(b) basedon the averageinitial momentat the support.

.
110 EBCS 2 -1995 'w
 APPENDIXA: ANAL YSiSOF~ .!.!
Table A-I Bending Moment Coemclents fqr R~gular Panels Supported on Four SI~
with Provision for Torsion at Comers

Lon'lpan
Value3of L/Lz coeffic~ta,
Support Condition Caeft'. ..~ and~
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 for aU
valuetof
LILa

r~~~1 ~ 0.032 0.037 0.042 0.046 0.063 0.032

~'m~77/77~ ~ 0.024 0.028 0.032 0.035 0.048 0.024

t~~1 ~ 0.039 9.044 0.048 0.052 0.055 0.058 0.063 0.067 0.039
~77~7~ ~ 0.029 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.043 0.047 0.050 0.029

~/// //"/"/~ ~ 0.039 0.049 0.056 0.062 0.068 0.073 0.082 0.089 0.039
1--~__J ~ 0.030 0.036 0.042 0.047 0.051 0.055 0.062 0.067 0.030

I/////////~ ~ 0.047 0.056 0.063 0.069 0.074 0.078 0.087 0.093 0.047
L~ ~ 0.036 0.042 0.047 0.051 0.055 0.059 0.065 0.070 0.036

0 S
~
~:
0.046 0.050 0.054 0.057 0.060 0.062 0.067 0.070
0.034 0.038 0.040 0.043 0.045' 0.047 0.050 0.053
-
0.034

0 :: 0.~34 0.~46 0.~56 0.~5 0.~72 0.~78 0.~1 O.~OO ~:::

I//~//""""""'I~ ~ 0.057 0.065 0.071 0.076 0.081 0.084 0.092 0.098 -

L_~J ~: 0.043 0.048 0.053 0.057 0.060 0.063 0.069 0.074 0.044

~ ~ 0.058
8 ~~ 0.044 0.054 0.063 0.071 0.078 0.084 0.096 0.105 0.044
"" .

II ~
9 II ~"" 0.056 0.065 0.074 0.081 0.087 0.092 0.103 0.111 0.056

,
 ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARDFORSTRUCTURALUSEOF CONCRETE .

A.3.3.3 Method11 .
(1) In this method considerationof the effects of changesof support momentsis limited to the adjacent
spans. Since no effects on neighboring support sectionsneedbe c.onsidered,only a simple balancing
operationis required at eachedgeand no iterative processis involved.
,
(2) The procedurefor applying Method II, is as follows:

(a) Supportand span momentsare first calculatedfor individual panelsby assumingeach panelto be
fully loaded. This is done by using the coefficientsgiven in Table A-I as describedin Section
A.3.2.
(b) The unbalancedmomentis distributed using the momentdistributionmethod. The relative stiffness
of eachpanel shall be taken proportional to its gross momentof inertia divided by the smallerspan.
(c) If the support momentis decreased,the span momentsn1:vand ~ are then increasedto allow for
the changesof supportmoments. This increaseis calculatedas being equalto the changeof the
3upportmomentmultiplied by the factors given in Table A-2. If a support momentis increased,no
adjustmentshall be madeto the spanmoments.

A.3.4 Elastic Values of Support Moments

(1) The abovemethodsgive averagevalues of supportmoments. In caseswhere maximum elastic moments'

should be considered(e.g. in watertight structures),elastic theory must be used.

,
A.3.S wads on Supporting Beams

(1) The designloadson beams supportingsolid slabs spanningin two directions at right anglessupporting
uniformly distributed loads may be assessedfrom the following equations:

Vx = .Bvx(gd+ qJLx (A.5)

Vy = .Bvy(gd
+ qJLx (A.6)

(2) Table A-3 gives values of load transfer coefficients.The assumeddistribution of the load on a
supportingbeam is shown in Fig. A-5.

(3) The designload on a beamdetermined in accordancewith (1) and (2) above, may be taken as the
maximum shear in the slab at the center of support.II

'I
112 EBCS2 -7995 ~
 "

APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS

Table A-2 Factors for Adjusting Span Moments m~ and mJ!

~--ILa ~Lx
L,ILx 1"~._~.'Iy'.~ t,

Cx C, Cx c,

1.0 0.380 0.280 0.280 0.380

1.1 0.356 0.220 0.314 0.374
1.2 0.338 0.172 0.344 0.364
1.3 0.325 0.135 0.373 0.350
1.4 0.315 0.110 0.398 0.331
1.5 0.305 0.094 0.421 0.310
1.6 0.295 0.083 0.443 0.289
1.7 0.285 0.074 0.461 0.272
1.8 0.274 0.066 0.473 0.258
1.9 0.258 0.060 0.481 0.251
2.0 0.238 0.055 0.484 0.248

EBCS 2 -1995
 I

,
I
, .
~
'c"
';;I~ ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL
~- USE
-~- OF CONCRETE
;;~'c
ft" Table A-3 Shear Force Coefficients for Uniformly Loaded Rectangular Panels Supported on Four Sides with Provision for

Torsion at Corners

Edge .B1afor values of L/Lz

Type of panel .Bvy
and location 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0

0 'Continuous 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.33

0 Continuous 0.36 0.39 0.42 0.44 0.45 0.47 0.50 0.52 0.36
2 Discontinous 0.24

~"~~ Continuous 0.36 0.40 0.44 0.47 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.59 0.36
~--=-J Discontinous 0.24 0.27 0.29 0.31 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 -

F~~~ Continuous 0.40 0.44 0.47 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.57 0.60 0.40
L__~_J Discontinous 0.26 0.29 0.31 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.38 0.40 0.26

r~~1 ~ontin~ous 0.40 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.52 0.54 -
~,?:~??~ Discontmous 0.26

Q 6
Continuous
"
Discontmous 0.26 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.44 0.47
0.40
-

D Continuous 0.45 0.48 0.5I 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.60 0.63 -

Discontinous 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.39 0.41 0.30

Q Continuou!l 0.45
Discontinous 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.42 0.45 0.48 0.30

Q Di~l.'onti/1ou!l 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.33

V.
A ~+~Wt+1-~ A
~ L ~

f1~ure A.5 Distrihution or Load on a Beam Suppclrting a Two-Way Spanning Sluh

~-~.. .GG~ (il;; -

 .APPENDIX A: ANAL YSiS OF SLABS

.,
A.4 FLAT SLABS
A.4.1 Scope tti c

(1) The provision 'given in this chapterare for the design of flat slabs supportedby a generallyrectangular ;
arrangementof columnsand where the ratio of the longer to the shorter spansdoes not exceed2. i\
r f
11
!
A.4.2 Definitions ~
#

(1) Column strip is a design strip with a width on eachside of a columncenter-lineequal to O.25Lxor if
drops with dimensionnot lessthan L,.tI3areusoo..a width equal to the drop dimension.

(2) Middle strip is a designstrip boundeAiby two column.strips.

(3) The division of panels in flat slabsinto columnInd middle strip is illustrated in Fig. A-6.

A.4.3 Analysis or Flat Slab Structur~

1,
A.4.3.1 General f
;
I
V
:
.(1) A flat slab including supportingcolumnsor walls may be analyzedusing the equivalentframe method 1.
(Se..."'tion
A.4.3.2) or. where applicable.the simplifioo method(Section~.4.3.3). !
.;
\
I
(2) For both methodsof analysis.the negative momentsgr~ than thoseat a distance h)2 from the I
center-lineof the column may be ignoroo providoo the momentMoobtainedas the sum of the maximum !
positive design momentand the averageof the negativedesignmomentsin anyone spanof the slab for the I
whole panel width is suchthat: ;
!
,I
Mo ~ (gtl + qtl)I.z(Li -~;. (A.1) \
8 3 I
;

i
where Li is the panel length parallel to span, measuredfrom centersof columns \
Lz is the panelwidth. measuroofrom centersof columns ;!
hc is the effective diameterof a column or columnhead(see (3) below). I I

t Wh.enthe above condition is not satisfioo,the negativedesign momentsshall be increas.ed.

.
(3) The effective diametc;cof a columnor column headhc is the diameterof a circle whoseareaequalsthe l
.I
cross-sectional area of the column or. if column heads are used, the area of the column heOO basoo on the 1
,

effective dimensionsas defined.in (4) below. In no caseshall hcbe takenas greaterthan one-quarterof the I!

shortest span framing into the column.

,,.
(4) The effective dimensions of a column head for use in calculation of hc (see (3) above) are limit~ t

.according to the depthof the head. In any direction, the effective dimensionof a headL~ shall betaken as

.~E;-- EBCS 2 -7995 115 1':~

c:j
 ,

.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
---

I I

Middle

-"t--
I Lx I
\ I ~ I
I
I I
P
'-

Ly

Ignore DropIf
~ .Dr~p ~ Dim~n~on<LX/S
,-
I

Middle S

Ly

Ignore Drop If
Dimensjon
i. I... thanLx/S

.
Figure A-6 Division or Paneb in Flat Slabs ,

the lesserof the actualdimensionLho' or Lh.-, where LI..- is given by:

4

Lh.- = Lc + 2dh (A.8)

I

For a flared head, the actual dimensionLhois that measuredto tt~ centerof the reinforcing steel(see.Fig.
I A-7). .
(5) For the purposesthis sectiona drop may only be consideredto influencethe distribution of moments
within the slab where the smaller dimensionof the dr.opis at leastone third of the smallerdimensionof the
surroundingpanels. Smaller drops may, however, still be takeninto accountwhen assessing the resistance -
to punchingshear.

116 EBCS2 -7995

.
 APPENDIX
A: ANALYs/SOFSLABS
.-
~ Lit.mG. ~ ~ Lit.mG. ~
.,/ ,," ,
, L~ o /, Lho / \
, ./ d.. ~

\
..
(I) Lh = Lh.mox (II) 4.= Ltlo ':
,"

~.I
it!
:',.
,
;

(III) Ltl8 Ltl mo.

.(Iv) LtI- Ltlo

(C)
Figure A-7 Types of Column Head

A.4.3.2 EquivalentFrameMethod

(1) The structure may be divided longitudinally and transverselyinto frames consistingof columnsand
strips of slab.

(2) The width of slab used to define the effective stiffnessof the slab will dependupon the aspectratio of
the panelsand the type of loading, but the following provisions maybe applied in the absenceof more
accuratemethods:

(a) In the caseof vertical loading, the full width of the panel, and
(b) for lateral loading, half the width of the panel, may be used to calculatethe stiffnessof the slab.

(3) The momentof inertia of any sectionof slab or column used in calculatingthe relative stiffnessof
membersmay be assumedto be that of the cross sectionof the concretealone.

(4) Momentsand forces within a systemof flat slab panels may be obtainedfrom analysisof the structure
underthe single load caseof maximum designload on all spansor panelssimultaneously,provided:

(a) The ratio of the characteristicimposedload to the characteristicdeadload does not exceed1.25.
(b) The characteristicimposedload does not exceed5.0 kN!m2 excludingpartitions.

(5) Where it is not appropriateto analyzefor the single load caseof maximum designload on all spans,it
will be sufficient to considerfollowing the arrangementsof vertical loads:

(a) All spansloaded with the maximum designultimate load, and

,

EBCS2- 1995 _..,!1;,.,""

,,_..:..,"'~-
 !!!

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(b) Alternate spanswith the maximum designultimate load and all other spansloadedwith the
m~imum designult~ate load (1.0GJ.

(6) Each frame may be ~alyzed in its entirety by any elasticmethod. Alternatively, for vertical loadsonly,
each strip of floor and roof may be analyzedas a separateframe with the columnsaboveand below fixed in
position and direction at their e:x:tremities.
In either case,the analysisshall be ~ied out for the'appropriate
designultimate loads on eachspan calculatedfor a strip of slab of width equal to the distancebetween
centerlines of the panelson eachside of the columns.

A.4.3.3 Simplified Method

(1) Momentsand shearforces in non-swayflat slab structuresmay be determinedusingTable A-4, subject

to the conditionsin (2) below.

(2) The following limitations shall be observedwhen usingthe simplified method:

(a) Designis basedon the single load caseof all spansloaded with the maximumdesignultimate load.
(b) There..al'eat leastthree rows of panelsof approximatelyequalspan in the direction being consid-
ered.
(c) Successivespanlength in eachdirection shall not differ by more than one-third of the longerspan.
(d) Maximum offsets of columnsfrom either axis betweencenterlines of successivecolumnsshall not
ex~ 10% of the span (in the direction of the offset).

Table A-4 Bending Moment and Shear Force Coe.fficlentsfor Flat Slabs or Three or More Equal
Spans
Outer support Near First Center of Interior sup-
center interior interior port
Column Wall of first support span
span
Moment -().O4OFL -().O20FL O.083fl. -O.063fl. O.O71FL -O.OSSl'I.
Shear O.4SF O.40F -O.OOF -O.50F
Total column
moments O.O4OFL --O.O22FL -O.O22l'I.

NOTE 1. F is the total design ultimate load on the strip of slab betweenadjacentcolumnsconsidered.
2. L is the effective span = L. -2JJj3.
3. The limitations of Section A.4.3.1(2) neednot be cboc:...ed.
4. The OX)~ts shall not be redistributed.

A.4.3.4 lA'vUion of Moments BetweenColumn and Middle Strips

118 EBCS2 -1995

 APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS

(I) The design momentsobtainedfrom analysi$of the continuousframes using the EquivalentFrame
Method (see SectionA.4.3.2) or from Table A-4 shall be divided betweenthe columnand middl,estrips in
the proportions given in Table A-5.

Table A-S Distribution-or ~ign Moments in Pane~ or Flat Slabs

Apportionmentbet;weencolumn and middle strip expressedas

percentagesof the total negativeor positive designmoment

Column strip (%) Middle. strip (%)

Negative 75 25 .
.. 55 45
, "

Positive t~~
!c.

NOTE: For. the casewhere the width of the colurnn~stripis takenas eq\lal to that of the drop, and the middle ::i
!:~;
strip is therebyincreasedin width, the design momentsto be resistedby the middle strip shall be '~$
increasedin proportion to its increasedwidth. The design momentsto be resistedby the column "~
strip may be decreasedby an amountsuch that the total positive and the total negativedesign
momentsresistedby th~ column strip and middle strip togetherare unchanged.

A.4.4 Design Considerations

A.4.4.1 General

(1) Details of reinforcementin flat slabs shall be as follows:

(a) The reinforcementin flat slabs shall have minimum bend point locationsand extensionsfor
reinforcementas prescribedin Fig. A-8.
(b) Where adjacentspansare unequal, extensionof negativereinforcementbeyondthe face of support
as prescribed in Fig. A-8 shall be basedon requirementsof longer span.
(c) Bent bars may be used only when depth-to-spanratio permitsuse of bends 450or less.

(2) For flat slabs in frames not braced againstsideswayand for flat slabs resistinglateral loads, lengthsof
reinforcementshall be determinedby analysisbut shall not be lessthan thoseprescribedin Fig. A-8.

A.4.4.2 Internal Panels

(1) The column and middle strips shall be designedto withstandthe designmomentsobtainedfrom Section
A.4.3.

(2) Two-thirds of the amountof reinforcementrequired to resistthe negativedesignmoment in the column

strip shall be placed in a width equalto half that of the column strip and central with the column. This
concentrationof reinforcementover the column will increasethe capacityof the slab for transfer of moment
.to the column by flexure (see SectionA.4.4.4)

.
EBCS2 -1995 1
 BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .

* ~
jI
.
c.. ~ CJ)~ MINIMUM
f ir: ~ ~ ~ PERCENT- WITHOUT
DROPPANELS WITH DROPPANELS,
~ ~ CD 9 ATSECTION

d--l d '
e--l e "
c.. 50
'CJ)
~ ~ Remainder .f.-- b I' b-.j I.-- b ,I .

.-

~
:I: ,
!:2 75 Max-.-l
~ ~ 50 -I
~ ~ I Max.0.1251
c.. ~
iE g Remainder
~ 150
z
3 I" d--l
2

8 c.. 50
* ~ b-i
~ Remainder

~
z
UJ
CD 2 50
a
~
~
~ Remainder
0

~ ~ 100 c-i
<t ~
CD .
~
:I:

~ ~ 50
a: ~
~ ~
CJ) a
~ CD Rd
emaln er 0 Max 0 15f Max0151

~ Ibars).j ~c
UJ 50
-J c..
~ * ~ .
2 CJ) I"
~ Remainder .
CD
~
Z
~ ~ 50 I
t::
a
CD Remainder

~
150 75 Max. 75Max 150
NOTE:
All
,
measurements
~
c Clear span-.t n
Faceof support
;=f
:~~:~j-_.t=:
c Clearspan-I n
Faceof support =:Ij
c

In mm
Centerto centerspan-l Centerto centerspan-1
Exterior support t Interior support Exterior supportt
(No slob continuity) (Continuity provided) (No slob continuity) .
* e'en! bars at exterior supports BARLENGTHFROMFACEOF SUPPORT
maybe usedIf a oeneral MINIMUMLENGTH MAXIMUM
LENGTH
analysIsISmodi MARK a b c d I f Q -

LENGTH0141 n 0201n 0221n 030/n 033ln 020/n 024Jn

.
Figure A-8 Minimum Bend Point Locations and Extensiom for Reinforcanent in Flat Sla~

I.ETHIOPIAN 120 EBCS 2 .7995

 , APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS
-

A..4.4.3Edgt Panels
*

(1) The design moments shall be apportioned and designed exactly as for an internal panel, using the same

column and middle strips as for an internal panel.

A.4.4.4 MomentTransferbetweenSlaband Column

(1) When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment between slab and

column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by flexure. Fraction of unbalanced

moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in accordance with Section

4.7.4.
(2) A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by
1
11 ~

1 + fj;/i; (A.9)
YOt'OZ

shall 'be considered ,transferred by flexure over an effective slab width between lines that are one and one

half slab or drop panel thickness (1.5h) outside opposite faces of the column or capital.

(3) Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing as specified in Section A.4.2(2), or

additional reinforcement must be used to resist the unbalanced moment on the effective slab width defined

in (2) above.

'i

.(4) The design for transfer of load from slab to supporting columns or walls through shear and torsion shall

be in accordance with Chapter 4.

(5) As an alternative to (2) above, the slab may be designed for the minimum bending moments per unit

width, m~ and m&iy in the x and y direction, respectively, given by Eq. A.10 (see Fig. A-9).

m~ (or m&iy) ~ nVSd (A. 10) ;'

il
I'
where V Sd is the shear force developed along the critical section ~
;

n is the moment coefficient given in Table A-6. !

(6) In checking the corresponding resisting moments, only those reinforcing bars shall be taken into 'j

account, which are appropriately anchored beyond the critical area (Fig. A-10) ,\

which
(7) Wherecan be
analysis
transferred
of the by
structure
flexure indicates
and shear a combined
design column
(in accordance
moment larger
with than
(2) and
the (4)
moment
above), M, the design

edge moment in the slab shall be reduced to a value not greater than M,."", and the positive design moments

~ in the span adjusted accordingly. The normal limitations on redistributions and neutral axis depth may be

disregarded in this case.

(8) Moments in excess of M,."", may only be transferred to a column if an edge beam or strip of slab along

the free edge is reinforced to carry the extra moment into the column by torsion.

EBCS 2 -1995
 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL
-~~~ USE OF CONCRETE ..

~r- /i
~..
O.IL;r .

/1
~ ~ ~)
m.dy I

, Lr ~L ~ Iy
I _O"'~;~~~~~~~_I
I
~ La '1
~y
Hgure A-9 Bending Moments mSdxand mSdyin Slab-Column Joints subjectea tu E-ecentric Loading, anc
Effective Width for resisting these Moments

(9) In the absence of an edge beam, an appropriate breadth of slab may be assessedby using the principles
illustrated in Fig. A-II, for transfer of moments between the slab and an edge or corner column.

Table A-6 Moment Coefficient n for Equation (A. to)

n for m.w n for msdy

Position of Effective Effective.
column top bottom width top bottom width

Internal column -0.125 0 0.3L, -0.125 0 0.3Lx.

Edge columns
edge of slab

"10
parallel, to x-axis -0.25 0 0.15L, -0.125 0.125 (per m)
Edge columns
edge of slab
parallel to y-axis -0.125 0.125 (per m) -0.25 0 0.15.Lx
Corner column -0.5 0.5 L (per m) -0.5 L 0.5 (per m)

.4.4.4.5 Panel with Marginal Beams or Walls,

(1) Where the slab is supported by a marginal beam with a depth greater than 1.5 times the thickness of the

slab, or by a wall then:

(a) the total design load to be carried by !he beam or wall shall comprise those loads directly on the
~
wall or beam plus a uniformly distributed load equal to one-quarter of the total design load on the -
panel; and
(b) the design moments of the half-column strip adjacent to the beam or wall shall be one-quarter of the-
design moments obtainoo from Section A.4.3.

122 EBCS2 -7995

 APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS

Wjl ~
Edge Column Corner

..:~

rr::::;;:::~ .
Section A-A

Figure .~-IO Detailing Reinforcement over Edge and Corn~ Columns

fo!Y

-;--;_.~-
---YI~lllll-~~[---'\"
I b. I
~ ~..~
I .Cx+ Y I
I .

-r--.JF~~ .",
! 8jf;' .
I I
I b. I
..~
I I
18CX+Cy
I I

fo!Y ~

} 1
.~:- Figure A-II Definition of Breadth or Effective Moment Transfer Strip b, for Typical Cases

-~.~~l.
,~BCS2:-1995
-
123~~
 .
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

A.4.4.6 NegativeMomentsat FreeEdge .

(1) Reinforcementfor negativedesignmoments(other than in the column strip) is only neededwhere

momentsarise from loading on any extensionof the slabbeyondthe columncenter-lines. However, top
reinforcementat leastequal to the minimum reinforcementdefined in Section7.2.2.2 shall be provided,
ext~ndingat leastO.1L or an anchoragelength, whicheveris the greater, into the span.

A.4.5 Opening in Panels

A.4.S.1General

(1) Exceptfor openingscomplying with SectionsA.4.5.2, A.4.5.3 and A.4.5.4, openings~Qallbe complete-
ly framed on all sides with beamsto carry the loadsto the columns.

(2) No openingshall encroachupon a columnhead.

A.4.S.2 Holes in Areas Bounded by Column StripsI

(1) Holes in areasboundedby cOlumnstrips may be formed provided:I

~I
(a) their greatestdimensionin a direction parallel to a center-lineof the paneldoes not exceedO.4L;,
and
j (b) the total positive and negativedesignmomentsare redistributedbetween.theremainingstructureto.1
-meet the changedconditions.
~ -

A.4.S.3 Holes in Areas Common to Two Column Strips

(1) Holes in areascommonto two columnstrips may be formed provided:

(a) in aggregatetheir length or width does not exceedone-tenthof the width of the columnstrip;
(b) the reducedsectionsare capableof resistingthe appropriatemoments;and
(c) the perimeterfor calculatingthe designshearstressis reducedif appropriate.

A.4.S.4 Holes in Areas Common to a Column Strip and a Middle Strip

(1) Holes in areascommonto a column strip a middle may be formed provided:

(a) in aggregatetheir length or width does not exceedone quarter of the width of the columnstrip; and'
(b) the reducedsectionsare capableof resistingthe appropriatedesignmoments.

.
124 EBCS2 -1995 .
 APPENDIX g-

.PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

B.1 SCOPE

(1) Provisionsin this chapterapplyto structuralmembersprestress~ with high strengthsteelmeeting

the requirementsfor prestressingsteelsin SectionB.2.2.

(2) All provisions of this Code'not specificallyexcluded,and not in conflict with the provisions of
this chapter, are to be consideredapplicabi~to prestressedconcrete. .t i

(3) The following provisions shall not apply to prestressedconcrete unless specifically noted: ..;,
Sections3.7.8,3.7.9,6.2,7.2.1,7.2.2,7.2.4,7.2.5, and AppendixA. ';

B.2 DATA ON PRFSI'RE5SED STEEL AND PRFSI'RESSING DEVIC~

B.2.1 Prestr~ing Steel

.B.2.1.1 General

(1) This sectionappliesto wires, barsand strandsusedas prestressingtendonsin concretestructures.

(2) The require~ents apply to the product in the condition in whtch it is delivered.

(3) The methodsof production, the specifiedcharacteristics,the methodsof testingand the methods
of attestationof conformity shall be in accordancewith relevantStandardsfor prestressingmaterials.

(4) Each prOduct shall be clearly identifiable with respectto the classification system in Section
B.2.1.2.

(5) Tensile strength (I,), 0.1 % proof str~ (/P>.J and elongation at maximum load (e..) shall be
appropriatelyspecified in relevantStandards,and establishedby standardtests.

(6) For steels complying with this Code, tensile strength, 0.1 % proof s.tress,and elongation at
maximumload are specifiedin termsof characteristicvalues;thesevaluesare designatedrespectively
Ipt,IP>.lkand e...

B.2..1.2 Classification and Geometry

(1) The products(wires, strandsand bars) shall be classified accordingto:

(a) Grade, denotingthe value of the0.1 % proof stressifP>.IJandthe value of the tensile strength
<f.-) in MFa.
(b) Class, indicating the relaxationbehavior
(c) Size
, (d) Surfacecharacteristics. -"111111111111.
L.~~::-"'~:~..~;
125
 -
ETHIOPLANBUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
(2) Each coMignmentshall be accompaniedby a certificatecontaining all the infonnation necessat.y .
for its identification with regard to (a) -(d) in (1) aboveand additionalinformation where necessary.
, (3) The actual crosasectionalarea of the productsshall not differ from theil: normal crosssectional

area by more than the limits specified in the relevantStandards;

j , (4) There shall be no welds in wires and bars. Individual wires of strands may containstaggered't4
welds made only before cold drawing.
wi
l' .
, (5) For coiled products, after uncoiling a length of wire or strand lying free on a flat surface,.the
maximum bow heiaht.from a baseline of specifiedlength shall be less than the values specified in
the relevantStandards.

(6) In this Code, three cl~ of relaxationare defined(see SectionB.2.1.5.2)

(a) Class 1 : for wires and strands,high relaxation

.(b) Class 2 : for wires and strands,low relaxation
(c) Class3 : for bars.
: (7) Where required, surfacecharacteristicsof prestressingsteel shall comply with relevantStandards.

B.2..t.3 PhyliCGl Properties

(1) The following meanvalues may be assumed: ~

(a) Density : 7850 kg/m'

(b) Coefficient of thermal expansion : 10 x l0-6/OC. -

B..1.1.4MechanicalProperties

B.2..1.4.1Strength
.
.
(1) The 0.1 % proof stress(f,.oU>arid the specifioovalue of the tensile strength(f,.J are definedastile
.characteristicvalue of the 0.1 ~ proof load and th~ characteristicmaximum load in axial tension
respectively,divided by the oominal cross sectionalarea.

(2) Th~ r:atioof the actual maximumload to the specifiedmaximumload shall not exceedthe values
speci.fi~ relevantStaOOards.

B.2.1.4.2. Stress-StrainDlagrQln

(1) Stress~straindiagrams for the products, basedon production data, shall be preparedand made
available by the produceras ail annexto the certificateaccompanyingthe consignment.
; .
B.2..i.4..3 Ductility OIaracteristics ~

(1) 1:heproductsshall have adequateductility in elongation,as specified in relevantStandards.

'\ (2)The productsshall be assumedto haveadequateductility in bendingif the characteristicelongation

of the prestressingsteel at maximumload E.. is at least3.5~. ---,,-
.
126 EBCS 2- .1995 ~
 APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSEDCONCRETE

(3) Adequate ductility in bending may be assumedif the products satisfy the requirements for
bendability of the relevantStandards.

8.2.1.4.4 Modulus ofElasticity

(1) A mean value of 200 GPa may be assumedfor wires and bars. The actual value can range from
195to 205 GPa, dependingon the manufacturingprocess.

(2) A value of 190 GPa maybe assumedfor strand.The actualvalue canrangefrom 175 to 195 GPa,
dependingon the manufacturingprocess.Certificatesaccompanyingthe consignmentshould give the
appropriatevalue.

8.2.1.4.5 Fatigue

(1) The products shall have adequatefat,iguestrength.

...,,'1
(2) For fatigue requirementsof prestressingsteel refer to relevantStandards. ,,~~'"
o',..,~
,

B.2.1.4.6 Multi-Axial Stresses

(1) The behavior of the productsunder multi-axial stressesshall be adequate.

(2) Adequa,tebehavior
,.. under multi-axial stresses may be assumed if the products satisfy the
requirementSspecified in the relevantStandards.

B.2.1.5 Technological Properties

B.2.1.5.1 Surface Condition

(1) The products shall be free from defectswhich could impair their performanceas prestressing
tendons.

(2) Longitudinal cracks need not be consideredas defects if their depth is less than the values
specified in relevant Standards.

B.2.1.5.2 Relaxation

(1) The products shall be classifiedfor relaxationpurposes,accordingto the maximum percentages

of loss of stress.

B.2.1.5.3 Susceptibilityto StressCorrosion

(1) The products shall have an acceptablylow level of susceptibilityto stresscorrosion.

(2) The level of susceptibilityto stresscorrosion may be assumedto be acceptablylow if the products
comply with the criteria specified in relevantStandards.

EBCS 2 -1995 127

 .

B.2.2 PrestressingDevi~ .

B.2.2.1 Anchoragesand Couplers

B.2.2.1.1 General
'(I) This section applies to anchoriIfg devices (anchorages)and coupling device;" (couplers)for
applicationin post-tensionedconstruction,where:
, (a) Anchoragesare used to transmitthe forces in tendonsto the concretein the anchoragezone;

(b) Couplersare used to connectindividual lengthsof tendonto make continuoustendons.

" .G) The performancerequirements,the methodsof testingandthe methodsof attestationof confonnity
"shall be defined in relevant, Standards. "

(3) In establishingperformancerequirements,considerationshall be given to :

(a) The relative efficiency of the tendon anchorage/couplerassemblyin comparingthe actual

value of the failure load of the assemblywith that of the tendon.
(b) The elongationof the anchored/coupledtendonat failure.
(c) The fatigue strengthof the anchored/coupledtendon.
(d) The load which can be transferred by the anchorageto the concrete, taking accountof the
f location of the anchoragein the cross-section,the spacingbetweenanchorages,the concrete
~ strengthand the reinforcementin the anchoragezone. ~
~
.(4) Requirementsfor the use of anchoragesand couplers, shall be defined in technical approval .
I documents.Detailing of anchoragezones shall comply with SectionsB.5 and B.6.
I (5) When defining test methods, considerationshall be given to-two modes of testing'

(a) Mode a : when componentsof known geometryand material specificationhave beentaken

I at random out of production or form stock.I
(b) Mode b : when componentshave beenselectedby the producerof the componentsor when
I prototype anchoragesor couplersare to be tested.
I
I B.2.2.1.2 Mechanical Properties

(1) Tendon-anchorage assembliesand tendon-couplerassembliesshall have strength, elongationand

fatigue characteristicssufficient to meetthe basic requirementsof Chapter3.

(2) This may be assumedif :

(a) The geometryand material characteristicsof the anchorageand coupler componentsare such
that their prematurefailure is precluded.
(b) The elongationat failure of the assembliesis not excessive. -
(c) Tendon-anchorage assembliesare not located in otherwisehighly-stressedzones.

For the fatigue requirementsof anchoragesand couplers, refer to relevantStandards. -

(3) The strengthof the anchoragedevicesand zonesshall be adequatefor the transfer of the tendon
force to the concrete and the formation of cracks in the anchorage zone does not impair the function .
of the anchorage.

128 EBCS2 -1995

-" ==
 (4) Thil may be usumed if : APPENDIXS: PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE
-~

(a) The strengthof the anchoragedevicesexceedsthe characteristicbreakingload of the tendon,

either under static loading conditionsor a limited numberof load cycles.
(b) The detailing provisions of this Code are met.

8.2.2.2 DIIds aM ShtGths

8.2.2.2.1 ~Mral

(1) This sectionapplied to post-tensionedconcreteconstructionwhere the tendonsare tensionedin l

internal ducts.

(2) For bondedtendons,where the ductsare grouted after tensioning,the shape(profile) of the duct
shall permit the proper transfer of forces from the tendonsto the concrete. I
i;
(3) The performancerequirements,the methodsof testingandthe methodsof attestationof conformity
shall be defined in relevantStandards.

(4) Requirementscovering the use of ducts and sheaths shall be defined in technical approval
documents
.

(5) Sheathsshould consist of adequatematerialsas specified in relevantStandards.

8.3 8AS1SOF D~IGN

(1) All provisions in Chapter 3 shall apply to prestressedconcrete.

B.3.1 Partial Safety Factors for Materials

(1) Partial safety factors for materialpropertiesare given in Section3.5.3.

B.3.2 Partial Safety Factors for Action on Building Structures

(1) Partial safety factors for different effects of action are given in Table B.l in addition to the
requirementsspecified in Table 3.3.

Table B.1: Partial Factors for Action in Building Structures

Types of Effect Prestressing,'Yp

Favorableeffect 0.9 or 1.0

Unfavorable effect 1.2 or 1.0

(2) For the evaluationof local effects(anchoragezones, bursting pressure)an effort equivalentto the
ultimate characteristicstrengthshall be applied to the tendons(see SectionB.4.3).

(3) For the verification of the designof prestressedelements,the 'Ypvalues in Table B.I should
generally be used. However, for the evaluationof the combined effectsof prestressingand of self-
weight, reduced values of partial safety factors, which do not include allowances for analytical
.uncertainty, may be used (e.g. 'Yp= 1.0 and 'Yo= 1.2).-1111111111111

ESCS2 -1995 129

\

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

-

:8.4 ANALYSIS

(1) All provisions in Chapter4 shall applyto prestressedconcretemembers.

B.4.1 Pr~~ed Slabs

(1) The rules given in (2)-(4) below complementthosegiven in SectionB.4.3.

,
(2) Regardlessof the type of tendonsused(e.g. bondedor unhanded),the contactforces due to the
curvature and friction of the tendonsand the forces acting on the anchoragedevicesmay be treated
as externalloads in the serviceability limit states.

(3) For the ductility classificationof prestressedtendonssee SectionB.2.1.4.3(3).

(4) Plastic analysisshould not be applied to memberswhere pretensionedtendonsare used,unless

j'ustified.

B.4.2. Anchorage Zon~ ror Post-TensioningForces

(1) Suchzones, which are subjectedto concentratedfor~, shall be analyzedand designedto take
accountof:

(a) the overall equilibrium of the zone;

(b) the transversetensile effectsdue to the anchorages,individually and as a whole;
(c) compressionstruts, which develop in the anchor~e zone of post-tensionedmembers,and
local bearingstressesunderthe anchorages.

(2) Suchzones in post-tensionedmembersmay be designedusing the methods given in Section

B.4.2.3 or by using adequatestrut and tie modelsbasedon Section3.8.1.3.

(3) Three-dimensionalmodels should be considered,where the dimensionsof the bearingareaare

small comparedwith the cross-sectionof the anchoragezone.

(4) The detailing requirementsof Chapter7 generally, and SectionB.#;5 andB.6.7.1 in particular,
shall be met.

B.4.3 Determination or the Effects or Pr~~ing

B.4.3.1 General

, (1) This sectionrelatesto structureswhere prestressis provided by fully bondedinternal tendons.

(2) The effects to be consideredare:

,
(a) Local effects aroundanchoragesand where tendonschangeuection.
(b) Direct effects in determinatestructures. .
(c) Direct and secoooaryindirect effectsdue to reduooantrestraints in indeterminatestructures.
(3) For memberscontainingpermanentlyunbondedtendonsrefer to relevantStandards. -

(4) Memberscontainingtendonswhich are temporarilyunbondedduring constructionmay be treated

using simplified assumptions.In general, they may be treated as members with bondedtendons, .

130 EBCS1 -1995

r """",)"

APPENDIX 8: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE !

i
0-

except that at the ultimate limit state. The stress in tendons is assumed not to have increased due to

loading. ':I.".,
.!
..

.
8.4.3.1. DtttrMinQtjo. of Prestressing Force i

(1) The mean value of the prestressing force is given by (a) or (b) below. whichever is appropriate: t

(a) For pre-terisioned members! "

I
p.., = Po -fjp. -fjp,(t) -fjp,.(x) (B. 1) ,I
i

fjp .(x) may require consideration where deflected tendons are use.

(b) For post-tensioned members ~

p.., = Po -fjp c -fjp ,.(x) -fjp..l -fjp,(t) (B.2)

where p.., is the mean value of the prestressing at time t and at a particular point along

the member

Po is the initial force at the a;tive end of the tendon immediately after stressing.

fjp ,.(x) is the loss due to friction

fjp ..1 is the loss due to anchr I.'age slip ,

fjp c is the loss due to elastic deformation of the member at transfer : '

fjp,(t) is the loss due to creep. shrinkage and relaxation at time t.

(2) For limits on the initial prestress and methods of calculating losses, see Section B.5. For

.transmission lengths and the dispersion of prestress. see Section B.5.5.

.(3) For serviceability calculations. allowance shall be made for possible variations in prestress. Two

characteristic values of the prestressing force at the serviceability limit state are estimated from: f ~.

P 1,.,.., = r P ",' ;

(B.3) i
P1,i-./ =ri-./P...,

where Pt ,., and P1,.,.. are respectively the upper and lower characteristic values.

p.., is the mean prestressing force estimated using the mean 'values for the deformation

properties and the losses calculated in accordance with Section B.5.

r and r.,.. may be taken as 1.1 and 0.9 respectively in absence of a more rigorous

determination and provided that the sum of the losses due to friction and time dependent

effects is ~ 30% of the initial prestress. ,',

i (4) The values of p.., which will generally be used in design are : I. f~I

P ..0 is the initial prestress at time t = 0 II :'

P. is the prestress after occurrence of all losses i ..

-(5) At the ultimate limit state the design value of prestress is given by: I

P Ii = Y ~ ".' (B. 4) t

.
(6) Values for 'Yp are given in Table B.l.

EBCS 2 -1995 131 !

-v
I f.

;!
,.

..
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
, ,

(7) For considering local effects at the ultimate limit state, the prestressing force shall be taken as .
equal to the characteristic strength of the tendons.

(8) This applies when checking the influence of concentrated forces or bursting effects at anchorages
or where tendons change direction Section B.5

B.4.~.3 Effects of Prestressingunder Service Conditions

(1) The statically determinate and indeterminate internal forces and moments caused by prestressing
shall be calculated by elastic theory.

(2) For normal buildings where the calculation of crack width is not considered necessary, the mean
values of prestress may be used.

(3) In other cases, where the structural response is highly sensitive to the influence of prestress, the
effects of prestress may be determined according to (a) or (b) below, as appropriate.

(a) For checking cracking or decompression see Section 5.3), the opening of joints between
precast elements and fatigue effects, the relevant estimated characteristic values of the
prestress are used.
(b) ,For checking compressive stresses the mean values of prestress are used.

B.4.3.4 Effects of Prestressingat the Ultimate Limit States

.
B.4.3.4.1 Structural Analysis-Linear Methods

(1) Statically determinate and indeterminate effects of prestress shall be calculated using the
t1.ppropriateultimate design value of the prestressing force.

(2) In linear structural analysis 'Ypmay be taken as 1.0.

(3) Where linear analysis with redistribution is used the moments to which the redistribution is applied
shall be calculated including any statically indeterminate effects of prestress.

B.4.3.4.2 Design of Sections

(1) When assessingthe behavior of a section at the ultimate limit state, the prestressing force acting
on the section is taken as the design value, Pd. The prestrain corresponding to this force shall be
taken into account in the assessmentof section strength.

(2) The prestrain may be taken into account by shifting the origin of the design stress-strain diagram
for the prestressing tendons by an amount corresponding to the design prestress.

(3) 'Yp may be taken as 1.0 provided the following conditions are l'Oth met: -

(a) Not more than 25% of the total area of prestressed steel is located within the compression
zone at the ultimate limit state, and -
(b) The stress at ultimate in the prestressing steel closest to the tension face exceedsf~Jt/'Y';.

If the conditions are not met, the lower value of 'Ypgiven in Table B.1 should be applied to all
tendons. .

132 EBt;$ 2 -1995

 "

"
~
1
,,&
1; 7~

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSEDCONCRETE i ,Ji

.--, : ";1

(4) For the effects of inclined tendons, see Section B.5.5.8. '; ):1
.' (5) Any indirect prestres,c.ing moments due to redundant rf..8traints should be taken at uleir :l ' ;'1
'!
characteristic values. ! 'i~
:i
,I
B.4.3.5 Detenninaticn of the Effects of Time DependentDefonnation of Concrete !

B.4.3.5.1 General

(1) The accuracy of the procedures for the calculation of the effects of creep and shrinkage of
concrete shall be consistent with the reliability of the data available for thE";description cf tllese
phenomena and the importance of their effects on the limit state considered.

(2) In gelleral, the effel.."tsof creep and shrinkage shall be taken into acc{)untonly for the serviceabiiity
limit states. An important exception concerns second order effects.

(3) Special investigations shall be considered when the concrete is subjected to extremes of
temperature.
(4) The effects of steam curing may be taken into account by means of simplified assumptions.

(5) The following assumptions may be adoptoo to give an acceptable estimate of the behavior of a
concrete section if the stresses are kept within the limits corresponding to the normal serviceI
conditions ;I

.(a) creep and shrinkage are independent

(b) a linear relationship is assumed between creep and the stress causing the creep
-(c) non-uniform temperature and moisture effects are neglected
(d) the principle of superposition is assumedto apply for actions occurring at different ages
(e) the above assumptionsalso apply to concrete in tension
i

(6) For the evaluation of the time dependent losses of prestress, the effects of creep, shrinkage and
relaxation of the tendons shall be taken into account (see Section B.5.5). ;
1 '
(7) The creep function is given by the relationship: 1 \ .

i
J(t, to) = 1/Ee(to) + <p(t,.fo)IEe2I (B.5) \.
:
where to is the time at initial loading o{ the concrete i
t is the time considered
J(t,t.,) is the creep function at time t
Ee(t) is the tangent modulus of elasticity at time to
Ee2I is the tangent modulus of elasticity at 28 days
<P(I.Io) is the creep coefficient related to the elastic deformation at 28 days

-Values are given in C~lapter 2 for final creep coefficients cP for typical situations. It
should be noted, however, that the definitions of Ee(lo)
and Ee2Sabove, differ from that in
Section 2.5 where the secantmodulus Ee-.is defined. Hence, where the creep coefficients
-of Table 2.6 are used in connection with Ee(toJand Ee-.,respectively, and where creep
deformations are significant, the values of Table 2.6 should be multiplied by 1.05.

.
EBCS 2 -1995 133
 -
ETHIOPIAN BUILD/NO CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(8) On die basis of the assumptions listed in (5) above, the total strain for concrete subjected to initial .
loidiDa at time t. with a stress 0'0and subjected to subsequent stress variations ~O'(tJ at time tl may
be exp~ed as follows:
E.(t.t..} = f,.(t) + 0'0J(t.t) + E J(t.tJ~O'(tJ (B.6)

In this expression E~(t)denotes an imposed deformation independent of the stresses (e.g.

, shrinkage, temperature effects).

(9) ~or the purpose of structural analysis, Eq. B.6 may be written as follows:

E.(t,t.) .E~(t) + O'(t.) J(t,t.) + [O'(t) -O'(t.)] [~ + x~ ] (B.7)

.Ec(t.) Fc28

where the ageing coefficient x depends on the development of strain with time.

(10) In normal cases, x may be taken as 0.8. This simplification is good in the case of pure
j relaxation of the effects of a constant imposed deformation but is also adequate in cases where onlyI
long tenD effects are considered.,

(II) If the stresses in the concrete only vary slightly, the deformations may be calculated using anI
effective modulus of elasticity:I
Ec.,ff = Ec(to)/(1 + ltI(t.to» (B.8) .I

For the notation see (7) above.I

j B.5. SECTION AND MEMBER D~IGN -I

B.5.1 ~tre§sing Steel: General

(1) Data on material properties given in this section are either representative values, correspondingI
to the relevant steel grade specified in appropriate Standards, or are idealizations suitable for design
purposesII
(2) In general, the properties specified are those given in Section B.2.1.1(5) or other appropriateI
Standards.
II

(3) Unless stated otherwise, design shall be based on a specified grade, represented by itsI
characteristic 0.1 % proof stress ifP>.IJ.I

(4) All types of prestressing steel specified in Section B.2.1, which satisfy the mechanical, physical
and technological requirements or other relevant Standards may generally be used in design, in
accordance with the data given below, unless greater accuracy is required.

B.5.2 Physical Properties or Prestressing Steel ~

(1) The values given in Section B.2.1.3 may be used as design data. They may be assumed to be
valid in the range from -2O"C to 200"C. -

\ 134 EBCS2 -1995 -

r'

.APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

.B.S.3 Mechanical Properties or PrestressingSteel

B.S.3.1 Strength
(1) For all types of prestressingsteelthe valuesfor /~.1k' E,. and/pi shall be defined.

(2) Relevantproperties for definedtypes and gradesof steelmay be taken from relevantStandards.
For other types of steel, the propertiesare to be confirmed by., technicalapprovaldocuments.
,

(3) Design calculationsmay be basedon the nominal size or the nominal cross-sectionalarea of the :
prestressingsteel. ii

B.S.3.2 Modulus of Elasticity

(1) The values givep in SectionB.2.1.4.4 apply.

B.S.3.3 Stress-Strain Diagram

(1) The generalductility requirementsshall be in accordancewith SectionB.2.1.4.3 and as specified

in relevantStandards.

(2) An idealizedbi-linear diagramis given in Fig. B-1. This diagramis valid for temperaturesfrom
-200Cto 200"C.

. 0"

.~-

0'9' Dk
--,
,-'
, Dk'"

i idealised
0.9" Dk -'Dk
~ design I ~s

I
I "

e. .200kN/mm2 1
i
£uk Eo \

1"
Figure ~ 1 Design Stress--sfraTn
DIagram (or 'Prestressings-teel :

(3) Figure B-1 may generallybe used for overall analysis,local verifications and the checkingof
sectioncapacity.

(4) Figure B-1 may be modified, e.g with a flatter or horizontal top branch, for local veriticat1ol~
or sectiondesign. i
I
(5) Designvalues for the steelstressare derivedfrom the idealizedcharacteristicdiagramby.dividing
.by 'Y.,the partial factor for prestressingsteel(see SectionB.3.2) I
r
-EBCS 2 -1995 135 i
i,
 .
(6) For sectiondesign, either of the following assumptionsmay be made: .

(a) a horizontal top branch to the designcurve in Fig. B-1, the stress in the prestressingsteelis
limited to 0.9 f..I'"(; with no limit to the steel strain, although in some cases it may be
convenientto assumea limit.
(b) an inclined top branch, with the increasingsteelstrain limited to .0.01.
,
B.5.3.4 Ductility

(l)Tbe provisions of SectionB.2.1.4.3 shall apply.

(2) For structural analysis,if not statedotherwise,post-tensionedtendonsmay be assumedashaving

high ductility: pre-tensionedtendonsare assumedas having normal ductility.

B.5.3.5 Fatigue
~ (1) For fatigue requirementsfor prestressingsteel, refer to relevant standards.

B.5.3.6 Multi-Axial Stresses

(1) If not statedotherwise in technicalapprovaldocuments,tendonsassembledfrom prestressingsteel

satisfying the requirementsof SectionB.2.1.4.6 may be consideredto withstand the full specified
tensile strength, if the bending radius of the saddle, which is supportingthe tendon at its point of
deviation, satisfiesthe requirementsof Table B.2.

(2) The values in Table B.2 do not relate to the coefficientsof friction in SectionB.5.5.5(8).

Table B.2 Criteria for Satisfying Multi-Axial Conditions in Tendons

Type of tendon
Ratio = minimu~ bending radius
nominal diameter

Single wire or strand, deflected after tensioning 15

Single wire or strand, tensionedin smoothduct 20
Single wire or strand, tensionedin ribbed duct 40
Multi wire or strand tendon Precedingvalues multiplied by n1/~
to num er 0 wires or stran sine ten on
~ = numberof wires or strandstransferringthe radial force of all wires or strandsin the
tendonto the deviator (seeFig. B-2).

B.5.3.7 Anchorageor CouplerAssembliesof Tendons

(1) Tendon anchorageassembliesand tendon coupler assembliessatisfying the performance

requirementsof SectionB.2.2.1.2 may be consideredto withstand the full characteristic
strengthof the tendon.

136 EBCS 2 .1995

 }

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSEDCONCRETE

d ., ."---, "

: ~-:.t.
\, -;'-r,-

PRESTRESSING
TENDON
(assembled from wires or strands)
~

~, l'igure B-3 Example or n1/~ value in Table B-2 (in this case n1/~ = 7/3
t
i
,"! 8.5.4 Technological Properties or Prestressing Steel

8.5.4.1 Relaxation

(1) Certificates accompanyingthe consignmentsshall indicatethe class and relevant relaxation data
.of the prestressingsteel (see SectionB.2.1.5 and relevantstandards).

(2) For designcalculations,the valueswhich maybe taken into accountfor lossesat 1000h are either
-those given in the certificate or thoseassumedin Fig. B-3 for the three classesof steelshown. The
long term values of the relaxationlossesmay be assumedto be three times the relaxationlossesafter
1000h.

(3) An indication of how relaxationlossesincreasebetween0-1000 hours is given in Table B.3.

Table B.3 Indication or Relationship Between Relaxation Lossesand Time up to 1000 hours
Time in hours I 5 20 100 200 500 1000
Relaxationlossesas per-
centagesof lossesafter
1000hours 15 25 35 55 65 85 100

(4) Relaxationat temperaturesof the structureover 20"C will be higher than given in Fig. B-4. This
may affectbuilding structuresin hot climates,power plants, etc. If necessarythe producershould
be askedto include relevant information in the certificate SectionB.2.1.2(2).
" (5) Short-termrelaxationlossesat a temperatureof the structure exceeding6QOCcan be 2 to 3 times
, ..those at 200C. However, in general, heatcuring, over a short per;'Jd, may be consideredto have

no effect on long term relaxationresults(see SectionB.5.5.5).

8.5.4.2 Susceptibilityto StressCorrosion

. (1) The provisions of SectionB.2.1.5.3 apply.

EBCS 2 -1995 137

 j

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

i',

% of 0'..
.
I. It.O CI... I CWlr..)

, ..-.-
..0 CI... I C..r.)

! 4. 4.1 c CS"..,.I
.4
.I

I. I

.0 .0

Initial St~ (~I

Charact.ristic
teniii. Itr.ngth t..

Figure B-3 Relaxation Losses after 1000 h at 20 .,~;.

B.5.4.3 Temperature Dependent Behaviour

(I) For temperature dependent behaviour refer to relevant Standards on Fire Resistance.

B.5.5 Design of Members in Prestressed Concrete

B.5.5.1 General
.
(1) This section relates to structures where prestress is provided by fully bonded internal tendons. .

.(2)
t The effects of prestressing
(a) minimum requirementstofor
beconcrete
considered include:
classes (Section B.5.5.2)

(b) minimum requirements for prestressing units (Section B.5.5.3),

(c) determination of the relevant prestressing force (Section B.4.2)I
(d) initial prestressing force section (Section B.5.5.4)I
(e) loss of prestress (Section B.5.5.5)I
(t) transfer of prestressing forces and anchorage zone design for pre-tensioned members sectionI
(Section B.5.5.6)
(g) anchorage zones in post-tensioned members (Section B.5.5.7)

(3) The provisions Section B.4.3 should be applied in all calculations relating to the effects of
prestress both in global and local analysis and in section design for the ultimate and serviceability
limit states.

B.5.5.2 Minimum Strength Class for Prestressed Concrete

(1) The minimum class for post-tensioned members is C30, and for pre-tensioned members is C40. -

B.5.5.3 Minimum Number of Prestressing Units in Isolated Structural Elements -

(1) Isolated prestressed concrete members shall contain in the pre-compressed tensile zone a minimum
number of prestressing units in order to ensure that, with an adequate reliability, a failure of a certain
number of bars, wires or tendons does not lead to a failure of the member. .

138 EBCS2 -1995

.
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

.(2) Item (1) above applies to structural prestressed members in which no additional load-carrying
capacity due to redistribution of internal forces and moments, transverse redistribution of loads or due
to other measures (e.g normal steel reinforcement) exists.

(3) The requirement of (1) above may be considered to be met if the minimum number of bars,wires
or tendons given in Table B.4 is provided. Table B.4 assumes equal diameters of all bars, wires or

tendons.
(4) The requirement may also be assumed to be satisfied if at least one strand with seven or more
wires (wire diameter ~ 4.0 rom) is provided in the isolated member.

(5) If the actual number of bars, wires or tendons in the isolated member is less than the values given
in Table B.4, adequate reliability against failure should be demonstrated.
,
Table B.4: Minimum Number of Bars, Wires and Tendons in the Pre-Compressed Tensile Zone
of Isolated Members
Type of Units Minimum number

Individual bars and wires 3

Bars and wires, forming a strand or a tendon 7

Tendons except strands (see Item (4) above) 3

. B.5.5.4 Initial Prestressing Force

.(1) The initial prestressing force shall be determined in accordance with Section B.4.3, which also
lists relevant factors affecting loss of prestress.

(2) The maximum force applied to a tendon Po (i.e, the force at the active end, immediately after
stressing, x = 0, see section B.4.3.2) shall not exceed Ap.C1o.max,
where:

Ap is the cross-sectional area of the tendon

C1o.max
is the maximum stress applied to the tendon

C10.~~ 0.80 fpt or ~ 0.90 fpO.J;.'

whichever is the lesser (B.9)

(3) The prestressing force applied to the concrete immediately after tensioning (post-tensioning) or
after transfer (pre-tensioning), i.e, PInO= ApC1pno,
shall not exceed the lesser of the forces determined

from:
ApC1pno
= 0.75fpt Ap' or 0.85/p OoJ;.Ap (B. 10)

where C1pno
is the stress in the tendon immediately after tensioning or transfer.

(4) For pre-tensioned members, P"',0' in (3) above, is calculated from Eq.(B.13) below:

-P""o = Po -APc -fj.lr (-APIJ. (x)) (B.11)

where APc' and APIJ.(X)are defined in Section B.4.3.2.

.APlr is the short-term relaxation loss.

EBCS 2 -1995 139

-
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

(5) For post-tensionedmembers,P111.0

is calculatedfrom Eq.(B.14) below.

p111.0
==Po -~p II -M c -Mp.(x)

(6) Methods for evaluatingMJI, MIr'~c and 4PjJ.(x)are given in SectionB.5.5.5.

(7) The minimum concrete strength required at the time of tensioningor stress transfer shall be If;
~ indicated in technical approval documentsfor the prestressingsystem concerned. Where such
documentsdo not exist, requirementsconcerningreliability and performanceshould be considered.
~c

~,\
(8) 1)e limiting values of (2) and (3) above are generally valid; they may be modified, however,
depending on a number of factors, e.g.

(a) whether it is possibleto replacea damagedtendon,

(b) the consequencesof the fracture of a tendons,in particular dangerto humanlife.
(c) the stresslevels in the concretedue to prestressing
(d) the grade of steel and type of tendonused,
(e) whether or not the tendonsare subsequentlybonded,
(t) the time when the grout is injected into the ducts,
(g) the possibility of achievingthe required prestressingforce in the tendon by overstressing
when unexpectedlyhigh friction is met: in this exceptionalcase,the maximuminitial force
Po may be increasedto 0.95/pO.l~p.

B.S.S.S Loss of Prestress

(1) Loss of prestressshall be calculatedin accordancewith the principles in SectionB.4.3.2.

(2) An estimateis required of the effective prestressat various stagesconsideredin the design,and
hence an allowance has to be made for appropriatelossesof prestressdue to the different factors
given in SectionB.4.3.2. Wheneverpossible,thesecalculationsshould be basedon experienceor
on experimentaldata relatingto the materialsand prestressingmethodsto be used. For a wide range
of structures,and in the absenceof suchdata, the generalrecommendationsgiven in (5)-(11) may be
used, in approximatelyestimatingthe total loss of prestress.

(3) It is recommendedthat the actualvaluesof prestressinglossesat tensioningshouldbe checkedby

measuringthe prestressingforce transferredfrom one end of the tendonto the other.

(4) Immediatelossesshouldbe calculatedin accordancewith (5) to (8) below. Time dependentlosses

should be calculated in accordancewith (9)-(10)below.

(5) Loss of prestressdue to anchorageslip (M.J shouldbe determinedfrom experienceandtechnical

approval documentsrelating to the prestressingsystemto be used.

(6) Calculationof the immediateloss of force in the tendonsdue to elastic deformationof the concrete
(M c) may be basedon the valuesof the modulusof elasticityof the concretegiven in Table 2.5 and -
on the values for the prestressingsteel given in SectionB.3.2.4.4.

For pre-tensioning,the lossesof prestressshould be calculatedon a modular ratio basis, using the -
stress in the adjacentconcrete.

.
140 EBCS 2 -1995 M

--
 --

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSEDCONCRETE
,-
.For post-tensioning,a progressiveloss occurs when tendonsare not stressedsimultaneously.Where
gre<\teraccuracyis not required, this should be calculatedon the basis of half the product of the
modular ratio and the stressin the adjacentconcreteaveragedalongthe lengthof the tendon.~.

(7) The short-termrelaxationloss (4P,,), which occurs in pre-tensioningbetweenstressingthe tendons

and transferring the stressto the concret.e,should be estimatoousingthe data in sectionB.5.4.1.

(8) The loss of prestressin post-tensionedtendonsdue to friction [APJl.(x)]may be estimatedfrom:

APJl.(x) = PD(1 -e-"'" + LzJ) (B.13)

where p. is the coefficient of friction betweenthe tendonsand their ducts

8 is the sum of the angular displacementsover a distancex (irrespectiveof direction or
sign)
k is an unintentionalangUlardisplacement(per unit length)relatedto the profile of the
tendons.

p. dependson the surfacecharacteristicsof the tendonsand the duct, on the presenceof rust, on
the elongationof the tendonand on the tendonprofile. In the absenceof more exactdata, for
tendoI1Swhich fill about50% of the duct, the following valuesfor ,~maybe ~.ssumoo,
when using
Eq.(B-15).
cold drawn wire 0.17
strand 0.19
.deformed bar 0.65
smoothround bar 0.33

Values for k shouldbe given in technical approvaldocuments,and will generallybe in the range
0.005 < k < 0.01 per meter. The value dependson the quality of workmanship,on the distance
betweentendonsupports,on the type of duct or sheathemployed,and on the degreeof vibration
\.\Sedin placing the concrete.

The aboverecommendedvalues for It and k are meanvalues. The actualvaluesused in design

may be .increased or decreased, depending on standardsof control, workmanship, speci3l
precautions,etc., provided that the selectedvaluescan bejustified.

(9) Time dependentlossesshould be calculatedfrom:

Aa .Es{t, t.)Es + 4a,.. + n«f>(t, t)(acI +0"'1KJ)
p.c' A A (B-14)
1 + n2[(1 + ~z~)(1 + 0.8 «f>(t,t»]
AC 1C

where AO""c+.+r is the variation of stressin the tendonsdue to creep,shrinkageand relaxation

at locationx, at time t.
E.(t, t.J is the estimatedshrinkagestrain, derived from the values in Table 2.7 for
-final shrinkage.
n is EjE..
E. is the modulus of elasticity for the prestressingsteel, taken nom Section
B.2.1.4.4.
Ecwo is the modulusof elasticity for the concreteTable 2.5
4a,.. is the variation of stress in the tendonsat sectionx due to relaxation. This
.may be derived from Fig. B.4 for a ratio of Initial stress/characteristic
tensile
stress,(a/l.-) calculatedfrom:

EBCS2 -1995 141

 ."".., , ~

'I
"'

ETHIOPIAN BUILDINO CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE

0', z 0'". -O. 34tl,.~+,+, (B. IS)

where 0'". is the initial stressin the tendonsdue to prestressand permanentactions.

For simplificatiQnand conservatively,the secoooterm in Eq.(B.1S) may be ignored. For

normal buildings, 0', may be takenas 0.85 0',..-

, ~(t.
0'., tj is a creep
is the coefficient,
stress as defined
in the concrete in Section
adjacent 2.S.4 due to self-weightaOOanyother
to the tendons,

permanentactions.
O'cpois the initial stress in the concreteadjacentto the teooons,due to prestress.
A, is the area of all the prestressingtendonsat the level being considered.
A~ is the area of the concretesection.
I~ is the secondmomentof area of the concretesection.
Zqo is the distancebetweenthe centerof gravity of the concretesectionandthe tendons.

In using Eq.(B.14), an assumedvalue of total loss will be required initially, to permit the term 4tl"..
on the right hand side to be evaluated(this term dependson the level of final prestress). An iterative
processis therefore necessaryto solve and balancethe two sidesof Eq.(B.14).

(10) The loss of prestresscalculatedin accordancewith aboveshouldbe addedto that determinedby

above to assessthe final prestress (PRa). It is important to rememberthat these proceduresare
approximate,and may be adjustedto suit particular materials, stressingor designconditions.

(11) The design procooures to take account of the effects of prestress should be in accordance with
Section B.4.3. ~

8.5.5.6 Anchorage Zones of PretensionedMemben -

(1) Where tensile forces can occur, they shouldbe carrioo by additional reinforcement.

(2) A distinction has to be made (seeFig. B-4(a» between:

(a) TransmissionlengthI.. over which the prestressingforce (PJ from a pretensionootendon

is fully transmittoo to the concrete.
(b) Dispersion length i 4' over which the concrete stresses gradually disperse to a linear
distribution acrossthe concretesection.
(c) anchoragelength I., over which the ultimate tendonforce (F"..) in pretensionoomembersis
fully transmittoo to the concrete.

(3) The transmissionlength I. is infIuencooby the size and type of tendon, the surface condition of
the tendon, the concretestrength, the degreeof compactionof the concrete. Values should be basoo
on experimental data or experience with the type of tendon to be usoo. For design purposes,i"
Fig. B-4(b) the transmissionlength is deflnoo as a multiple of the nominal diameter (fj» of the strand
or wire.
I. = fJ.fj> (B.16) .
For strandshaving a cross-sectionalarea ~ 100mm2,and for indentedwires with diameter ~ 8 IDID,
all complying with surface characteristicsspecifioo in relevantstandardsand tensionooaccordingto -
the values given in SectionB.5.5.4, the fJ. valuesgiven in Table B.5 may be adoptoo. The concrete
strength takenshould be that at the momentof transfer. Where the use of ribboo wires is proposoo,
~

142 EBCS 2 -1995 ~

 , 0 ..

, -~
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETf
--I

with diameter ~ 12 mm, valua for ~. Ib(MI1dbe baled on tat do; .a cuWSe,
the valu. in
.Table B.S may be adOpted.

aD

~ I ' I ~G.Ift8&
~ 1 '\ 1
~ \ I
d ~ 1 \ , h
~ I \ I
,~ I ' I

~ I bo
10.811
I ~!!~.:.~!!~

, X

F1gureB-4 Tramfn- of rl'estnM in Prd~ J7'~';:;;:.

Table 8.5 Fadon~. to be taken for TrammiSlioo La1&th of PrstnSlinc StraDdI aDd
Wir5 (Smooth or Indented) in Relation to Cooaete Strm&tb at the Moment of
Transfn-
.Actual concretestrengthat transfer
(MPa) 2S 30 35 40 4S 50

StraOOsand smoothor
~. indentOOwires 75 70 65 ~ 55 50
Ribbed wires 55 50 45 40 3S 30

(4) The designvalue I~ is to be taken at 0.8 I. or 1.2 I. whichever is less favorable for the eff~
considered.

(5) Transmissionlength, anchoragelength and dispersionlength are to be takm from the start of
effective bond.

Start of effective bond should be taken accountof:

(a) tendonspurposelydebonded,at the end.

(b) a neutralizedzone1..0 in the caseof suddenrelease

(6) For rectangular cross-sectionsand straight teOOons,situatednear me bottom of the section, the
dispersionlength can be establishedas:

1'4 .yPbpd + tf2 (B. 17)

(7) -:be anchorage of pretensioning tendons in flexural members at the ultimate limit state is
.influenced by the condition, cracked or uncracked, of the and1oragezone. The part of the b~

EBCS2 -1995 143

 ETHIOPIAN BUILDINO. CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
-
where tendonsare anchored (Fig. B-4(a)] may be consideredas uncrackedif the concretetensile .
stressat the Ultimate Limit State(flexural and principal stresses)does not exceedtlJ' taking account
of t..~erelevantvalue of PA,(see SectionB.4.4.5).

(8) If the tensil~ stressdoes not exceedtlJ' the conditionof anchoragemay be assumedto be fulfilled
without further checks.
,
(8) If the tensilestressdoes not exceedtlJ' it shouldbe shownthat the envelopeof the actingtensile
force does not exceedthe resisting tensile force provided by the tendonsand the reinforcing steel
within the anchoragezone. The ultimate resistingforce F".. of the tendonsaccordingto Fig. B-8(b)
may be determinedas:

F".. = ~P
I 0
~ ~~~
'\I
(B-18)
/f'Ii ",

Po as defined in SectionB.4.3.2(1)
l/f'li as defined in above

Resisting
force
i Crack

: I
: -TA. ~o:

".
I~ .
.~; .Fpx Po max

,,. ~J x

Figure 8..5: Derivation of Eq. (B.t8)

D.S.S.7 Anchorage Zon~ of Post-tensioned Members

(1) The designof anchoragezonesshallbe in accordancewith the proceduresin this sectionandthose

SectionsB.4.3, B.5 B.6.5, B.6.6 and B.7.1.

(2) When consideringthe effects of the prestressas a concentratedforce on the anchoragezone,the

characteristictensile strength of the tendonshall be used.

(3) The bearingstressbehind anchorageplatesshouldbe calculatedin accordanceSectionB.6.7.1.

(4) Tensile forces due to concentratedforces shouldbe assessed

by a strut andthe tie model, or other
appropriate representation(see SectionB.4.2). The resulting reinforcementshould be detailed in -
accordancewith SectionB.6.5 assumingthat it is acting at its designstrength.

(5) The prestressingforce may be assumedto disperseat an angle of spread2{3(seeFig. B-6) starting ~
at the end of the anchoragedevice, where {3may be assumedto be arc tangent2/3.

144 EBCS 2 -1995

 -

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE' -

~ ,

0) .'

!
I
i

b J [B. afC 10"(2/3) rJJ.i-l J

p
I
I
i
l; ;

i
'
I ,"
\ t
: ~;
'. '
I \

Figure B-6 Dispersion of Prestress i : OJ

.." ':

8.5.5.8 Design for Shear i

8.5.5.8.1 Members with Inclined PrestressingTendons '
\

(1) Taking into accountthe effect of inclined prestressingtendons,the designshearforce is givenby:

.V- = V~ -V~ (B. 19)

where Vpd denotesthe force componentof the inclined prestressedtendons,parallel to V,..

-V pd is taken as positive in the samedirection as V,.. .,;

(2) EquationB.19 applies in combinationwith Eqs.4.29 and4.30.

(3) Concerningthe value Vpi in Eq.B.19, two casesshould be distinguished: :

Case 1: The stressesin the tendonsdo not exceedthe characteristicstrengthf~.lk '

The relevant prestressingforce is the meanvalue P"" allowing for losses.

(seeSectionB.4.3.2(1)) multiplied by the relevantsafetycoefficient(generally'Yp= 0.9).

Case2: The steel stressin the tendonsexceedsf~.1k

The prestressingforce is calculatedwithf~.lk ry..

(4) In shearanalysis,the effective depthd is calculated ignoring the inclined tendons.

-B.5.5.9 Limit State of Cracking

(1) All relevant provisions in Section5.3 shall apply.

!

.EBCS 2 -1995 145

.ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.
.B.5.5.9.1 General

~! (1) The durability of prestressedmembersmay, for humid and sea water of aggressivechemical
" environmenttypes of exposure, be more critically affected by cracking. In the absenceof more
ti ~~ailed requirementsthe designcrack width Wkunder the frequentload combinationmay be taken

, (a) 0.2 mm for both post-tensionedand pre-tensionedmembersfor dry exposure.

(b) 0.2 mm for post-tensionedand decompressionfor pre-tensioned members for humid
exposure.
.(c) Decompreesionor coating of tendonsand 0.2 mm for post-tensionedmembers.
(d) The decompressionlimit requiresthat, underthe frequent combinationof loads, all ~arts of
the tendonsor duct lie at least25 mm within concretein. compression.

B.5.5.9.2 Minimum ReinforcementAreas

(1) In prestressedmemberssubjectto compressivenormal force the minimum reinforcementareamay

be reducedbelow that necessaryfor ordinary reinforced concretedue to the influenceof:

(a) the increasedflexural stiffness of the compressionzone, and

(b) the contribution of the prestressingtendons.

(2) I~ prestressedmembers,the minimum reinforcementfor crack control is not necessaryin areas

where,' under the rare combination of actions and the relevant estimated characteristicvalue of
prestressor normal force, the concreteremains in compression.

(3) If the conditions in (2) aboveare not fulfilled, the required minimum area should be calculated
accordingto Section5.3.2(3) with the following valuesfor kc.
(a) For box sections
kc = 0.4 for webs
= 0.8 for the tensionchord
(b) For rectangularsections,the value of kc may be interpolatedbetween0.4 for pure bending
without normal force and zero when
(i) the conditionjust satisfy (2) above,or
(ii) where, under the action of the relevantestimatedvalue of prestress,the depthof the
tensionzone, calculatedon the basisof a cracked sectionunderthe loading conditions
leadingto formation of the first crack, does not exceedthe lesserof h/2 or 0.5 m.

(4) Prestressingtendons may be taken into accountas minimum reinforcement within a 300 mm
square surrounding the tendon, provided that the difference bond behaviour of the tendonsand
reinforcementare taken into account. In the absenceof better information, this may be done by
assumingprestressingtendonsto be 50% effective.

B.5.9.9.3 Control of Cracking without Direct Calculation

(1) For prestressedslabs in buildings subjectedto bending without significant axial tension,measures -
specifically to control cracking are not necessarywhere the overall depth does not exceed200 mm
and the provisions Section7.2.2 have been applied. -
\

(2) For prestressedconcrete sections, Section 5.3.4.2 and Table 5.2 may be applied with
Wk= .2 mIn. The stressesin the reinforcementshould be calculated regarding the prestressas an
external force without allowing for stressincreasein the tendonsdue to loading. .

146
EBCS
2-1995i1R- -
 ..,it
"'
':-

;:'
, C;,"
'.

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ~,c.

i:
!c
.I;
B.' Dgf AnmG PROVISIONS 1
II ~
~;
B.'.1 MranI8nmt of the Prestrsslnl Units III

(1) In the caseof pre-tenai~nin8'the tendonsshall be spacedapart.. \t

("2)In the caseof post-tenslonedmembers,bundled ducts are oot oonnally pennltted. "
f
(3) A pair of ducts, placed vertically on abovethe other, may be used if adequateprecautionsare ~~
taken for tensiOnlnaandJroUtin8. Particular care is necessaryif the tendonsare doubly ~rved. :j t
,
,¥
B.'.2 Cona'ete COYS' :~

(1) The concretecover betweenthe inner surface of the formwork and either a pre-tensionedtendon ~
or 1 duct shall be fixed with due regard to the size of the tendonsof the duct. Minimum covers shall ~
be in accordancewith Section7.1.3, in addition to the following: t
.f-
(I) For pre-tensionedmembers,the minimum cover shall not be less then 2<p,where <pis the t;
diameterof a tendon. Where ribbed wires are used,the minimum cover shall not be lessthen ~.
3<p. '

(b) For post-tensionedmembers,the minimum cover is to the duct. The cover shall not be less
than the diameterof the duct. For rectangularducts, the cover shall not be lessthan the lesser
dimension of the duct cross-sectionnor half the greater dimensionof the duct.

B.'.3 Horizontal and Vertical Spacing

(1) The spacing of ducts or of pre-tensionedtendons shall be such as to ensure that placing and
compacting of the concrete can be carried out satisfactorily and that good bond can be attained
betweenthe concreteand the tendons.

B.6.3.1 ~nsioning
(1) The minimum clear horizontal and vertical spacingof individual tendonsis given in Fig. B-7.

B.6.3.2 Pos~nsioning

(1) Except for pair,c;tducts (see SectionB.5.1.1(3)), the minimum clear spacingbetweenindividual
ducts shouldbe:

(a) Horizontal: <p '2: 40 mm

(b) Vertical: <p'2: 50 mm
where <pdenotesthe diameter of the duct.

B.6.4 Anchorages and Couplers for PrestressingTendons

(1) The anchoragedevicesusedfor post-tensionedtendonsand the anchoragelengths in the case of

.pre-tensioned tendons shall be such as to enable the full design strength of the tendons to be
v developed,taking accountof any repeated,rapidl! changingaction effects.

(2) Where couplersare used,theseshall be so place(!by taking accountof the interferencecausedby

.theses devices,i.e. that they do not affect the bearing capacityof the memberand that anytemporary
anchoragewhich may be neededduring constructioncan bt"-introduced in satisfactorymanner.

EBCS 2 -1995 147

.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
/

..L
"T8 8, :~.
.r1-C1Onwn
1-1
..cd-..t.
5"""
, c ~
c 2Omm

F1aure&..7Minimum Clear Spadnar.. PretenJ1CM1ed

TeDdca

(3) Calculationsfor local effects in the CODCl'de

aM for the tnDIvene reinforr~ ~d bemade
in accordancewith SectionB.4.2.

(4) In general, couplersshould be located awayfrom intermediatesuPJX}rts.

(5) The placing of couplerson so~ or DX>re

of the teOOoDs
at one crou-section shouldbe avoided.

B.6.5 Anchorage Zones for P.-t-Tensionina ¥orcs

(I) Anchoragezon~ should always be provided with distributed reinforcemeDtnear all surfacesin
the form of an orthogonalmesh.

(2) Where groupsof post-tensionOO cablesare locatedat a certain distancefrom eachother, suitable
links should be arrangedat the eOOsof the members,u a protection againstsplitting.
.
(3) At any part of the zone, the reinforcement ratio on either side of the block should be at least
O.IS~ in both directions.

(4) AIl reinforcementshould be fully anchored.

(5) Where a strut and tie Ioodel hasbeenusedto determinethe tr3DSverse ~ile force, the following
detailing rules should be followed:
(a) The steelarea actuallyrequired to provide the tie force, acting at its designstrength,should
be distributed in accordancewith the actual tensile stressdistribution, i.e. over a length of
the block approximatelyequal to its greatestlateral dimension.
(b) Closed stirrups should be used for anchoragepurposes.
(c) AIl the anchoragereinforcementshould preferablybe formed into a 3-dimensionalorthogonal
grid.

(6) Special attentionshould be given to anchoragezoneshavingcross sectionsdifferent in shapefrom

that of the general cross-sectionof the beam.

B.7 CONSfRUCTlON AND WORKMANSIUP

B.7.1 Obj~ves
(I) This Sectionp~ovides,in addition to thosegiven in Chapter8 of this Code, minimum specification \
requirementsfor prestressingsteel and for the standardof wor~~ip that must be achievedon site
in order to ensurethat the designassumptionsin this Codeare valid and hencethat the intelKledlevels
of safety and of durability will be attained. .

148 EBCS2 -1995

 .

~ APPEDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

.B.7.2 Basic Requirements

(1) Prestressingsteel shall comply with the requirementsof SectionB.2.1 of this Code.

(2) The prestressingdevices (anchorages,couplers, sheaths and ducts) shall comply with the
requirementsof SectionB.2.2 of this Code.

(3) The tendons(wire, bars, cables),anchoragedevices, couplersand sheathsused shall be those in j

the project design documents.They shall be capableof being identified as such.

B.7.3 Transport and Storage of the Tendons

(1) Tendons, sheaths,anchoragedevices and couplers shall be protected from harmful influences
place. transport and storageand also when placed in the structure, until after concretinghas taken
during 'I ,

(2) During transport and storageof the tendons,the following shouldbe avoided:

(a) any type of chemical, electro-chemicalor biological attackliable to causecorrosion;

(b) any damageto the tendons; ::
(c) any contaminationliable to affect the durability or bond properties of the tendons; t
(d) any defonnation of the tendons, not provided for the design; :
(e) any unprotectedstorage,exposureto rain or contactwith the ground; :~,
(t) the use of water transportwithout suitablepackaging; !
.(g) welding in the vicinity of prestressingtendonswithout the provision of special protection r
(from splashes). I'I
.'t
(3) For sheaths,the following should be taken into consideration: )

(a) local damageand corrosion inside should be avoided;

(b) water-tightnessshouldbe ensured; ;~..
(c) it should be resistantto mechanicaland chemical attack. ,
!
,
B.7.4 Fabrication of Tendons J
i

(1) The devicesused in jointing the tendons,for their anchorageand coupling shall be as specified
in relevant Standards.The prestressingmembers shall be assembledand placed in position in
accordancewith the relevantStandards.The sheathsand their connectionsshall be as specified in the
project designdocuments.

(2) Particular considerationshould be given to:

(a) maintaining the identificationmarks on all materials;
(b) the appropriatemethodsfor cutting;
(c) the straight entry into the anchorageand couPlersas required by the manufacturer;
(d) assembly;
(e) transportation;when lifting by crane, any local crushingor bending of the tendonsshould be
avoided.
~ B.7.5 Placing of the Tendons

(1) Placing of the tendonsshall be carried out in compliancewith the criteria relating to:
.. (a) the concretecover and the spacingof the tendons;

.EBCS 2 -1995 149

c

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .

-

(b) the permissibletoleranc-esin respectof the positionof the tendons,couplersand anchorages; .

(c) the easewith which the concretecan be cast.

(2) The tolerancesrequired for the placing of the prestressingtendonsshallbe those given in Section
8.2. alternativelythey shall be statedin the contractdocuments.

(3~ The sheathsshould be fixed carefully accordingto the designer's specificationof dimensions,
spacersand supports.

(4) After placing the sheathsin position, vents should be provided at both ends and at their high
points, as well as at all points where air or water may accumulate; in the case of sheathsof
considerablelength, vents are also neededat intermediatepositions.

(5) The sheathsshould be protectedfrom penetrationof extraneousmaterialsuntil the completionof

grouting.

B.7.6 Tensioning of the Tendons

(1) Prestressingshall be in accordancewith a pre-arrangedstressingprogram.

(2) Written instructionsshall be provided at the site or in the works on the prestressingprocedureto
followed.

(3) Workmen and staff engagedin stressingshall be skilled and have had specialtraining.
.
(4) During prestressing,suitable safetymeasuresshouldbe takenand be recordedby an engineer.
.
B.7.6.1 Pre-tensioning

(1) In ~e caseof pre-tensioningthe instructionsfor prestressingshall specify:

(a) the prestressingtendonsand the prestressingdevices;

(b) any specialsequencein which the prestressingtendonsare to be tensioned;
(c) the jack pressureor the forces at the jacks which must not be exceeded;
(d) the final pressure which must be attained after stressing has been completed or the
correspondingforces at the jack;
(e) the maximum permissibleextensionof the tendonsand slip in the anchorage;
(t) the mannerand sequencein which the tendonsare to be released;
(g) the required concretestrengthat the time of release,which shouldbe checked;
(h) operational suitability of re-useableanchoragecomponents.

(2) the necessityfor temporary protection of the tendonsafter tensioningand before castingshould
be checked. Where necessary,the protective material should not affect bond and should have no
detrimental effect on the steelor the concrete.

B.7.6.2 Post-tensioning

(1) The following shall be specified by the designer: .

\

(a) the prestressingprocessto be employed;

U (b) the type and grade of the prestressingsteel;
(c) the number of bars or wires in the individual tendons; .

150 EBCS 2 -1995 &

 'I

APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSEDCONCRETE

.(d) the required concretestrengthprior to tensioning;

(e) the order in which successivetendonsshouldbe tensioned,specifyingthe locationwherethe
tensionis to be applied;
(t) where appropriate,the time of the removal of the falsework during tensioning;
(g) the force required to be developedat the jack;
(h) the designelongationrequired;
(I) the maximumslip;
0) the number, type and location of couplers.

(2) The following should be recordedby the supervisingengineerduring the tensioningprocess:

(a) the type of prestressingdevicesused which shouldbe calibrated;

(b) the elongationmeasuredon site;
(c) the measuredpressurein the jacks; 1
(d) the observedvalue of slip; :
(e) the deviation of the measuredvaluesfrom the designvalues; :1
(t) the actual concretestrength;
(g) the actual order in which successivetendonsare tensioned;
(h) where appropriate,the time at which the formwork has beenremoved.

B.7.7 Grouting and other Protective Measur~

(1) Tendonsplaced in sheathsor ducts in the concrete, couplers and anchoragedevices shall be
protected againstcorrosion.
.
(2) shouldthe delay betweenstressingand groutingexceedthe time permitted, then protectionof the
.tendons shall continue until grouting takesplace.

(3) Where temporary protectionis provided, the materialused shall have an approval documentand
shall not have a deleteriouseffect on the prestressingsteelor on the cementgrout.

(4) Written instructionsshallbe provided for the site or the works for the preparationand execution
of the grouting.

(5) Corrosionprotectionof the tendonsis ensuredby filling all voids with a suitablegroutingmaterial
: (usually cementmortar); as a rule, the anchorageshould be envelopedin concreteor mortar. This
I objective is metby:

(a) using approved grout materials (must remain alkaline, no harmful components)and by
coveringthe tendonscompletely;
(b) filling the ducts completely (including voids betweentendons) with a grout which after
hardening fulfills the structural requirements (strength, bond, modulus of elasticity,
! shrinkage).

B.7.7.2 Cement Grout

~

(1) The cementgrout usedshall have adequateproperties, for example:

I
j (a) high fluidity and cohesionwhen plastic;
(b) low shrinkagedeformationwhen hardening;
(c) no loss of fines ("bleeding").
 I

.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCREtE
.
(2) Approp~iate materials (typ~ of cement, admixtur~) shall be used and the mixing process
(batching, water-cementratio. procedure,time) shall ensurethe requiredproperti~.

(c) Chlorides (as ~ by mass cement)from all sourceashall not exceedthe values given in the
specified Standards.
,
B.7.7.3 Instructionsto the SIte

(1) Before grouting starts, the following preconditionsshall be fulfilled:

(a) equipmentoperational(including .standby. grout pump to avoid intemlptions in the event.

.of malfunction)
(b) permanentsuppli~ of water under pressureand of compressedair;
(c) materialshatched(excessto allow for overflow) ,
(d) ducts free of harmful material(e.g. water); .
(e) ventspr~ed and identified;
(t) preparationof control testsfor grout;
(a) in ClSeof doubt, grouting trail on representativeducts;
(h) groutflow not affected.

(2) The grouting program shallspecify:

(a) the characteristicsof the equipmentand the grout;

(b) order of blowing and washingoperations;
(c) order of grouting operationsand fresh grout tests(fluidity, segregation);
(d) grout volume to be preparedfor eachstageof injection;
(e) precautionsto keep ducts clear;
(t) instructionsin the eventof incidentsand harmful climatic conditions;
(h) where necessary,additionalgrouting.

B.7.7.4 Grouting Operations

(1) Before injecting, it shouldbe checkedthat the grouting program can be fulfilled.

(2) The injectingprocessshouldbe carried out at a continuousand steadyrate. In somecircumstance:

(large diameter,vertical or inclined ducts) post-injectionmay be necessaryto replacebleedwaterb:
grout.

(3) After completionof grouting, loss of groutfrom the duct shouldbe prevented.To allow expansiol
of grout during hardeningand to displacebleedwater, appropriateventsmay be opened.

(4) After injecting, if large voids are suspected,the effectivenessof groutingshouldbe checkedwitJ
appropriateequipment.

B.7.7.5 Sealing
-.
(1) Where nec~';~J" all openings,grouting tube.;and ventsshall be sealedhermeticallyto preven
penetrationof water and harmful products.
,.

152 EBCS2.. 1996

. ~ ~ APPE~~~~SSED~~~~

.B.7 .7.6 Other Protections

(1) Tendons may be protectedby materialsbasedon binamen,eI'Oxyresins,rubber, ac, provided that
there are no detrimentaleffects on bond, rIte resistance,aOOother essentialp~~es.

B.8 QUALITY CONTROL

B.8.1 Objediva
(1) This Sectionprovides, in addition to thosegiven in Chapter9 of this Code, the minimum control
measuresfor design and construction of prestressedconcretemembers. They comprise essential ;'1
actionsand decisions,as well as check to be made, in compliancewith specifications,standardsaOO ~,;
the general state-of-the-art,to ensurethat all specified requirementsare met. tiC'
,1, c
,-

B.8.2 Compliance Contro~ j

".
~'::
(1) For prestressingsteelsand prestressingdevices, SectionB.7 shall apply. ~i
'~i'~
B.8.2 Control prior to Cona-ding and during Pr~tressing tt
(1) Before beingplaced in position, the tendonsshouldfor anydamagethat might haveoccurredsince ' ~1

arrival on site or at the factory. t:

r
.(3) Before tensioning it is advisable to check that the prestressingoperation can be carried out t
correctly. Checksshould be madethat the requirementsof SectionB.7.6 are being met, at the time 1
.of transfer of-the prestressingforce. ~"
"
(4) A prestressingrecord shouldbe kept of the measurement madeat eachstageof stressing(pressure
in the jacks, elongations,slippage at the anchorages,etc.). ! ,,c
1
I'

(5) The time elapsed betWeen prestressing and the completion of the protective measures for the steel (
(grouting) should be controlled and noted. \:

Before grouting, it shouldbe ensuredthat the provisions of SectionsB.7. 7.3 and B.7. 7.4 are applied i"
and checked. \{
.
(6) During grouting it is necessaryto check the injection pressure,the free flow of the grout from '
the vents, to look for grout leaks, to check the quantity of injectoo grout as well as to take samples
for checking viscosity and loss of water. Where necessary,the strength of the grout should be

checkoo.

Jc C

.
*
EBCS 2 .1995 153
 '..cl

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEn BLANK]

154 EBCS 2 -1995

 .
,
INDEX .

Cement 89, 93 f'..

j.
Accidental actions 18, 20 Cementgrout 150 i,
Accidental situations 18 Characteristiccompressivecube strength 9 ~$:
Actions 18-21,23 Characteristiccrack width 61 ~
Additional eccentricity 39 Characteristiccylinder Ii;.
Admixtures 91 compressivestrength 9
Aggregates 89, 94 Characteristicstrength 21
Allowance for imperfections 32 Characteristicstrengthof concrete 21
Alternate design method 24 Characteristicstrengthof
Amplified sway momentsmethod reinforcing steel 13
for sway frames 40, 41 Characteristictensile strength 10
Analysis of flat slab structures 119 Characteristicvalues 19
Analysis of line elements 24 Characteristicyield stress 13
Analysis of sections 29 Check tests 105
Analysis of slabs 107 Check testson structuralconcrete 104
Analysis of sway frames 38 Circular columns 41
Anchorage 14,69,71, 78, 81, 126, 134 Circular ties 86
Anchorage length 78~82, 144 Classificationand geometryof
Anchorageof bottom reinforcement reinforcing steel 13
at supports 82 Classificationof concreteworks 1
Anchoragezones 127, 137, 144, 144, 147 Classificationof structures 34
Anchoragezones for post-tensioningforces 147 Closedlinks 49
Anchoragezonesof post-tensionedmembers 144 Coefficient of thennal expansion 12, 13, 124
Anchoragezonesof pretensionedmembers 144 Coiled products 124
.Anchorages 125, 146 Column strip 119
Applied load effect 53 Columns 25, 35, 84
Approximate method 43 Combinationof actions 23
.Arches 25 Combinationvalue 20
Arrangementof the prestressingunits 145 Combinationvalues 19
Assessmentof results 106 Combined action-effects 49
Axial load capacity 66 Compatibility torsion 48
Bars 124, 147 Completedstructure .102
Basic anchoragelength 78 Compliancecontrols 102, 150
Basis of design 17. 29, 127 Compliancecontrols for the
Batching 94 completedstructure 102
Beams 25, 45 Compliancecriteria 104
Bearing 70 Compositionof the concrete 91
Bending 49 Compressionmembers 31, 36
Bending moment coefficients 115, 122 Compressionreinforcement 31
Bending of bars 75 Compressivestrengthof concrete 9
Biaxial bending of columns 43 Concentratedforces 72
Bond 14, 77 Concreteconstructionrules 93
Bond forces 75 Concretecover 75, 99, 145
Bonded tendons 127 Constituentmaterialsof concrete 89
Braced frames 32, 35 Constructionjoints 95
Bracedwalls 63, 66 Constructionprocedures 102
Bracing system 35 Continuousdeepbeams 66
Buckling curves 43 Continuousslabs 114
Bundled bars 81 Control for curing the concrete 101
Bursting forces 73 Control of cracking 145
; Cables 147 Control of mixing 101
Calculationof deflections 56 Control prior to concreting 150

.
EBCS2 -1995 155
 .
.Conversion factors for strength 10 Distribution of concentratedloadll 107
Corbels 68, 87 Distribution of design moments 117
~
Comer column 53 Dry environment 59,80
Couplers 125, 134, 146, 1~7 Ductility 13, 14, 127, 132
Crack formation 59 Ductility characteristics 124
Crack widths 59 Ducts 127, 147
Cracking due to shear 63 Durability I, 58, 91, 99
Cracksdue to flexure 59 Edge beams 26
Creep 11,25,42,56, 137 Edge column 53
Creep coefficient 11 Edge panels 119
Critical load ratio 34 Effect of creep 42
Cn'tical sectionfor shear 44 Effective buckling length 36
Critical section for torque 49 Effective column 43
~bical specimens 9 Effective depth 55
Curing of concrete 92, 97 Effective flange width 26
Curtailment of longitudinal Effective height 64, 66
flexural reinforcement 81 Effective span length 26
Deep beams- 31,66, 87 Effective width 26,47, 107
Deep shearspans 67 Effects of actions 21
Deflection 55 Effects of prestressing 127, 130
Deflecti~ns 18 Effects of time dependent
Deformationpr,opertiesof concrete 10 deformationof concrete 137
Deformations 18 Elastic values of supportmoments 116
Density 124 Equilibrium torsion 48
Depth of lift 94 Equivalentdiameter 81
Depth of plain concretefooting 70 Equivalentframe method 115
Design bond strength 77 Equivalentgeometric imperfections 32
Design for shear 66, 149 Equivalenthollow section 48, 49
Design of footings 70 Equivalentreinforcementareas 41
Design of isolatedcolumns 39 Equivalentwall thickness 49 .
Design of membersin prestressedconcrete 137 Fabrication 98
Design of plain concretewalls 66 Fabricationof tendons 148
Design of plane elements 27 Fabricationof the reinforcement 97
Design of reinforced concretewalls 63 Factors for adjustingspan moments 117
Design of sections 130 Falsework 95
Design of shearreinforcement 46 Fatigue 14, 45, 98, 125, 126, 134
Design of torsional reinforcement 49 Final creep coefficient 12
Design procedures 32 Final shrinkagestrains 12
Design situations 18 First-order analysis 38, 40
Design strength 21 First-order design moment 41
Design strengthfor concrete 22 First-order eccentricity 39
Design strengthfor steel 22 First-order theory 32, 34
Designvalues of actions 20 Fixed actions 18
Design values of the effectsof actions 21 Flange in compression 47
-Designed mixes 89 Flange in tension 47
Detailing of reinforcement 75 Flat slabs 28,53, 107, 119
Detailing of structuralmembers 83 Flexural members 31
Detailing provisions 75, 145 Flexural reinforcement 69,71, 84
Diagonal compression 49 Footing depth 70
Diagonal compressionfailure 44 Footings 68, 70
Diagonal tension 44, 47 Footings on two piles 71
Diameter of ties 84 Formwork 91,95
Diameterof vertical bars 87 Frame 34
Dispersionlength 144 Frame stability 38 '
Distancebetweenlateral supports 31 Free actions 18

156 EBCS 2 -1995

 f .c
~ r," , i
?;

Frequencyof sampling 102 Load arrangements 24 i ;

, Frequentvalues 19, 20 Load cases 24:
Fresh concrete 91 Load testsof structure 105 t
Geometry of reinforcing steel 13 Loaded area 50 i
Gradesof concrete 9 Loads on supportingbeams 116
Grouting 150 Local forces 71
Grouting operations 150 Long term deflections 57
High bond bars 14 Longitudinalbars 84
High ductility 14 Longitudinal cracks 125
Holes in areasboundedby columnstrips 122 Longitudinal reinforcement 49, 83, 81, 84
Holes in areascommonto a columnstrip Longitudinal shear .46
and a middle strip 122 Longitudinal stresses 49
Holes in areascommonto two columnstrips 122 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement 49
Hollow sections 49 Loops 83
Horizontal and vertical spacing 146 Loss of prestress 144
Horizontal reinforcement 87 Margins of strength 104
Hot weatherconcreting 91 Materials 1, 21, 89, 101
Humid environment .59, 80 Maximum aggregatesize 77
Idealized bi-tinear diagram 132 Maximum bar diameter 59
Idealized stress-straindiagram for concrete 29 Maximum cementcontent 92
Immediatedeflections 56 Maximum reinforcementratio 83
Imperfections 24, 32 Maximum spacing 63, 83
Inclined compression 47 Measurementsduring the tests 105
Inclined shearreinforcement 46 Mechanicalproperties 124, 126
Inclined stimlps 46 Mechanicalpropertiesof prestressingsteel 132
Indirect actions 19 Mechanicalpropertiesof reinforcing steel 14
.Indirect supports 73 Memberssubjectedto axial tension 45
Initial prestressingforce 143 Members subjectedto significant
Initial swayimperfections 34; 35 axial compression 45
.Inspection of materials 101 Members with inclined prestressingtendons 149
Inspectionprior to concreting 101 Memberswithout significant axial forces 45
Instructions to the site 150 Middle strip 119
Interior column 54 Minimum cementcontent 92
Internal panels 117 Minimum concretecover 75
Isolatedcolumns 34, 42 Minimum concretestrength 143
Isolatedprestressedconcretemembers 137 Minimum cover requirements 59, 80
Joints 83, 81,95,98 Minimum diameter 75
Lap joints ~1 Minimum diameterof bend 75
Lap length 83 Minimum effective depth 56
Laps 83 Minimum flange thickness 25
Lateral reinforcement 84 Minimum footing depth 70
Lean concrete 9 Minimum numberof bars 84, 143
Limit stateof crack formation 59 Minimum numberof longitudinal
Limit stateof crack widths 59 reinforcing bars 84
Limit stateof cracking 149 Minimum reinforcement 58, 59, 84, 149
Limit stateof deflection 55 Minimum shear reinforcement 44
Limit states 17 Minimum strengthclass for
Limit statesof cracking 58 prestressedconcrete 137
Limiting value of ultimate torque 49 Minimum thickness 71
Limits of slenderness 36 Minimum torsional reinforcement 49
Limits on deflection 55 Minimum web reinforcement 83
Line elements 24 Mixing 94
I Linear analysis 27 Modulus of elasticity 11, 14, 125, 132
Linear elastic theory 24 Moment coefficients 113
Linear methods 130 Moment in footin2s 68

-EBCS 2 -1995 157

 Moment in pile caps 71 Protectivtl mtla!iurtl!i 150
Moment magnification tactor 40 Punching 44, 50, 70 "
Moment transfer between slab and column 119 Punching resistanctl 53
Moment transfer between slabs and columns 54 Quality control 101, 150
Multi-axial stresses 125, 134 Quasi-permanent value 20
Negative moments at free edge 122 Quasi-permanent values 19
Non-<:ompliance 102 Rectanglar diagram 29
Non-linear analysis 27 Rectangular columns 41
Non-sway frames 32, 36, 38 Redistribution of moments 26
'Non-sway mode 36 Reinforced concrete walls 63
Nonnal ductility 14 Reinforcing steel 13, 94
<?ne-way footings 69 Reinforcing steel construction rultls 97
One-way slabs 107 Relative eccentricity 43
Opening in panels 122 Relaxation 125, 134
Openings in slabs 52 Relaxation losses 134
Panel moments 108 Removal of formwork and falsework 96
Panel with marginal beams 126 Representative values of accidental actions 20
Parabolic-rectangular diagram 29 R~presentative values of actions 19
Partial safety factors 23 Representative values of permanent actions 19
Partial safety factors for action 127 Representative values of variable actions 20
Partial safety factors for materials 22, 127 Requirements for effective depth 55
Particular Cases 71 Requirements for loops 83
Pedestals 70 Requirements of fresh concrete 91
Permanent actions 18, 19 Resistance to diagonal tension 47
Persistent situations 18 Resistance to inclined compression 47
Physical properties of prestressing steel 132 Rib spacing 25, 84
Physical properties of reinforcing steel 13 Ribbed bars 13, 14
Pile caps 71 Ribbed slabs 84
Placement of concrete 101 Ribbed wires 147
Placing of concrete 91, 94 Sampling 102
Placing of steel 98 Sealing 150
Placing of tendons 148 Secant modulus of elasticity 11
Plain concrete footing 70 Second-order eccentricity 39
Plain concrete pedestal 70 Second-order effects 25, 27, 32, 36
Plain concrete walls 66 Second-order elastic global analysis 38
Plane elements 27 Second-order theory 32
Plane frames 34 Secondary reinforcement 84
Plastic analysis 27 Section design 132
Plates 25 Segregation 94
Poisson's ratio 11 Seismic design 1
Post-tensioned members 129, 143, 145, 149 Sequence of measures 102
Post-tensioning forces 127 Service values 19
Pre-tensioned members 129, 143, 145 Serviceability 1
Pre-tensioning 149 Serviceability limit state 25
Prescribed mixes 89 Serviceability limit states 17, 22, 24, 25, 48, 55
Prestressed concrete 1, 129 Shear 17,22,48,49,62,70,71
Prestressed slabs 127 Shear carried by deep shear spans 67
Prestressed steel 129 Shear crack width 62
Prestressing 18 Shear force coefficients 112, 122
Prestressing steel 132 Shear in footings 70
Prestressing devices 129, 125, 147 Shear reinforcement 46, 83
Prestressing force 129 Shear resistance of concrete 45
Prestressing steel 132 Shear resistance of plain walls 66
Prestressing tendons 146 Shear resistance of reinforced walls 64
Production control 101 Shear spans 66

158 EBCS 2 -1995

 " '". ,"""~

Shearstrengthof deepshearspans 67 Tend,ons 129, 134, 143, 147, 148 ~

I~
Sheaths 127,147 Tensllestrength 14 I'
Short walls 63 Tensile zoneof isolatedmembers 143 f
Short-term relaxationlosses 135 Tensioningof the tendons 148 i
Shrinkage 11.25.56,137 Test loads 105
Shrinkage strain 11 Testing methods 102
Simplified method 122 Thicknessof deepbeams 87
Slabs 25. 45, 84, 107 Thin walls 48
Slenderbracedwalls 66 Ties 83, 84
Slendercolumns 43 Time dependenteffects 25
Slenderwalls 63 Tolerances 98, 148
Slendernessratio 35, 39 Tolerancesfor concretecover 99
Smoothbars 13 Tolerancesfor constructionpurposes 99
Solid slabs 107 Torques 48
Spacingof horizontal bars 87 Torsion 48, 49
Spacingof lateral supports 31 Torsion at comers 115, 112
Spacingof reinforcement 77 Torsional eccentricity 40
Spacingof vertical bars 87 Torsional reinforcement 49, 83
Spatial variation 18 Torsional resistance 48, 49
Special structural elements 63 Total eccentricity 39
Specificationof concrete 89 Transientsituations 18
Spe,cificationof reinforcement 93 Transmissionlength 144
Staggeringrule 81 Transmissionreinforcement 76
Standard mixes 89 Transport 97
Stiffness 26 Transportof tendons 147
,Stirrups 46, 49, 62, 83, 83 Transportationof concrete 101
Storage 97 Transporting 94
# Storageof tendons 147 Transversereinforcement 46, 87
Story buckling load 41 Transverseribs 25, 84
Strain distribution 29 Transversespacing 83
, Strands 124 Two-way action 44
Stresscorrosion 125, 137 Two-way rectangularfootings 69
Stress-straindiagram for steel 31 Two-way slabs 101
Stress-straindiagrams 11, 14, 124, 132 Two-way squarefootings 69
Structural concrete 102 Types of check tests 105
Structural elements 34 Ultimate limit state 22, 24, 44, 46, 105
Structural safety 99 Ultimate limit state in punching 50
Structural stability 32 Tultimate limit state in shear 44
Supplementaryclassifications 19 Ultimate limit states 17,23, 130
Supplementaryreinforcement 87 Ultimate shearforce 44
Supportmoments 116 Ultimate torque 49
Surface condition 125 Unbracedstructures 35
Surface finish 96 Unbracedwalls 63, 66
Susceptibilityto stresscorrosion 125, 137 Units 2
Sway frames 34, 38, 40, 43 Values of accidentalactions 20
Sway mode 37 Values of actions 19,20
Sway moments 40 Values of permanentactions 19
T-beams 26,83 Values of the effects of actions 21
T -section 47 Values of variable actions 20
T-sections 48 Variable actions 18,20
Technologicalproperties 14, 125 Vertical reinforcement 86
Technologicalproperties of prestressingsteel 134 Vertical spacing 146
Temperature 91 Vibration 18
I Temperaturedependentbehaviour 137 wall 25
Temporary work inserts 96 Walls 25, 63, 86

.EBCS 2 -1995 159

.
 Water 89 "

Web-flange connections 46, 84

Weldability 13, 15 I
Welded fabric 13
Welded mesh reinforcement 97
Welding 97,98
Wires 124, 143
Workability 91
-Workmanship 1, 89, 147
Yield stress 14
"

,;;'~:'"'.~

;.

160 EBCS 2 -1995

 -, -~¥
I C":.,

I
I CHAPTER1
MILLED PRODUCTS & SAWN BOARDS
I

I 1.1 SCOPE

I (1) Thisspecificationappliesprimarilyto seasdnedsawnboardsfromEthiopian indigenous

andexoticspecies,.
The~rades areintended for usewhereappearanceis of primeimportance.
Theboardsmaybe full lengthor finger-jointedby agreement
between tbe purchaserandthe
I manufacturer.

I 1.2 TIMBERSPECIES

(1) Thisspecification
appliesto all Ethiopian
grownandadopted
species.'

I Table1.1 Major Species

Availablein the Marketin the form of Sawnboards.

I ::: BotanicalName Common~ 0::.:

I 1 AlbiziaGrandibracteata Sessa
2 AlbizinGumrnfera Sissa
3. AlbiziaSchimperiana Sissa(female
I 4 AllophyllusAbyssinica
5 AningeriaAdolfi Friedericii Keraro
I 6 Apodytesdimidiata Chelleleka
7 BlighiaUnijugata Tengi
8 bosquieaPhOberous Gebo

I
I
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS -5 1995 1

I ~k,.
 ~ZA TION~F TIMBER-_-
Table 1.1 cont'd
Ser. Botanical Name Common Local Name

No.
9 Celtis Africana Amalaka
10 Chlorophora Excellsa Dego (Irok<:»
11 Cordia Africana Wanza
12 Croton Macrosta Chyus Bessana
13 CupressLustanica YeferenegeThid
I 14 Diospyros Abyssinica Loko
15 EkebergiaRupplinia Samba
I 16 EucalyptusGlobulus Nech Beherzaf
17 EucalyptusGrandis Grandis
I 18 EucalyptusSoligna Saligna(Key Baherzaf)
I I 19 FagaropsisAngolensis Dero
2;0 HageniaAbyssinica Koso
21 JuniperusProcera Thid B\ltugi
I 22 Manilkara Butugi Kolati
23 Mimusops Kummel Gonji
I 24 Morous Musyzagia (species) Soecho
25 OcoteaKenyensis Gegema
26 Olea Welwitschi Damot Wi'ira
I " 27 Olea Hochestiteria Pat~la
28 Pinus Fatula Fatula
I 29 Pinus Radiata Radial:1
,~ 30 ProdocarpusGracillior Zigl1a
ii- 31 PolysciasFe.rru~inea Z~nge~oWelll1er
I If 32 PygeumAfncarnum Tlkunnchef
i!~ 33 ScheffleraAbyssinica -
ill 34 SyzygiumGuineense Dok~ma
I: ,\ 35 War Burgia Ugandensis K(~nf:l(Beffl~ri

: 36 Acro Carpus
I "

~ ; i

,-'!"'
:~
c~~, [:j Note: For further details on characteristicsof timber specie~refer tl' API'~r,dlx,\
I "',~ '

I !~Il! '"'
;~L
$';" I

c:'

I " 2 EBCS. 5 1995 ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARD

3*)£~,:
I

I E~~~~!._.
I 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

Face That surface1.1pOJI

which the quality of the board is detenniI\e.dw,hen
I grading is basedon face appearance.

I width and thickness The width and thicknessof the sawnboard at the time of grading.

tolerance At the time of gradingthe width and thickness of -boardsshall not

I differ from the ordereddimensionsby more than6mrn,

I moisture content (m.c) at the time of delivery seasonedboard the moisture contentshall be
10 -15% unless other wise agreed between purchaser and

manufacturer.

I the moisture contentmustbe determinedby the oven-dry method.

I Notes: (a)- Attentionis also drawnto the needto consideranycircumstancesthat may require
boards to be seasonedto a particular m.c either within or outside the range
I specifiedabove'e.g. in areasof high or low equilibrium moisturecontent.

(b) Information on the equilibrium m.c. applicable to timber

I particular use conditionsmustbe available.

I 1.4
1.4.1 Knots and Holes
I (1) Knot~ and holes shall be measuredas the width on the face measuredbetweenlines

I parallel to the edgesof board.

1.4.2 Bow and Spring

I (1) Bow and spring shall be measuredby stretchinga string fr~m the edgeat one end of the
board to the sameedgeat the other end and measuringthe maximumdistancebetweenthe string

I and the board.

I
I ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS -5 7995 3

I
 ~~~~~~~!?-.c_~~~~
1.4.3 Twist

(1) Twist shall be measuredby placing the board so that three of its cornersare in contact
with a flat surface. The perpendiculardistancebetweenthe fourth corner and the flat surface

shall be the measureof the twist.

1.4.4 Wane and Want

(1) Wane and want shallbe measuredas the amountby which the width of the face or edge.

of a board is deficient.

I 1.4.5 Sloping Grain and Spiral Grain

I (1) Slope of grain and spiralgrain, shall be measuredover a distancesufficientto determine
the generalslope, but not less thanthreetimes the width of the board. Local variations in slope

of graiIf around knots shall be disregarded.

I ,"::i 1.4.6 Plugging of Holes and Unsound Knots

(: (1) Holes and unsoundknots of size pennitted for knot and plugged in accordancewith

Appendix B shall be regardedas soundknots. ,.

1.4.7 General Quality

(1) Imperfectionsthat canbe removedby normal machiningshall be permitted. Sapwood

on any face or edgeshall not be the causefor rejection.

1.5 GRADE DESCRIPTIONS

1.5.1 Clear Grade

,
(1) Each clear grade sawnboard shall be graded-onboth facesand both edges. It shall be

free from decay, sawn apparentlystraight and square,within the tolerancesspecified.

I (2) The boards shall be full length and free from defectson both faces and both edges.

I
I 4 EBCS -6 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD
I

I
It.S.t.l ~ Imperfections

I (a) Bow- evenlydistributed and

I (i) for board thicknessupto 2Smm not exceedingthe equivalentof sOrnm

(ii) in
for3m length.
board thickness over 2Smm and upto 40mm not exceedingthe

I (ill)
equivalentof 20mm in 3m length.
for board thicknessover 40mm not exceedingthe equivalentof 1mm in

3m length.

I (b) s;pring- evenly distributed and

;
I (i) for board width upto 100mm not exceedingthe equivalentof 3Ornmin
3m length. '
I (ii) for board width over 100mm and upto 16Ornm not exceeding the

equivalentof 20mm in 3m length.

I (iii) for board width over 160mm not exceedingthe equivalentof 1Ornmin

3m length. 1';;:-'

I (c) Twist -not exceedingthe equivalentof 1mm for each2Smm of width i; 3m

length.
(d) Cupping -not exceedingthe equivalentof 2mm in 1SOrnmof width.
I

I t~5.3 Clear Face Grade

I (1) Eachclear face grade sawnboard shall be gradedon one face and both edges. It shall
be free from decay, sawn apparently straight and square, within the tolerancesspecified in

I section 1.3.
(2) The boards shall be full length and shall be free of defects on one face and both edges
I but imperfections.shall ~e allow~ on the ~ackpr~vided that they do not impair the.use of the
board. Bow, spnng, tWist, cuppmg,sloppmggram and want/or waneshall be pernuttedas for

I clear grade.

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS -5 1995 5

I

I
 ~~ TlONOFTIMBER-
1.5.3.1 Imperfections on the face and face edges

(a) Borer Holes -Upto 2mm wide three in any 100mm x 100mmor equivalent
area of the face.

(b) Over 2mm and upto 5mm wide-two in any 2.4m length of board.

(1) Each standardgrade sawnboard shall be gradedon the best face, back and edges. It
shall be free from decay, sawn apparentlystraightand squarewithin the tolerancelimit.

I I t
;:;'" 1.5.4.1 Imperfections on standard grade

I it (a) Soundknots:- Individual wid~ or aggregatewidth at the wo.rst. cross-section

[;;.~j through the knot(s) not exceedingone-half of the overall wIdth of the board,
}~
C,!:; or 60mm wide, which ever is the lesser,and provided thatpartial encasement
I ~J: of .anykno~does n~t exceedtwo-half of the perimeterof the kno~and that any
!;' vo1d assocIatedwIth the encasementdoes not exceed5mm wIde or extend
I jr~
'Ii through the board. Pith up to 5mm wide shall be permitted.

(b) Tight encasedknots-

I ,! (i) For board widths upto 100mm-

I '.Ii'
ii' Knots up to 20mm wide -unlimited; knots over 2Ommand upto 4Omm

; wide- three in 3m;

I --(ii) For board widths over l00mm-

I ~~ Knots upto 25mm wide -unlimited; knotsover 25mmandupto sOmmwide

111 -three in 3m. A finger joints shall not be permitted within sOmmof a

I [!I tight encasedknot.

,; (c) Unsoundand defectiveknots, knaf holesand coneholes- not exceedinglOmm

J wide, not more than two suchholes in 3m length of board, and not within
12mm of an edge of a board. A finger joint shall not be permitted within

50mm of any of theseimperfections.

.i;J..,j'

.'1 I 6 EBCS. 6 1996 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

I -,
, CHAPTER 1: MILLED PRODUCTS & SA WN BOA.80S.
n~

I 1.5.5 Utility Grade

I (1) Eachutility gradesawnboardshallbe gradedon the bestface. It shall be free from

decay,sawnapparentlystraightandsquarewithinthe givenallowances.

I (~-' The boardcanbe full lengthor fingerjointed.

I 1~-S.5.1
(a) Soundknots-any,andprovidedthatpartialencasement of any knotdoesnot
I exceedone-halfof the perimeterof the knotandthatanyvoid associated
with
the encasementdoesnot exceed5mm width or extendthroughthe board.
I Pitchup to 5mmwide shallbepermitted.

(b) Tight encased

knots-

I (i) for bo~rdsof all widths-knots

up to 1Ommwideunlimited;
(ii) for boardsof all widths-knots over 1Ommup to 5Ommwide-fourin
I 3m lengthandprovidedthatanyvoid associated with encasementdoes
not exceedone-halfthe perimeterof the knot or 5mm in width, orl"~{
I extendthroughtheboard. '"'

(c) Unsoundanddetectiveknots,kno~hales,coneholes,andborerholes-
I (i) upto 5mmwide-unlimited. '

(ii) over 5mm andupto 20mmwide notmorethantwo suchholesin any

I 3mlengthof board. For unsoundanddefective~ots, knotholes,cone
holesandborerhqlesexceeding
2Ommwide.

I A finger joint-shall'not be permittedwithin'5Ommof any of these

I imperfections.
(d) Bow -evenly distributedandnotexceeding
the equivalentof 5Ommin 3 -4m

I length.
(e) Twist -not exceeding
the equivalentof 4mmfor each25mmof width in 3m

I length.
I (f) Cupping-not exceeding
the equivalentof 2mm in lOOmm
width.

I ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS -5 1995 7

 UTILIZA TION OF TIMBER

(g) Overgrowth of injury -tight, not exceeding450mm long individually. Any

void associatedwith the injury shall not exceed5mmwide and shall not extend
through the board.

A finger joint shall not be permittedwithin 5Ommof an overgrowth of injury.

(h) End splits -not exceeding15Ommlong in boardsup to 15Ommwidth.

I
I
I 8 EBCS -5 1995 ETHIOPIANBUILDINGCODESTANDARD
.